2500 (2015) - Automotive RAM - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Automobile - Full-Size Pickup Truck
Brand	RAM
Model	2500 (2015)
Year	2015
Engine Options	5.7L V8 HEMI, 6.4L V8 HEMI, 6.7L Cummins Turbo Diesel I6
Transmission	6-Speed Automatic, 6-Speed Manual (diesel)
Drivetrain	Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) or Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
Fuel Type	Gasoline or Diesel
Fuel Capacity	Approximately 31 gallons (gasoline) or 32 gallons (diesel)
Maximum Towing Capacity	Up to 17,970 lbs (depending on configuration)
Payload Capacity	Up to 4,000 lbs (depending on configuration)
Dimensions (Approx.)	Length: 248-260 in, Width: 79 in, Height: 78-80 in
Curb Weight (Approx.)	6,000 - 7,500 lbs (depending on cab/engine)
Seating Capacity	2-6 passengers (Regular/Quad/Crew Cab)
Key Safety Features	Advanced Front Airbags, Side Airbags, Seat Belt Pretensioners, ABS, ESP, Hill Descent Control, Trailer Sway Control
Infotainment	Uconnect radio with touchscreen available, Bluetooth, steering wheel audio controls
Notable Equipment	Keyless Enter-N-Go, Remote Start, Heated Seats/Steering Wheel, Air Suspension, ParkSense Rear Park Assist
Manual Pages	888
Language	English

Frequently Asked Questions - 2500 (2015) RAM

How do I use the remote start system?

Press the REMOTE START button on the key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle will start and run for 15 minutes. Ensure the vehicle is in PARK, doors closed, and hood shut. Refer to Remote Starting System in the owner's manual.

What is the proper way to wear my seat belt?

Position the lap belt low across your hips, below your abdomen. The shoulder belt should cross your chest and shoulder, not your neck. Insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove slack. See Lap/Shoulder Belts section for details.

How do I install a child restraint using the seat belt?

First, ensure the seat belt is in Automatic Locking Mode (ALR): pull the webbing all the way out until it stops, then let it retract while hearing a clicking sound. Once retracted, pull again to tighten. Use the tether anchor if available. Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an airbag.

What is the recommended maintenance schedule?

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in the manual. Routine oil changes every 10,000 miles or as indicated by the oil life monitor. Tire rotation every 6,000 miles. Detailed intervals are in Section 8 of the owner's manual.

How does the air suspension work?

The air suspension automatically adjusts ride height for load and performance. You can also lower the vehicle using the key fob for easier entry/loading. The system includes Entry/Exit mode, Normal, and Off-Road settings. See Air Suspension System in Section 5 for more.

What should I do if my key fob battery dies?

Remove the emergency key from the key fob to manually unlock the door. To start the vehicle, press the nose of the fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button. Replace the fob battery with a CR2032. Instructions in Transmitter Battery Replacement.

How do I enable the auto door locks?

Auto door locks are enabled by default. When the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h), all doors lock automatically. You can enable/disable this feature through Uconnect Settings. Refer to Automatic Door Locks in the manual.

What is the proper tire pressure for my RAM 2500?

Check the Tire and Loading Information label on the driver’s door jamb. Typical front tire pressure is 55-65 psi and rear is 60-80 psi, depending on load. Maintain pressures as indicated for safety and fuel economy. See Inflation Pressures in Section 7.

How do I tow a trailer safely?

Ensure the trailer is properly hitched, lights are connected, and braking system is set (if equipped). Use the trailer brake controller. Do not exceed the towing capacity (see manual). Check mirror adjustments. Refer to Trailer Towing in Section 5 for weight limits and procedures.

What does the check engine light mean?

The check engine light indicates a potential engine or emissions system issue. If it flashes, reduce speed and seek service immediately. If steady, schedule an appointment with your dealer. The on-board diagnostic system may store codes. See Malfunction Indicator Light in the manual.

USER MANUAL 2500 (2015) RAM

Stylized emblem featuring a ram's head inside a shield (no text or symbols)

2015

RAM

RAM TRUCK

1500/2500/3500

OWNER'S MANUAL

VEHICLESSOLDINCANADA

WithrespecttoanyVehiclesSoldinCanada,thenameFCA USLLCshallbedeemedtobedeletedandthenameFCA CanadaInc. usedinsubstitutiontherefore.

DRIVINGANDALCOHOL

Drunkendrivingisoneofthemostfrequentcausesof accidents.

Yourdrivingabilitycanbeseriouslyimpairedwithblood alcohollevelsfarbelowthelegalminimum.Ifyouare drinking,don'tdrive.Ridewithadesignatednon-drinkingdriver,callacab,afriend,orusepublictransportation.

WARNING!

Drivingafterdrinkingcanleadtoanaccident. Yourperceptionsarelesssharp,yourreflexesare slower,andyourjudgmentisimpairedwhenyou havebeendrinking.Neverdrinkandthendrive.

Thismanualillustratesanddescribestheoperationof featuresandequipmentthatareeitherstandardorop-tionalonthisvehicle. Thismanualmayalsoincludea descriptionoffeaturesandequipmentthatarenolonger availableorwerenotorderedonthisvehicle.Please disregardanyfeaturesandequipmentdescribedinthis manualthatarenotonthisvehicle.

FCAUSLLCreservestherighttomakechangesindesign andspecifications, and/ormakeadditionstoorimprovementstoitsproductswithoutimposinganyobligation uponitselftoinstallthemonproductspreviouslymanufactured.

Copyright©2016FCAUSLLC

SECTION PAGE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION....3
2 THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE. 9
3 UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE.... 1 1 9
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL....281
5 STARTING AND OPERATING ....
6 WHAT TODOINEMERGENCIES....
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE....
8 MAINTENANCESCHEDULES. 843
9 IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE. 853
10 INDEX 8 10

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

■INTRODUCTION....4
■HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL....4
■WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS....6
■VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS....6

■VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER....6
■VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS....7

4 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.

This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should bestored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your satisfaction.

RAM is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's equipment.

The detailed index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner's Manual:

010533317

6 INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owner's Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner's Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. Refer to the Warranty Information book, Section 2.1.C. Such equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.

Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by the conversion/camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions are missing, please contact your authorized dealer for assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the applicable manufacturer.

For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to: www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer's technical support. For service issues, contact your authorized dealer.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle

frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.

Close-up of a car's side profile showing a curved seat and dashboard, with a black arrow pointing to a detail (no text or symbols)

VehicleIdentificationNumber

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Anymodificationsoralterationstothisvehiclecould seriouslyaffectitsroadworthinessandsafetyand mayleadtoacollisionresultinginseriousinjuryor death.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

■A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS....12

□Ignition Node Module (IGNM) ..... 1 2

☐Keyless Push Button Ignition — If Equipped . . .13

□Key Fob....

□Removing Key Fob From Ignition....16

□Key-In-Ignition Reminder....18

■SENTRY KEY®....18

□Replacement Keys....19

□Customer Key Programming....20

□General Information....20

■VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM....21

□Rearming Of The System....2 1

□To Arm The System....2 1

1 4 □To Disarm The System....2 2

□Security System Manual Override....23

■ILLUMINATED APPROACH....23

■REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ..... 2 4

□Remote Unlock The Doors....26

□To Lock The Doors....27

□Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock....27

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

□Using The Panic Alarm....28

☐RKE Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of The Vehicle) — If Equipped ..... 2 8

□Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . 3 0

□Transmitter Battery Replacement....30

□General Information....3 3

■REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .34

□How To Use Remote Start....34

■DOOR LOCKS 37

□Manual Door Locks....37

□Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 3 8

□Child-Protection Door Lock....40

■KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ 42

■WINDOWS 46

□Power Windows — If Equipped ..... 4 6

□Wind Buffeting 49

■OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..... 4 9

□Important Safety Precautions....50

□Seat Belt Systems....5 1

□ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) .....67

□Child Restraints 82

□ Transporting Pets ....113

■ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .113

■SAFETY TIPS....1 1 4

□Transporting Passengers....1 1 4

□Exhaust Gas....1 1 5

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

□Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle....1 1 6

☐Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle....1 1 8

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or keyless ignition system. The key start ignition system consists of a either a bladed key with an immobilizer chip in it, or a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an Ignition Node Module (IGNM). The keyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.

Ignition Node Module (IGNM)

The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates similar to an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.

IgnitionModule

1—OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3—ON/RUN
4—START

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

Keyless Push Button Ignition — If Equipped

This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.

The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start RUN will illuminate.

NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition switch and with your foot applied on the brake pedal.

KeylessPushButtonIgnition

1—OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3—ON/RUN

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Key Fob

Key Fob — If Equipped

The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob.

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.

To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.

NOTE: When using the emergency key to gain access to your vehicle, be aware that the security alarm may be triggered. Insert the Key Fob into the ignition and place the ignition in the ON/RUN mode to disarm the security system.

Illustration of a car key with control panel and battery (no text or symbols)

020207762

EmergencyKeyRemoval

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

Keyless Push Button Ignition Key Fob — If Equipped This Keyless Push Button Ignition Key Fob allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment. The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start RUN will illuminate. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob.

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.

To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch on the backside of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.

NOTE: When using the emergency key to gain access to your vehicle, be aware that the security alarm may be triggered. Insert the Key Fob into the ignition and place the ignition in the ON/RUN mode to disarm the security system.

Two views of a car key device: one showing a stylized knife and the other a control panel with a scroll icon (no text or symbols visible)

0202006333
EmergencyKeyRemovalKeylessEnter-N-Go™Fob

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key into the door lock cylinder with either side up.

Removing Key Fob From Ignition

Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an automatic transmission). Turn the Key Fob to the OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.

NOTE:

• The power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/ Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

- For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

CAUTION!

• If your vehicle battery becomes slow or dead, your KeyFob will become locked in the ignition.
• DonotattempttoremovetheKeyFobwhileinthis condition,damagecouldoccurtotheKeyFobor ignitionmodule.Onlyremovetheemergencykey forlockingandunlockingthedoors.
• LeavetheKeyFobintheignitionandeither:
• JumpStartthevehicle.
• Chargethebattery.

WARNING!

• NeverusethePARKpositionasasubstituteforthe parkingbrake.Alwaysapplytheparkingbrake fullywhenparkedtoguardagainstvehiclemovementandpossibleinjuryordamage.
• Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysremovethekey fobfromtheignitionandlockyourvehicle.If equippedwithKeylessEnter-N-Go,alwaysmake surethekeylessignitionnodeisin"OFF"mode, removetheKeyFobfromthevehicleandlockthe vehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoanunlockedvehicle.
• Allowingchildrentobeinavehicleunattendedis dangerousforanumberofreasons.Achildor

WARNING!(Continued)

otherscouldbeseriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbewarnednottotouchtheparking brake,brakepedalorthegearsselector.

- DonotleavetheKeyFobinornearthevehicle, or inalocationaccessibletochildren, and donot leavetheignitionofavehicleequipped with KeylessEnter-N-GointheACCorON/RUNmode. Achildcouldoperatepowerwindows, othercontrols, ormovethevehicle.

- Donotleavechildrenoranimalsinsideparked vehiclesinhotweather.Interiorheatbuild-upmay causeseriousinjuryordeath.

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

An unlocked carisan invitation to thieves. Always removethe key from the ignition and lockalldoors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Key-In-Ignition Reminder

Opening the driver's door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the Key Fob.

NOTE:

• "Keyed" Ignition systems will chime in OFF or ACC when the driver door is open.
• "Keyless" Ignition systems will chime in ACC or RUN when the driver door is open.

- If equipped with Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID), the EVIC or DID will display "Key In Ignition."

SENTRY KEY®

The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, an Ignition Node Module, Keyless Push Button Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid Key Fob is used to start

and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.

NOTE: A Key Fob that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key.

During normal operation, after turning on the ignition switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to try to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

The SentryKey® Immobilizersystemis not compatible with some aftermarket remotestartingsystems. Useofthesesystemsmayresultinvehiclestarting problemsandlossofsecurityprotection.

All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

Replacement Keys

NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

• AlwaysremovetheKeyFobsfromthevehicleand lockalldoorswhenleavingthevehicleunattended.
• ForvehiclesequippedwithKeylessEnter-N-Go™, alwaysremembertoplacetheignitionintheOFF position.

NOTE: Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed.

When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.

Customer Key Programming

Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer.

General Information

The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM

The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the Vehicle Security Alarm is activated, interior switches for door locks are disabled. The system provides both audible and visible signals for the first three minutes the horn will sound and the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security Light will flash repeatedly. For an additional 15 minutes only, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or turn signals, and Vehicle Security Light will flash.

Rearming Of The System

The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15 additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security Light flashing, if the system has not been disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still present, the system will ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

To Arm The System

Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:

1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to "Starting Procedures" in "Starting And Operating" for further information).

2. For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is "OFF."

3. For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is "OFF" and the key is physically removed from the ignition.

4. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:

5. Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.

6. Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

same exterior zone (refer to "Keyless Enter- N-GoTM" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information).

- Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

3. If any doors are open, close them.

The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the power door locks, or use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock the doors. After all the doors are locked and closed, the Vehicle Security Light, in the instrument panel cluster, will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set. After the alarm is set, the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the system is armed.

To Disarm The System

The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods:

1. Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
2. Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a valid Key Fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passive entry door handle (if equipped, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go™" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information).
3. Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position.

- For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, push the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/ Stop button (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).

- For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

Security System Manual Override

The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger.

ILLUMINATED APPROACH

The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the doors or open any door.

This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds, or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.

The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in the "Dome ON" position (rotate horizontal thumb wheel on the bottom of the switch to the far right detent position).

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The illuminated entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the "Dome OFF" position (rotate horizontal thumb wheel on the bottom of the switch to the far left detent position).

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated approach lights under the outside mirrors, they can be turned off by using the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) controls (if NOT equipped with a touchscreen radio) or the Uconnect® radio (if equipped with a touchscreen radio). For further information, refer to "EVIC/DID" or "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel."

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock all doors, tailgate, and the RamBox® (if equipped) as well as activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held radio transmitter with integrated key. The transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox® (if equipped). The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables the system from responding to any button pushes from that RKE transmitter. Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters.

Top-down view of a car's internal compartments with no visible text or symbols

020207434
KeyFobWithRemoteKeylessEntry(RKE)Transmitter (IGNM)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

0202005004
KeyFobWithRKETransmitterKeylessEnter-N-Go™ Fob(KIN)

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Remote Unlock The Doors

Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver's door. Push the unlock button twice within five seconds to unlock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox® (if equipped). The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.

NOTE:The EVIC/DID or Uconnect® Settings are setup for driver door first, otherwise this will unlock all doors.

RemoteKeyUnlock, DriverDoor/AllDoorsFirst

This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver's door or all doors on the first push of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:

• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

NOTE: Pushing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System.

FlashLampsWithRemoteKeyLock

This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:

• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

To Lock The Doors

Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox® (if equipped). The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock

This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:

• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Pushing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System.

Using The Panic Alarm

To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, push and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.

The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.

NOTE:

• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will remain on.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system.

RKE Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of The Vehicle) — If Equipped

For easy entry and loading, your vehicle can be lowered by pushing the Key Fob air suspension lowering button two times. When Remote key FOB lowering is requested, the vehicle will

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

send a series of chirps and flashes to alert the customer that the operation has begun and will continue these alerts until it successfully lowers.

The following conditions must be met for the vehicle to lower remotely:

• The vehicle must not already be in Entry/Exit (Park) ride height.
• The vehicle battery must be fully charged.
• All doors must be closed.
• The ignition key must be out of the vehicle.

CancellingRemoteLowering

Vehicle lowering can be cancelled at anytime. When vehicle lowering is cancelled, the vehicle will raise up to the next defined level and lock out the remote lowering feature until the ignition has been cycled ON/OFF.

To cancel vehicle lowering, push the Key Fob air suspension lowering button one time during the lowering process. When vehicle lowering is cancelled, the horn will chirp two times and the hazard lights will flash four times. Once raising is completed, the horn will chirp one time.

NOTE: Refer to "Air Suspension System" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Programming Additional Transmitters

If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter, contact your authorized dealer for details.

Transmitter Battery Replacement

The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery.

NOTE:

• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.

• Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.

Illustration of a car key with a separate view of its blade and handle (no text or symbols)

020207436

EmergencyKeyRemoval

Two car key holders: one with a metallic tool and the other a black control panel with icons (no text or symbols visible)

0202005021
EmergencyKeyRemoval

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

1. Separating RKE halves requires screw removal – if equipped, and gently prying the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal.

Close-up of a car's front and side views showing internal components (no text or symbols)

RemoveScrewFromTransmitterCase

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Illustration of a handheld device with a pointed tip and handle, no text or symbols present

021334199

Illustration of a car key with a handle and open lid (no text or symbols)

0213004940

SeparatingTransmitterCaseSeparatingTransmitterCase

1. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over (battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the

new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.

1. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two halves together, reposition and secure the screw as shown in step #2 for removal.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions:

1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years with normal usage.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).

NOTE:

• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE transmitter may reduce this range.

How To Use Remote Start

All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:

- Shift lever in PARK

• Doors closed
• Hood closed
  •HAZARD switch off
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
  •RKE PANIC button not pushed
• Fuel meets minimum requirement
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
  • Vehicle security alarm not active

WARNING!

• Donotstartorrunanengineinaclosedgarageor confinedarea.ExhaustgascontainsCarbonMonoxide(CO)whichisodorlessandcolorless.Carbon Monoxideispoisonousandcancauseseriousinjuryordeathwheninhaled.
• KeepRemoteKeylessEntry(RKE)transmitters awayfromchildren.OperationoftheRemoteStart System,windows,doorlocksorothercontrols couldcauseseriousinjuryordeath.

RemoteStartAbortMessage

The following messages will display in the EVIC/DID if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset

The EVIC/DID message stays active until the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position.

ToEnterRemoteStartMode

Push and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The parking lights will flash, vehicle doors will lock, and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Once the vehicle has started, the engine will run for 15 minutes.

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start will automatically lock the doors.
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.

ToExitRemoteStartModeWithoutDrivingThe Vehicle

Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.

NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.

ToExitRemoteStartModeAndDriveTheVehicle

Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

RemoteStartComfortSystems—IfEquipped

When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically

turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated. These features will stay on through the duration of Remote Start or until the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.

The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and deactivated through the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Customer Programmable Features" in "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information on Remote Start Comfort System operation.

DOOR LOCKS

Manual Door Locks

Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lock knob down or unlocked by moving the lock knob up.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and seat area with no visible text or symbols

DoorLockKnob

Front doors may be opened with the inside door handle without lifting the lock knob.

Doors locked before closing will remain locked when closed.

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock on your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Donotleavechildrenoranimalsinsideparked vehiclesinhotweather.Interiorheatbuild-upmay causeseriousinjuryordeath.
• Forpersonalsecurityandsafetyintheeventofan collision,lockthevehicledoorsasyoudriveas wellaswhenyouparkandleavethevehicle.
• Beforeexitingvehicle, alwaysturnthevehicle OFF, applytheparkingbrake, shifttheautomatic transmission into PARKorthemanualtransmission into REVERSE, and pushignition button to placeignition in OFF mode.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoanunlockedvehicle.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Allowingchildrentobeinavehicleunattendedis dangerousforanumberofreasons.Achildor otherscouldbeseriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbewarnednottotouchtheparking brake,brakepedalorthegearselector.
• DonotleavetheKeyFobinornethevehicle, or inalocationaccessibletochildren, and donot leavetheignitionofavehicleequipped with KeylessEnter-N-GointheACCorON/RUNmode. Achildcouldoperatepowerwindows, othercontrols, ormovethevehicle.

Power Door Locks — If Equipped

A power door LOCK switch is on each front door trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.

(Continued)

Interior view of a car dashboard with a control panel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

PowerDoorLockSwitchLocation

If you push the power door LOCK switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking your Key Fob in the vehicle. Removing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

operate. A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the ignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.

AutomaticDoorLocks—IfEquipped

The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or through the Uconnect® Settings in your radio.

AutomaticDoorsUnlock—IfEquipped

This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when either front door is opened. This will occur only after the vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle has been driven (shifted out of PARK and all doors closed).

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

AutomaticDoorsUnlockProgramming—If Equipped

The Automatic Doors Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled as follows:

• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

NOTE: Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accordance with local laws.

Child-Protection Door Lock

To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear seat, the rear doors (if equipped) of your vehicle have the Child-Protection Door Lock system.

Close-up of a car door panel with a black arrow pointing to a small circular detail (no text or symbols visible)

Child-ProtectionDoorLockLocation

To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to engage and disengage the Child-Protection locks. When the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.

Close-up of a car seatbelt with icons for loading, cleaning, and storage (no text or symbols)

ChildLockControl

022605852

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

WARNING!

Avoidtrappinganyoneinavehicleinacollision. Rememberthatthereardoorscanonlybeopened fromtheoutsidewhentheChild-Protectionlocksare engaged.

NOTE:

• After setting the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position.
- For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle.

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™

The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle's Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go™" in "Starting And Operating" for further information. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle's door(s) without having to push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.

NOTE:

• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.

• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door Handle, and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the security alarm.

• The vehicles security alarm can be armed/disarmed by pushing the passive entry key fob lock/unlock buttons (if equipped).

To Unlock From The Driver's Side:

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver door handle, grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver's door automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.

Hand holding a car door handle, no visible text or symbols on the object

GrabTheDoorHandleToUnlock

NOTE: If "Unlock All Doors 1st Press" is programmed, all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver's door handle. To select between "Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" and "Unlock All Doors 1st Press," refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To Unlock From The Passenger Side:

With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.

NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver's door unlock preference setting ("Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" or "Unlock All Doors 1st Press").

Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter In Vehicle:

To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position.

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters. If one of the vehicle's Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).

To Lock The Vehicle's Doors:

With one of the vehicle's Passive Entry RKE transmitters within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all doors.

Hand pointing at a car door handle (no text or symbols visible)

PushTheDoorHandleButtonToLock

Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).

Close-up of a hand holding a tool inside a circular black-and-white diagram (no text or symbols)

DoNOTGrabTheDoorHandleWhenLocking

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

NOTE:

• After pushing the door handle LOCK button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
- The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead.

The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle's interior door panel.

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WINDOWS

Power Windows — If Equipped

Interior view of a car's dashboard showing the left side with a control panel and a white arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols visible)

PowerWindowSwitches

The control on the left front door panel has UP-DOWN switches that give you fingertip control of all power windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on the front passenger door for passenger window control and on the rear doors of the Quad Cab and Crew Cab models. The windows will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC position, and for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or until a front door is opened.

NOTE: The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when either front door is opened.

WARNING!

Neverleavechildrenunattendedinvehicle.Donot leavetheKeyFobinornearthevehicleorina locationaccessibletochildren, anddonotleavethe ignitionofavehicleequippedwithKeylessEnter-N-GointheACCorON/RUNmode.Occupants,

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the window while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.

Auto-Down

Both the driver and front passenger window switch have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and the window will go down automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.

To open the window part way, push to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop.

Auto-UpFeatureWithAnti-PinchProtection (4-DoorModelsDriverAndFrontPassengerDoor Only)—IfEquipped

Lift the window switch fully upward to the second detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.

To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To close the window part way, lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop.

NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during the auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually.

WARNING!

Thereisnoanti-pinchprotectionwhenthewindow isalmostclosed.Besuretoclearalobjectsfromthe windowbeforeclosing.

ResetAuto-Up

Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:

1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open.

WindowLOCKOUTSwitch(4-DoorModelsOnly)

The window LOCKOUT switch on the driver's door allows you to disable the window control on the rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors, push the window LOCK button into the latched or down position. To enable the window

controls, push the window LOCK button again and return the switch to the released or up position.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a control panel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

WindowLockoutSwitch

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49

windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:

• Seat Belt Systems
  • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Important Safety Precautions

Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to "Child Restraints")
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to "Child Restraints") should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child

restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

1. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
2. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
3. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.

4. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate.

5. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door and you could be injured.

6. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under "If You Need Consumer Assistance."

WARNING!

• Neverplacearear-facingchildrestraintinfrontof anairbag.AdeployingpassengerAdvancedFront AirBagcancauseddeathorseriousinjurytoachild 12yearsoryounger,includingachildinarear-facingchildrestraint.
• Onlyusearear-facingchildrestraintinvehicle witharearseat.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

EnhancedSeatBeltUseReminderSystem (BeltAlert)

3 BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled.

The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.

BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.

NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver's or outboard front passenger's (if equipped with BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled.

Lap/ShoulderBelts

All seating positions except the Quad Cab®, Mega Cab® and Crew Cab front center seating position have combination lap/shoulder belts.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Relyingontheairbagsalonecouldleadtomore severeinjuriesinacollision.Theairbagswork withyourseatbelttorestrainyouproperly.In somecollisions,theairbagswon'tdeployatall. Alwayswearyourseatbelteventhoughyouhave airbags.
• Inacollision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckledup. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or

WARNING!(Continued)

otherpassengers,oryoucanbethrownoutofthe vehicle.Alwaysbesureyouandothersinyour vehiclearebuckledupproperly.

• Itisdangeroustorideinacargoarea,insideor outsideofvehicle.Inacollision,peopleridingin theseareasaremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjured orkilled.
• Donotallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseat belts.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.
• Wearingyourseatbeltincorrectlycouldmakeyour injuriesinacollisionmuchworse.Youmight sufferinternalinjuries,oryoucouldevenslideout oftheseatbelt.Followtheseinstructionstowear

(Continued)

(Continued)

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

yourseatbeltsafelyandtokeepyourpassengers safe,too.

• Twopeopleshouldneverbebeltedintoasingle seatbelt.Peoplebeltedtogethercancrashintoone anotherinacollision,hurtingoneanotherbadly. Neverusealap/shoulderbeltoralapbeltformore thanoneperson,nomatterwhattheirsize.
• Alapbeltworntoohighcanincreasetheriskof injuryinacollision. Theseatbeltforceswon'tbeat thestronghipandpelvicbones, butacrossyour abdomen. Alwayswearthelappartofyourseat beltaslowaspossibleandkeepitsnug.
• Atwistedseatbeltmaynotprotectyouproperly.In acollision,itcouldevencutintoyou.Besurethe seatbeltisflatagainstyourbody,withouttwists.If youcan'tstraightenaseatbeltinyourvehicle,take

WARNING!(Continued)

ittoyourauthorizeddealerimmediatelyandhave itfixed.

• Aseatbeltthatisbuckledintothewrongbuckle willnotprotectyouproperly. Thelapportioncould ridetoohighonyourbody, possiblycausinginternalinjuries. Alwaysbuckleyourseatbeltintothe bucklenearestyou.
• Aseatbeltthatistooloosewillnotprotectyou properly.Inasuddenstop,youcouldmovetoofar forward,increasingthepossibilityofinjury.Wear yourseatbeltsnugly.
• Aseatbeltthatiswornunderyourarmisdangerous.Yourbodycouldstriketheinsidesurfacesof thevehicleinacollision,increasingheadandneck injury.Aseatbeltwornunderthearmcancause internalinjuries.Ribsaren'tasstrongassshoulder

(Continued)

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

bones.Weartheseatbeltoveryourshouldersothat yourstrongestboneswilltaketheforceinacollision.

• Ashoulderbeltplacedbehindyouwillnotprotect youfrominjuryduringacollision.Youaremore likelytohityourheadinacollisionifyoudonot wearyourshoulderbelt.Thelapandshoulderbelt aremeanttobeusedtogether.
• Afrayedortornseatbeltcouldripapartina collisionandleaveyouwithnoprotection.Inspect theseatbeltsystemperiodically,checkingforcuts, frays,orlooseparts.Damagedpartsmustbereplacedimmediately.Donotdisassembleormodify theseatbeltsystem.Seatbeltassembliesmustbe replacedafteracollision.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

Lap/ShoulderBeltOperatingInstructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Interior view of a car showing the seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

PullingOutTheLatchPlate

1. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

Interior view of a car showing the seat, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

InsertingLatchPlateIntoBuckle

1. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

Interior view of a car showing the backrest, seatbelt, and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

PositioningTheLapBelt

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57

1. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
2. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.

FirstRowCenterSeatBeltOperatingInstructions (RegularCabOnly)

The first row center seat belt features a seat belt with a mini-latch and mini-buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded. The mini-buckle and seat belt can then be stored out of the way in the seat for added convenience.

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Remove the mini-latch and regular latch from its stowed position on the seat.

Close-up of a hand using a tool to adjust a car seatbelt, with a black arrow pointing to the button (no text or symbols visible)

DetachingBuckleWithSeatBeltTongue

Interior view of a car seatbelt assembly with a black arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols visible)

InsertingLatchPlate

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a belt drive mechanism with two arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

InUsePosition

1. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over the seat.

2. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the [right/ left] head restraint.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59

1. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a "click."

2. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle.
2. To disengage the mini-latch from the mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate into the center red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into its stowed position.

WARNING!

- If themini-latchandmini-bucklearenotproperly connected when theseatbeltisused by an occupant, theseatbeltwill not be able to provide proper restraint and will increase risk of injury in acollision.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- Whenreattachingthemini-latchandmini-buckle, ensuretheseatbeltwebbingisnottwisted. If the webbingistwisted, followtheprecedingproceduretodetachthemini-latchandmini-buckle, untwistthewebbing, andreattachthemini-latch andmini-buckle.

Lap/ShoulderBeltUntwistingProcedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

1. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
2. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.

AdjustableUpperShoulderBeltAnchorage

In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves you best.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

AdjustableAnchorage

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position.

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.

SeatBeltExtender

If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.

WARNING!

- ONLYuseaSeatBeltExtenderifitisphysically requiredinordertoproperlyfittheoriginalseat beltsystem.DONOTUSEtheSeatBeltExtender if,whenworn,thedistancebetweenthefrontedge oftheSeatBeltExtenderbuckleandthecenterof theoccupant'sbodyisLESSthan6inches.

- UsingaSeatBeltExtenderwhennotneededcan increasetheriskofseriousinjuryordeathina collision.OnlyusetheSeatBeltExtenderwhenthe lapbeltisnotlongenoughandonlyuseinthe recommendedseatingpositions.Removeandstore theSeatBeltExtenderwhennotneeded.

SeatBeltsAndPregnantWomen

We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision.

SeatBeltPretensioner

The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

EnergyManagementFeature—IfEquipped

This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.

FrontCenterLapBelts

The front center seating position for the Quad Cab®, Mega Cab® and Crew Cab has a lap belt only. To buckle the lap belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."To lengthen the lap belt, tilt the latch plate and pull.

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To remove slack, pull the loose end of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug against the hips. Sit back and upright in the seat, then adjust the seat belt as tightly as is comfortable.

AutomaticLockingRetractors(ALR)-IfEquipped

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to "Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt" under the "Child Restraints" section of this manual. The table below defines the type of feature for each seating position.

RegularCab

0226061828

QuadCab®/MegaCab®/CrewCab

- ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65

sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.

WARNING!

- Neverplacearear-facingchildrestraintinfrontof anairbag.AdeployingPassengerAdvancedFront AirBagcancausedeathorseriousinjurytoachild

(Continued)

66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

12yearsoryounger,includingachildinarear-facingchildrestraint.

- Onlyusearear-facingchildrestraintinvehicle witharearseat.

How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking

Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

WARNING!

• Theseatbeltassemblymustbereplacedifthe switchableAutomaticLockingRetractor(ALR)featureoranyotherseatbeltfunctionisnotworking properlywhencheckedaccordingtotheproceduresintheServiceManual.
• Failuretoreplacetheseatbeltassemblycould increasetheriskofinjuryincollisions.
• DonotusetheAutomaticLockingModetorestrain occupantswhoarewearingtheseatbeltorchildren whoareusingboosterseats. Thelockedmodeis onlyusedtoinstallrear-facingorforward-facing childrestraintsthathaveaharnessforrestraining thechild.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

AirBagSystemComponents

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components:

•Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
•Steering Wheel and Column
- Instrument Panel
- Knee Impact Bolsters
- Advanced Front Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67

• Front And Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
• Seat Belt Pretenioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

AdvancedFrontAirBags

This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver's Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger's Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" are embossed on the air bag covers.

68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

AdvancedFrontAirBagAndKneeBolsterLocations

1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Driver/Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters

WARNING!

• Beingtooclosetothesteeringwheelorinstrument panelduringAdvancedFrontAirBagdeployment couldcauseseriousinjury,includingdeath.Air bagsneedroomtoinflate.Sitback,comfortably extendingyourarmstoreachthesteeringwheelor instrumentpanel.
• Neverplacearear-facingchildrestraintinfrontof anairbag.AdeployingPassengerAdvancedFront AirBagcancausedeathorseriousinjurytoachild 12yearsoryounger,includingachildinarear-facingchildrestraint.
• Onlyusearear-facingchildrestraintinvehicle witharearseat.

AdvancedFrontAirBagFeatures

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system components.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.

WARNING!

• Noobjectsshouldbeplacedoverorneartheair bagontheinstrumentpanelsteeringwheel, becauseanysuchobjectscouldcauseharmifthe vehicleisinacollisionsevereenoughtocausethe airbagstoinflate.
• Donotputanythingonoraroundtheairbag coversorattempttoopenthemmanually.Youmay damagetheairbagsandyoucouldbeinjured because the airbagsmaynolongerbefunctional. Theprotective covers for the airbagcushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• Relyingontheairbagsalonecouldleadtomore severeinjuriesinacollision.Theairbagswork withyourseatbelttorestrainyouproperly.In

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

somecollisions, airbags won't deploy at all. Always we are your seat belt seventh though you have air bags.

AdvancedFrontAirBagOperation

Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.

On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.

When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

KneeImpactBolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags.

WARNING!

• Donotdrill, cut, ortamper with the knee impact bolstersinany way.
• Donotmountanyaccessoriestothekneeimpact bolsterssuchasalarmlights, stereos, citizenband radios, etc.

SupplementalSideAirBags

Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:

1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71

SABs are marked with a "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG" label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.

FrontSupplementalSeat-MountedSideAirBagLabel

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impact and certain rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback's trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

WARNING!

Donotuseaccessoryseatcoversorplaceobjects betweenyouandtheSideAirBags;theperformance couldbeadverselyaffectedand/orobjectscouldbe pushedintoyou,causingseriousinjury.

1. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled "SRS AIRBAG" or "AIRBAG."

SupplementalSideAirBagInflatableCurtain(SABIC) LabelLocation

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front and rear seat outboard occupants. SABICs may reduce the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle

rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events.

WARNING!

• Yourvehicleisequippedwithleftandright SupplementalSideAirBagInflatableCurtains (SABICs).Donotstackluggageorothercargoup highenoughtoblockthedeploymentofthe SABICs. ThetrimcoveringabovethesidewindowswheretheSABICanditsdeploymentpath arelocatedshouldremainfreefromanyobstructions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for the SABICstoworkasintended, donotinstallany accessoryitemsinyourvehiclewhichcouldalter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Donotaddroofracksthatrequirepermanentattachments(boltsorscrews)forinstallation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicleforanyreason.

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The SABICs and SABs ("Side Air Bags") are designed to activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller ("ORC") determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.

Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child.

WARNING!

• SideAirBagsneedroomtoinflate.Donotlean againstthedoororwindow.Situprightinthe centeroftheseat.
• BeingtooclosetotheSideAirBagsduringdeploymentcouldcauseyou tobeseverelyinjured or killed.
• RelyingontheSideAirBagsalonecouldleadto moresevereinjuriesinacollision.TheSideAir Bagsworkwithyourseatbelttorestrainyou

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

properly.Insomecollisions,SideAirBagswon't deployatall.Alwayswearyourseatbelteven thoughyouhaveSideAirBags.

NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

SideImpacts

In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced Front Air Bags deploy.

RolloverEvents

Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A

76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the SABs and SABICs on both sides of the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the SABs and SABICs, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a near rollover event.

IfADeploymentOccurs

The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.

NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:

- The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags

deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven't healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.

- As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployedairbagsandseatbeltpretensionerscannot protectyouinanothercollision.Havetheairbags, seatbeltpretensioners,andtheseatbeltretractor assembliesreplacedbyanauthorizeddealerimmediately.Also,havetheOccupantRestraintController Systemservicedaswell.

NOTE:

• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77

EnhancedAccidentResponseSystem

In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition switch is turned to the "OFF" position.
• Unlock the doors automatically.

78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

SystemResetProcedure

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.

AirBagWarningLight

The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated bag system electrical components.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79

free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

WARNING!

IgnoringtheAirBagWarningLightinyourinstrumentpanelcouldmeanyouwon'thavetheairbags toprotectyouinacollision.Ifthelightdoesnotcome onasabulbcheckwhentheignitionisfirstplaced in theonposition,andstaysonafteryoustartthe vehicle,orifitcomesonasyoudrive,havean authorizeddealerservicetheairbagsystemimmediately.

80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

MaintainingYourAirBagSystem

WARNING!

• Modificationstoanypartoftheairbagsystem couldcauseittofailwhenyouneedit.Youcould beinjurediftheairbagsystemisnotthereto protectyou.Donotmodifythecomponentsor wiring,includingaddinganykindofbadgesor stickerstothesteeringwheelhubtrimcoverorthe upperrightsideoftheinstrumentpanel.Donot modifythefrontbumper,vehiclebodystructure,or addaftermarketsidestepsorrunningboards.
• Itisdangeroustotrytorepairanypartoftheair bagsystemyourself.Besuretotellanyonewho worksonyourvehiclethatithasanairbagsystem.
• Donotattempttomodifyanypartofyourairbag system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or may

WARNING!(Continued)

notfunctionproperlyifmodificationsaremade. Takeyourvehicletoanauthorizeddealerforany airbagsystemservice.Ifyourseat,includingyour trimcoverandcushion,needstobeservicedinany way(includingremovalorloosening/tighteningof seatattachmentbolts),takethevehicletoyour authorizeddealer.Onlymanufacturerapproved seataccessoriesmaybeused.Ifitisnecessaryto modifytheairbagsystemforpersonswithdisabilities,contactyourauthorizeddealer.

EventDataRecorder(EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will

(Continued)

assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81

NOTE:EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children.

Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.

WARNING!

Inacollision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The forcerequired to holdevenan infant on your lap could become so great that you could no hold the child, no matter how strongly you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in proper restraint for the child's size.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner's Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner's Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.

NOTE:

- For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-732-8243.

- Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada's website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm

SummaryOfRecommendationsForRestrainingChildrenInVehicles

	ChildSize,Height,WeightOrAgeRecommendedTypeOfChildRestraint
Infants and Toddlers	Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint	Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint		Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle's seat belt		Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints	Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat	Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85

InfantsAndChildRestraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.

WARNING!

- Neverplacearear-facingchildrestraintinfrontof anairbag.AdeployingpassengerAdvancedFront AirBagcancausedeathorseriousinjurytoachild 12yearsoryounger,includingachildinarear-facingchildrestraint.

- Onlyusearear-facingchildrestraintinavehicle witharearseat.

OlderChildrenAndChildRestraints

Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should

remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.

All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle's seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle's seat cushion while the child's back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!

- Improperinstallationcanleadtofailureofan infantorchildrestraint.Itcouldcomelooseina collision.Thechildcouldbebadlyinjuredor killed.Followthechildrestraintmanufacturer's

WARNING!(Continued)

directionsexactlywhen installinganinfant or childrestraint.

- Afterachildrestraintisinstalledinthevehicle,do notmovethevehicleseatforwardorrearward becauseitcanloosenthechildrestraintattachments.Removethechildrestraintbeforeadjusting thevehicleseatposition.Whenthevehicleseathas beenadjusted,reinstallthechildrestraint.

- When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Don't leave it loose in the vehicle. In sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury.

ChildrenTooLargeForBoosterSeats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle's seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child's knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child's shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child's thighs and not their stomach?

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87

1. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was "no," then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child's squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.

WARNING!

Neverallowachildtoputtheshoulderbeltunderan armorbehindtheirback.Inacrash,theshoulderbelt willnotprotectachildproperly,whichmayresultin seriousinjuryordeath.Achildmustalwayswearboth thelapandshoulderportionsoftheseatbeltcorrectly.

88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

RecommendationsForAttachingChildRestraints

RestraintTypeCombined	Weightofthe Child+Child Restraint	Useanyattachmentmethodshownwithan“X”Below
		LATCH-LowerAnchors Only	SeatBeltOnlyLATCH-LowerAnchors +TopTether Anchor	SeatBelt+Top TetherAnchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint	Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)	X	X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint	More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg)		X
Forward-Facing Child Restraint	Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)			X	X
Forward-Facing Child Restraint	More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg)				X

LowerAnchorsAndTethersForChildren(LATCH) RestraintSystem

Anchor. Tether. LATCH The next generation of child safety.

022668173

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle's seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.

90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE LATCHPositionsForInstallingChildRestraintsIn ThisVehicle

Top-down view of a pickup truck showing front, rear, and side views with no text or symbols

0226003585

RegularCab

• Lower Anchorage Symbol – 2 anchorages per seating position
  • Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

Top-down architectural rendering of a car showing front, rear, and side views with no visible text or symbols

0226003588

MegaCab/CrewCabSplitBench

• Lower Anchorage Symbol - 2 anchorages per seating position
• Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

Top-down architectural rendering of a car showing front, rear, and side views with no visible text or symbols

0226003587

QuadCab/CrewCabFullBench

• Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position
• Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

FrequentlyAskedQuestionsAboutInstallingChildRestraintsWithLATCH
What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?	65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use	the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?	No Do not use	the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages?	No Full bench	rear seat only: Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage?	No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?	Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The head restraints can be removed in each seating position.

94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with the installation of the child restraint, the head restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in front of it.

WARNING!

Alwaysmakesuretheheadrestraintisinitsupright positionwhentheseatistobeusedbyanoccupant whoisnotinachildrestraint.Sittinginaseatwith theheadrestraintinitsloweredpositioncouldresult inseriousinjuryordeathinacollision.

LocatingLATCHAnchorage

The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child

restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt buckle and seat cover (no text or symbols)

QuadCab/MegaCab/CrewCabRearOutboardSeats DriverSide

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95

LocatingTetherAnchorage

Regular Cab models have tether strap anchorages behind the front center and right seats.

Quad Cab, Mega Cab and Crew Cab models have tether strap anchorages located behind

each of the rear seats.

StandardCabTetherAnchorage

1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor

96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Interior view of a vehicle showing three car door lockers mounted on the back wall, with arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

MegaCab®TetherAnchorage(BehindCovers)

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a

tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

CenterSeatLATCH—RegularCab/Quad Cab®/CrewCabFullBench

WARNING!

• DonotinstallachildrestraintinthecenterpositionusingtheLATCHsystem. Thispositionisnot approvedforinstallingchildseatsusingthe LATCHattachments. Youmustusetheseatbelt andtetheranchortoinstallachildseatinthecenter seatingposition.
• Neverusethesameloweranchoragetoattachmore thanonechildrestraint.Pleasereferto"Installing TheLATCH-CompatibleChildRestraintSystem" fortypicalinstallationinstructions.

CenterSeatLATCH—MegaCab/CrewCabSplit Bench

If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard position.

WARNING!

Neverusethesameloweranchoragetoattachmore thanonechildrestraint.Pleasereferto"Installing TheLATCH-CompatibleChildRestraintSystem"for typicalinstallationinstructions.

Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97

ToInstallALATCH-CompatibleChildRestraint

If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt" to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.
2. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage" for directions to attach a tether anchor.
3. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
4. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

HowToStowAnUnusedALRSeatBelt:

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child's reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them.

WARNING!

• Improperinstallationofachildrestrainttothe LATCHanchoragescanleadtofailureofthere-straint.Thechildcouldbebadlyinjuredorkilled. Followthechildrestraintmanufacturer'sdirections exactlywheninstallinganinfantorchildrestraint.
• Childrestraintanchoragesaredesignedtowith-standonlythoseloadsimposedbycorrectly-fitted childrestraints.Undernocircumstancesaretheyto beusedforadultseatbelts,harnesses,orfor attachingotheritemsorequipmenttothevehicle.

InstallingChildRestraintsUsingTheVehicleSeat Belt

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for additional information on ALR. The cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion of the seat belt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a child restraint’s belt path.

100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lap/ShoulderBeltSystemsForInstallingChild RestraintsInThisVehicle

0226059225

RegularCab

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
  • Cinch = Cinching Latch Plate
  • Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

0226061828

QuadCab/MegaCab/CrewCab

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
  • Cinch = Cinching Latch Plate
  • Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems

FrequentlyAskedQuestionsAboutInstallingChildRestraintsWithSeatBelts
What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?	Weight limit of the Child Restraint	Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?	Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The head restraints can be removed in each seating position.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint?	Yes In positions with cinching latch plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.

102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Alwaysmakesuretheheadrestraintisinitsupright positionwhentheseatistobeusedbyanoccupant whoisnotinachildrestraint.Sittinginaseatwith theheadrestraintinitisloweredpositioncouldresult inseriousinjuryordeathinacollision.

InstallingAChildRestraintWithASwitchable AutomaticLockingRetractor(ALR)

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage" for directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
   Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103

Installing AChildRestraint With ACinching Latch Plate (CINCH)—If Equipped:

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
2. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage" for directions to attach a tether anchor.
3. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child restraint.

If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.

InstallingChildRestraintsUsingTheTopTether Anchorage

WARNING!

Donotattachatetherstrapforarear-facingcarseat toanylocationinfrontofthecarseat,includingthe seatframeoratetheranchorage.Onlyattachthe tetherstrapofarear-facingcarseattothetether anchoragethatisapprovedforthatseatingposition, locatedbehindthetopofthevehicleseat.Seethe section"LowerAnchorsandTethersforCHildren (LATCH)RestraintSystem"forthelocationofapprovedtetheranchoragesinyourvehicle.

Three-step illustration of a car seat assembly with no text or symbols

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105

Regular and Mega Cab® Trucks:

In the regular cab truck, the top tether anchorages are located behind the center and right passenger seats. In the mega cab truck, the top tether anchorages are located behind each rear seating position. There is a plastic cover over each anchorage. To attach the tether strap of the child restraint:

1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the head restraint and to the tether anchor directly behind the seat.

106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

RegularCabTetherAnchorage

1 — Tether Strap Hook

2 — Tether Strap to Child Restraint

3 — Tether Anchor

1. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchorage and the child seat. The tether strap should go between the head restraint posts underneath the head restraint. You may need to adjust the head restraint to the upward position to pass the tether strap underneath the head restraint and between its posts.

2. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to the square opening in the sheet metal. Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Interior view of a car showing four wall-mounted lock switches with arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

MegaCab®TetherAnchorage

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107

WARNING!

Neverplacearear-facingchildrestraintinfrontofan airbag.AdeployingPassengerAdvancedFrontAir Bagcancauseddeathorseriousinjurytoachild12 yearsoryounger,includingachildinarear-facing childrestraint.

Quad Cab® or Crew Cab Trucks:

The top tether anchorages in this vehicle are tether strap loops located between the rear glass and the back of the rear seat. There is a tether strap loop located behind each seating position. Follow the steps below to attach the tether strap of the child restraint.

108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Right or Left Outboard Seats:

1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.

Interior view of a car showing the backrest, seat, and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

HeadRestraintInRaisedPosition

Interior view of a car showing rear seats and seatbelt, with a black arrow pointing to the backrest (no text or symbols on the main body)

TetherStrapLoopWithCenterHeadRestraintInRaised Position

1. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the tether strap loop behind the center seat.

2. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint behind the child seat, though the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the center tether strap loop.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109

1. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Interior view of a car showing the rear seat, driver's seat, and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

TetherStrapThroughOutboardTetherStrapLoop

Interior view of a car showing rear seats and seatbelt, with two black arrows pointing to the side of the seat (no text or symbols present)

TetherStrapThroughOutboardTetherStrapLoopAnd AttachedToCenterTetherStrapLoop

110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If there are child seats in both of the outboard (left and right) seating positions, the tether strap hooks of both child seats should be connected to the center tether strap loop. This is the correct way to tether two outboard child seats.

Center Seat:

1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.

Interior view of a car showing rear seats and seatbelt, with a black arrow pointing to the backrest (no text or symbols)

TetherStrapLoopWithHeadRestraintInRaised Position

1. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the tether strap loop behind either the right or left outboard seat.

2. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint behind the child seat, though the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the right or left outboard tether strap loop.

Interior view of a car showing the rear seat, rear seats, and a backrest with a white arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols on the car itself)

TetherStrapThroughCenterTetherStrapLoop

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111

1. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Interior view of a car showing rear seats and dashboard, with two arrows pointing to the seat (no text or symbols present)

TetherStrapThroughCenterTetherStrapLoopAnd AttachedToOutboardTetherStrapLoop

112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Installing Three Child Restraints:

1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat. Route the tether straps following the directions for right and left seating positions, above.
2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap loop, but do not tighten the straps yet.
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat. Route the tether strap following the directions for the center seating position, above.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop.
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions, tightening the right and left tether straps before the center tether strap.

Interior view of a car showing rear seats and seatbelt, with three arrows pointing to the backrest (no text or symbols on the car itself)

LeftOutboardAndCenterSeatingPositionShown

WARNING!

- Anincorrectlyanchoredtetherstrapcouldleadto increasedheadmotionandpossibleinjurytothe child.Useonlytheanchoragepositiondirectly

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

behindthechildseattosecureachildrestrainttop tetherstrap.

- If your vehicle is equipped with a split rearseat, makes sure the ether strap does not slip into the opening between these at backs as you remove slack in the strap.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle."

114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

NeveruseNon-DetergentOilorStraightMineralOil intheengineordamagemayresult.

NOTE:A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.

WARNING!

• Donotleavechildrenoranimalsinsideparked vehiclesinhotweather.Interiorheatbuild-upmay causeseriousinjuryordeath.
• Itisextremelydangeroustorideinacargoarea, insideoroutsideofvehicle.Inacollision,people ridingintheseareasaremorelikelytobeseriously injuredorkilled.
• Donotallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseat belts.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaustgasescaninjureorkill. They contain carbon monoxide(CO), which is colorless and odorless.

Breathingitcanmakeyouunconsciousandcan eventuallypoisonyou.Toavoidbreathing(CO), followthesesafetytips:

• Donotruntheengineinaclosedgarageorin confinedareasanylongerthanneededtomove yourvehicleinoroutofthearea.
• If you are required to drivewith the trunk/lift gate/reardors open, makes sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch this set at high speed. DONOT usethere circulation mode.

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115

WARNING!(Continued)

- Ifitisnecessarytositinaparkedvehiclewiththe engineerunning,adjustyourheatingorcooling controlstoforceoutsideairintothevehicle.Setthe blowerathighspeed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle

SeatBelts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.

AirBagWarningLight

The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is

not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.

FloorMatSafetyInformation

Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 117

WARNING!

Pedalsthatcannotmovefreelycancauselossof vehiclecontrolandincreasetheriskofseriouspersonalinjury.

• Alwaysmakesurethatfloormatsareproperly attachedtothefloormatfasteners.
• Neverplaceorinstallfloormatsorotherfloor coveringsinthevehiclethatcannotbeproperly securedtopreventthemfrommovingandinterferingwiththepedalsortheabilitytocontrolthe vehicle.
• Neverputfloormatsorotherfloorcoveringsontop ofalreadyinstalledfloormats.Additionalfloor matsandothercoveringswillreducethesizeofthe pedalareaandinterferewiththepedals.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Checkmountingofmatsonaregularbasis.Always properlyreinstallandsecurefloormatsthathave beenremovedforcleaning.
• Alwaysmakesurethatobjectscannotfallintothe driverfootwellwhilethevehicleismoving.Objectscanbecometrappedunderthebrakepedal andacceleratorpedalcausingalossofvehicle control.
• Ifrequired,mountingpostsmustbeproperlyinstalled,ifnotequippedfromthefactory. Failuretoproperlyfollowfloormatinstallationor mountingcancauseinterferencewiththebrake pedalandacceleratorpedaloperationcausinglossof controlofthevehicle.

(Continued)

118 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

DoorLatches

Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.

FluidLeaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause should be located and corrected immediately.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

■MIRRORS....126

□Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . 126

□Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .126

□Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

□Outside Mirrors....134

□ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature .....135

□Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped . . . . . . .136

□Power Folding Outside Mirrors For Standard And Trailer Tow — If Equipped....136

□Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
□Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .140
□Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped....140
□Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . .140
□Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped . . . .141
□“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If Equipped....142

■ SEATS .....142

□Driver's Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . .143

120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

□Passenger's Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . .145

□Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

□Heated Seats — If Equipped .....146

□Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

□Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped. . . . . . . .150

☐40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . .151

□Mega Cab® Rear Seat Features .....151

□Head Restraints....155

■DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED ....159

□Programming The Memory Feature .....159

□Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory....160

□Memory Position Recall....161

□Easy Entry/Exit Seat....162

■TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .....164

■LIGHTS....165

□Headlights....166

□Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .167

□Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only) .....167

□Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped .....168

□Headlight Delay....168

□Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If Equipped....169

□Parking Lights And Panel Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
□Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
□Lights-On Reminder....172
□Battery Saver. .172
□Interior Lights....172
□Cargo Light....175
□Multifunction Lever....176
□Turn Signals....176
□Lane Change Assist....177
□Flash-To-Pass....177
□High/Low Beam Switch....177

■WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .....178

□Windshield Wipers....178

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121

□Windshield Wiper Operation....178
□Intermittent Wiper System....178
□Windshield Washers....179
□Mist Feature....179
□Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .180

■TILT STEERING COLUMN .....181

■HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED .182

■DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED....184

■ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL....185

□To Activate....186
□To Set A Desired Speed....187
□To Deactivate .....187

122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

□To Resume Speed....187
□To Vary The Speed Setting .....188
□To Accelerate For Passing....189

■PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED....190

□ParkSense® Sensors....190
□ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
□ParkSense® Display....191
□Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®. . . . . . .195
□Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System....196
□Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . . .197
□ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .197

■PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED....199

□ParkSense® Sensors .....200
□ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
□ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
□Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear ParkSense®. 203
□Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System . . .204
□Cleaning The ParkSense® System .....205
□ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .206

■PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED....208

■OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED . . . .210

□Courtesy/Reading Lights....211

■GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .212

□Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® .214

□Programming A Rolling Code....215

□Programming A Non-Rolling Code .....217

□Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . .218

□Using HomeLink®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

□Security .220

□Troubleshooting Tips....220

□General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

■POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .....222

□Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode .....223

□Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode .....223

□Opening Sunroof — Express .....223

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123

□Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

□Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

□Venting Sunroof — Express .....224

□Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

□Wind Buffeting....225

□Sunroof Maintenance....225

□Ignition Off Operation....225

■ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS....225

CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF EQUIPPED....231

■POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED .....232

■AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED . . . .233

124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

■CUPHOLDERS....234

□Front Seat Cupholders (40–20–40 Seats) . . . . . .234

□Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Floor Mounted Shifter....234

□Rear Cupholders — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .235

■STORAGE....236

□Glove Compartment....236

□Door Storage....238

□Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped . .239

□Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin — If Equipped....241

□Seatback Storage....242

□Storage (Regular Cab) .....243

□Storage and Seats (Crew Cab)....243

□Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Regular Cab Models)....244

■REAR WINDOW FEATURES .....245

□Rear Window Defroster....245

□Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped . .246

□Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped .246

■FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR — IF EQUIPPED . .246

■PICKUP BOX .251

□Cargo Camera — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

□Turning Cargo Camera On Or Off — With Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN .....253

■RAMBOX® — IF EQUIPPED .....253

□RamBox® Integrated Box Side Storage Bins . . .254

□Locking And Unlocking RamBox®....256

□RamBox® Safety Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

□Bed Extender — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

□Bed Rail Tie-Down System .....265

■SLIDE-IN CAMPERS....267

□Camper Applications....267

■EASY-OFF TAILGATE....267

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

□Disconnecting The Rear Camera Or Remote Keyless Entry — If Equipped .....267

□Removing The Tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

□Locking Tailgate....269

■TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED....270

□Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal .....270

□Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation. . . . . . . . .274

□Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning .....280

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped

A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while the small control under the mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).

3D rendering of a car rearview mirror with an arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols on the mirror itself)

AdjustingRearviewMirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,

left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you.

NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear view viewing.

The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned On or Off through the touchscreen.

- Push the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the feature On.

- Push the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn the feature Off.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127

Front view of a car rearview mirror with no visible text or symbols on the surface

0304049205

AutomaticDimmingMirror

If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a 9-1-1 button.

128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The ASSIST and 9–1–1 features operate through the Uconnect® Access service. These buttons will only operate as long as your Uconnect® Access service is active. Refer to your “Uconnect® System supplement manual” for further information.

ASSISTCall

The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to any one of the following support centers:

• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow, just push the Assist button and you'll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you're driving and its location. Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access Via Mobile features.

- Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other vehicle issues.

9-1-1Call

1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
   NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error, there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the 9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Phone Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn off the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.

2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1 buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.

3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1 operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1 operator:

- Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.

• The vehicle brand.

- The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.

1. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed.

NOTE: Once a connection is made between the vehicle's 9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle's 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

129

sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle's 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.

1. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.

WARNING!

- If anyone in the vehicle could be indanger (e.g., fireorsmoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), donot wait for voice contact from a 9-1-1 operator. Alloccupant should exit the vehicle immediately and moveto as a felocation.

- Never place anything on or near the vehicle's wirelessandGPSantennas.Youcouldprevent

(Continued)

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

wirelessandGPSsignalreception,whichcanpreventyourvehiclefromplacinganemergencycall. WirelessandGPSsignalreceptionisrequiredfor the9-1-1Callsystemtofunctionproperly.

- The9-1-1Callsystemisembeddedintothevehicle'selectricalsystem.Donotaddaftermarket electricalequipmenttothevehicle'selectricalsystem.Thismaypreventyourvehiclefromsendinga signaltoinitiateanemergencycall.Toavoidinterferencethatcancausethe9-1-1Callsystemtofail, neveraddaftermarketequipment(e.g.,two-way mobileradio,CBradio,datarecorder,etc.)toyour vehicle'selectricalsystemormodifytheantennas onyourvehicle.IFYOURVEHICLELOSESBATTERYPOWERFORANYREASON(INCLUDING DURINGOR AFTERANACCIDENT),THE

WARNING!(Continued)

UCONNECTFEATURES, APPSANDSERVICES, AMONGOTHERS, WILLNOTOPERATE.

- Modificationstoanypartofthe9-1-1Callsystem couldcausetheairbagsystemtofailwhenyou needit.Youcouldbeinjurediftheairbagsystem isnottheretohelpprotectyou.

9-1-1CallSystemLimitations

Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1 Call system capabilities.

9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.

(Continued)

If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:

• The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The Phone Screen will display the following message "Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your dealer."
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state "Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your dealer."

WARNING!

• IgnoringtheRearviewMirrorlightcouldmeanyou willnothave9-1-1Callservices.IftheRearview Mirrorlightisilluminated,haveanaauthorized dealerservicethe9-1-1Callsystemimmediately.
• TheOccupantRestraintControlmoduleturnson theAirBagWarningLightontheinstrumentpanel if a malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If the AirBagWarningLightisilluminated, the airbagsystemmaynotbeworking properly and the 9-1-1 system may not be able to send asignaltoa9-1-1 operator. If the AirBag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealerservicetheORC system immediately.

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors beyond FCA US LLC's control may prevent or stop the 9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not limited to, the following factors:

• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle's electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
• Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.

• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
- Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
- Wireless network congestion.
- Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.

NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle's wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.

GeneralInformation

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleanings solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133

Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera Display — If Equipped

A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you.

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When the vehicle is placed into reverse gear a video display illuminates to display the image generated by the rear view camera located on the tailgate handle. The auto dimming feature is also disabled to improve rear view viewing.

030471113

AutomaticDimmingMirrorWithRearViewCamera

Outside Mirrors

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated approach lights under the outside mirrors they can be turned off through the instrument cluster or the Uconnect® radio. For further information refer to "EVIC" or "DID" and "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel".

WARNING!

Vehiclesandotherobjectsseeninthepassengerside convexmirrorwilllooksmallerandfartheraway thantheyreallyare.Relyingtoomuchonyour passengersideconvexmirrorcouldcauseyouto

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

collidewithanothervehicleorotherobject. Use your insidemirror when judging the size of distance of a vehicle seen in the passengers side to convex mirror. Some vehicles will not have a convex passengers side mirror.

Outside Mirrors Folding Feature

All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be manually folded both forward and rearward to prevent damage.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

Side view of a car's front dashboard and steering wheel, showing steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

FoldingMirror

CAUTION!

Itisrecommendedtofoldthemirrorsintothefull rearwardpositiontoresistdamagewhenenteringa carwashoranarrowlocation.

Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped

Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the driver's view of the ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position.

NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned on when delivered from the factory.

If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Power Folding Outside Mirrors For Standard And Trailer Tow — If Equipped

If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive position.

The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, push the switch a second time and the mirrors will return to the normal driving position.

If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled, a potential extra button push is required to get the mirrors back to the home position. If the mirror does not electrically fold check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot area which can cause excessive drag.

Interior view of a car's dashboard with a black arrow pointing to the right side of the control panel (no text or symbols visible)

PowerFoldingMirrorSwitch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

ResettingthePowerFoldingOutsideMirrors

You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the following occurs:

• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
- The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
- The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds.

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them by pushing the button (this may require multiple button pushes). This resets them to their normal position.

NOTE:

• The power fold mirrors are designed to operate while the vehicle is stationary or traveling at moderate speeds. If you attempt to power fold the mirrors at high speeds they may not fully open or close. You should slow down to a moderate speed and complete the operation.
• When pushing the power fold button 10 or more times in one minute the system shuts down for one minute to protect the motors from over heating.

Power Mirrors — If Equipped

The controls for the power mirrors are located on the driver's door trim panel.

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard with a control panel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

PowerMirrorControlsLocation

The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch.

PowerMirrorControls

1 — Mirror Select Buttons
2 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139

To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select the mirror that you want to adjust.

Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.

Interior view of a car showing a directional sign with arrows, mounted on a side mirror (no text or symbols present)

PowerMirrorMovement

140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to "Rear Window Features" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.

Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

The driver's outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.

Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror head to provide a greater vision range when towing extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or outboard, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped in or out).

Close-up of a car's side mirror and dashboard, showing a black arrow pointing to the side mirror (no text or symbols on the main components)

TrailerTowingPosition

NOTE: Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to entering an automated car wash.

A small blindspot mirror is located next to main mirror and can be adjusted separately.

Close-up of a car's side mirror showing a black arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols on the object itself)

BlindspotMirror

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141

Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped

Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.

Interior view of a car showing the backrest door and side panel with an arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols)

Illuminated VanityMirror

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE "Slide-On-Rod" Features Of Sun Visor — If Equipped

The sun visor "Slide-On-Rod" feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun.

To use the "Slide-On-Rod" feature, rotate the sun visor downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the "Slide-On-Rod" until the sun visor is in the desired position.

Interior view of a car showing the side panel with a left-pointing arrow and a control knob (no text or symbols)

"Slide-On-Rod"Extender

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143

WARNING!

• Itisdangeroustorideinacargoarea,insideor outsideofvehicle.Inacollision,peopleridingin theseareasaremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjured orkilled.
• Donotallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseat belts.Inacollision,peopleridingintheseareasare morelikelytobeseriouslyinjuredorkilled.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.

Driver's Power Seat — If Equipped

Some models may be equipped with an eight-way power driver's seat. The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the driver's seat cushion. There are two power seat switches that are used to control the movement of the seat cushion and the seatback.

PowerSeatSwitches

1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Seatback Switch

AdjustingTheSeatForwardOrRearward

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will

144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.

AdjustingTheSeatUpUpDown

The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.

TiltingTheSeatUpUpDown

The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.

RecliningTheSeatback

The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.

WARNING!

• Adjustingaseatwhiledrivingmaybedangerous. Movingaseatwhiledrivingcouldresultinlossof controlwhichcouldcauseacollisionandserious injuryordeath.
• Seatsshouldbeadjustedbeforefasteningtheseat beltsandwhilethevehicleisparked.Serious injuryordeathcouldresultfromapoorlyadjusted seatbelt.
• Donotridewiththeseatbackreclinedsothatthe shoulderbeltisnolongerrestingagainstyour chest.Inacollisionyoucouldslideundertheseat belt,whichcouldresultinseriousinjuryordeath.

CAUTION!

Donotplaceanyarticleunderapowerseatorimpede itsabilitytomoveasitmaycausedamagetotheseat controls.Seattravelmaybecomelimitedifmovement isstoppedbyanobstructionintheseat'spath.

Passenger's Power Seat — If Equipped

Some models are equipped with a six-way power passenger seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control the movement of the seat and seat cushion.

AdjustingTheSeatForwardOrRearward

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145

Power Lumbar — If Equipped

Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support.

Interior view of a car seat with a control panel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

LumbarControlSwitch

146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Heated Seats — If Equipped

On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and seat backs.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel painted the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using these at least a theater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long period so time.
• Donotplaceanythingontheseatorseatbackthat insulatesagainstheat,suchasablanketorcushion. Thismaycausetheseatheatertooverheat.Sitting inaseatthathasbeenoverheatedcouldcause

WARNING!(Continued)

seriousburnsduetotheincreasedsurfacetemperatureoftheseat.

FrontHeatedSeats

The front heated seats control buttons are located on the center instrument panel below the climate controls.

If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the front heated seats control buttons are also located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.

• Press the heated seat button setting On.
• Press the heated seat button the LO setting On.
• Press the heated seat button the heating elements OFF.

once to turn the HI

a second time to turn

a third time to turn

(Continued)

When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.

VehiclesEquippedWithRemoteStart

On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.

If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" or "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

RearHeatedSeats

On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these seats are located on the rear of the center console.

148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently. You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for OFF.

Push the switch once to select HI-level heating. Push the switch a second time to select LO-level heating. Push the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.

NOTE:

• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.

When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.

Ventilated Seats — If Equipped

Located in the seat cushion are small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.

The front ventilated seats control buttons are located on the center instrument panel below the climate controls.

If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the front ventilated seats control buttons are also located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.

• Press the ventilated seat button ✕ once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button → a second time to choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn the ventilated seat OFF.

NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149

VehiclesEquippedWithRemoteStart

On models that are equipped with remote start, the ventilated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.

If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped

Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat.

Close-up of a car's side panel showing the wheel and seatbelt, with a white arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols on the main subject)

ManualSeatAdjuster

While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide the seat forward or backward. Release the bar once you have reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

WARNING!

• Adjustingaseatwhiledrivingmaybedangerous. Movingaseatwhiledrivingcouldresultinlossof controlwhichcouldcauseacollisionandserious injuryordeath.
• Seatsshouldbeadjustedbeforefasteningtheseat beltsandwhilethevehicleisparked.Serious injuryordeathcouldresultfromapoorlyadjusted seatbelt.

DumpFeature(ManualReclineSeatOnly)—StandardCab

Actuating the recliner handle will allow the seatback to swing (dump) forward on manual recliner seats. This "dump" feature allows access to the storage bin behind the seat.

WARNING!

• Donotstandorleaninfrontoftheseatwhile actuatingthehandle.Theseatbackmayswing forwardandhityoucausinginjury.
• To avoid injury, place your hand on these seat back and actuate the handle, then position these seat back in the desired position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151

40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped

The seat is divided into three segments. The outboard seat portions are each 40% of the total width of the seat. On some models the back of the center portion (20%) easily folds down to provide an armrest/center storage compartment.

Mega Cab® Rear Seat Features

RecliningRearSeats—IfEquipped

The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift upward on the handle, lean back on the seatback and when you reach the desired position, release the handle.

152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the seat area (no text or symbols visible)

RearSeatReclinerHandle

WARNING!

Donotridewiththeseatbackreclinedsothatthe shoulderbeltisnolongerrestingagainstyourchest. Inacollisionyoucouldslideundertheseatbelt, whichcouldresultinseriousinjuryordeath.

FoldingRearSeat(TableMode)—IfEquipped

Both the left and right rear seatbacks can be folded down and used as a table.

To fold down either rear seatback:

1. Lift the handle, located next to the head restraint.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols)

TableModeHandle

1. Fold the seatback forward.

Interior view of a car seatbelt in the driver's seat, showing seat, seatbelt, and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

TableMode

1. Lift the seatback, to return the seat to the upright position. Be sure the seatback is locked in place.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153

FoldingRearSeat—IfEquipped

Both the outboard rear seats will drop and move forward when the seatback is folded flat.

WARNING!

• Itisdangeroustorideinacargoarea,insideor outsideofavehicle.Inacollision,peopleridingin theseareasaremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjured orkilled.
• Donotallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseatbelts.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.
• Cargomustbesecurelytieddownbeforedriving yourvehicle.Improperlysecuredcargocanfly aroundinasuddenstoporcollisionandstrike someoneinthevehicle,causingseriousinjuryor death.

154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To fold either rear seat flat:

1. Lift the handle, located on the outboard side of either of the rear seats.

Close-up of a car seatbelt switch mechanism with an arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols visible)

FoldingRearSeatHandle

1. Fold the seatback down and push the seat forward.

Interior view of a car showing the backrest seat and side panel, with no visible text or symbols.

RearPassengerFold-FlatSeats

1. Lift the seatback, to return the seat to the upright position. Be sure the seat is locked in place.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155

WARNING!

Animproperlylatchedseatcouldcauseseriousinjuryordeath.Makesurethattheseatbackissecurely lockedintoposition.Iftheseatbackinnotsecurely lockedintopositiontheseatwillnotprovidethe properstabilityforchildseatsand/orpassengers.

Head Restraints

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!

Theheadrestraintsforalloccupantsmustbeproperlyinstalledandadjustedpriortooperatingthe

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

vehicleoroccupyingaseat.Headrestraintsshould neverbeadjustedwhilethevehicleisinmotion. Drivingvehiclewiththeheadrestraintsimproperly adjustedorremovedcouldcauseseriousinjuryor deathintheeventofacollision.

FrontHeadRestraints

To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint.

To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as it can go then push the adjustment button and the release button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes then adjust it to the appropriate height.

156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

AdjustmentButtons

1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button

WARNING!

• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupant so the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in location outside the occupant compartment.
• ALLtheheadrestraintsMUSTbereinstalledinthe vehicletoproperlyprotecttheoccupants.Follow there-installationinstructionsabovepriortooperatingthevehicleoroccupyingaseat.

NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of the head.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157

RearHeadRestraints

The rear seats are equipped with adjustable and removable head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint.

To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment button and the release button while pulling upward on the whole assembly. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and adjust it to the appropriate height.

NOTE: To remove outboard restraints, the rear seat bottom must be folded up.

WARNING!

Alooseheadrestraintthrownforwardinacollision orhardstopcouldcauseseriousinjuryordeathto occupantsofthevehicle.Alwayssecurelystowremovedheadrestraintsinalocationoutsidetheoccupantcompartment.

158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Release/AdjustmentButtons

1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button

NOTE:

• The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab and Quad Cab) has only one adjustment position that is used to aid in the routing of a tether. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
• Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of the head.

WARNING!

ALLtheheadrestraintsMUSTbereinstalledinthe vehicletoproperlyprotecttheoccupants.Followthe re-installationinstructionsabovepriortooperating thevehicleoroccupyingaseat.

DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED

This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch. Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals (if equipped) and a set of desired radio station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pushed.

NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters, one RKE transmitter can be linked to memory position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to memory position 2.

The memory seat buttons are located on the outboard side of the drivers seat cushion.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159

Interior view of a car seat with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

MemorySeatButtons

Programming The Memory Feature

NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the following:

1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).

160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals and radio station presets).
2. Push and release the S (Set) button on the memory switch.
3. Within five seconds, push and release either of the memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) will display which memory position has been set.

NOTE:

• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile.
• To set a memory profile to your RKE transmitter, refer to "Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory" in this section.

Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory

Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.

NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters to memory the feature has to be selected.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, you must select the "Memory To FOB" feature through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, you must select the "Key Fob Linked To Memory" feature through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" or

"Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

To program your RKE transmitters, perform the following:

1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the Off position.
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2).

NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer to "Programming The Memory Feature" for instructions on how to set a memory profile.

1. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. "Memory Profile Set" (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC/DID.
2. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

161

NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, and within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.

Memory Position Recall

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, the vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID).

For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted with the vehicle speed above 0 mph (0 km/h), a message will display in the EVIC/DID.

162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

DriverOneMemoryPositionRecall

• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the memory switch, push MEMORY button number 1 on the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the RKE transmitter, push the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.

DriverTwoMemoryPositionRecall

• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the memory switch, push MEMORY button number 2 on the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the RKE transmitter, push the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.

A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a recall is

cancelled, the driver's seat, and the power pedals (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected.

Easy Entry/Exit Seat

This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.

The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go ^TM ).

- When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™), the driver seat will move about 2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm)

forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition into the ACC or RUN position.

• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™), the driver seat will move to a position 0.3 in (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 0.9 in and 2.7 in (22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163

Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position.

NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the programmable features in the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

To open the hood, two latches must be released.

1. Pull the hood release lever located below the steering wheel at the base of the instrument panel.

Close-up of a car's dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

HoodRelease

1. Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood and push the safety latch lever to the left to release it, before raising the hood.

Front view of a black and white car with a downward arrow on the windshield (no text or symbols visible)

SafetyLatchLocation(1500SeriesShown)

031305529

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165

CAUTION!

Topreventpossibledamage, donotslamthehoodto closeit. Useafirmdownwardpushatthefrontcenter ofthehoodtoensurethatbothlatchesengage.

WARNING!

Besurethehoodisfullylatchedbeforedrivingyour vehicle.Ifthehoodisnotfullylatched,itcouldopen whenthevehicleisinmotionandblockyourvision. Failuretofollowthiswarningcouldresultinserious injuryordeath.

LIGHTS

The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and fog lights (if equipped).

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

HeadlightSwitchLocation

166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated approach lights under the outside mirrors they can be turned off through the instrument cluster or the Uconnect® radio. For further information refer to "EVIC" or "DID" and "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel".

CAUTION!

Donotuseabrasivecleaningcomponents,solvents,steelwoolorotherabrasivematerialstocleanthe lenses.

Headlights

To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the headlight position. When the headlight switch is on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O (Off) position.

Automatic Headlights — If Equipped

This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch to the AUTO position.

031464204

AutomaticHeadlightPosition

When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167

90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.

NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.

Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only)

When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off, if they were turned on by this feature.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped

The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except PARK. This provides a constant "Lights ON" condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the parking brake is applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn OFF. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle may turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.

Headlight Delay

To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for approximately up to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)" or "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If Equipped

The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

169

NOTE:

• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen the Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen the Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off using the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,

170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly.

- To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitivity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle high-beam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon ignition off.

If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized dealer.

To Activate

1. If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the Automatic High Beams are enabled through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, the Automatic High Beams are enabled through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position.
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.

NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171

ToDeactivate

1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the system.

Parking Lights And Panel Lights

To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O (Off) position.

Fog Lights — If Equipped

The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight switch to the parking light or headlight position and pushing in the headlight rotary control.

031464205
FogLightSwitch

The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam. An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will

172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the high beam is selected.

Lights-On Reminder

If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when the driver's door is opened.

Battery Saver

To protect the life of your vehicle's battery, load shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.

If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.

NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON.

If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off.

Interior Lights

Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating wheel on the bottom of the switch) is rotated to the far right detent position. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and the UNLOCK button is pushed on the RKE transmitter the courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door is open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way left, to the OFF detent, will cause all the interior lights to go out. This is also known as the "Party" mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle's battery.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173

The brightness of the instrument panel as well as the ambient lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control right (brighter) or left (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the control to the right until you hear a click. This feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the dimming of the touchscreen is programmable through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further details.

031464206
DimmerControl

Courtesy/ReadingLights

Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the courtesy light position (full right position), or when the UNLOCK button is pushed on the Remote Keyless Entry

174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

(RKE) transmitter, if equipped. These lights are also operated individually as reading lights by pushing on the corresponding lens.

Interior view of a car dashboard with two directional buttons and a central control panel (no text or symbols visible)

FrontCourtesy/ReadingLights

Microscopic view of a rod-shaped bacterial cell with a labeled arrow pointing to its interior (no text or symbols on the cell itself)

RearPassengerCourtesy/ReadingLight

NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until the switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF, they will automatically turn off after 15 minutes.

AmbientLight

The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibility of the floor console area.

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and directional buttons (no text or symbols visible)

AmbientLight

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175

Cargo Light

The cargo light is turned on by pushing on the cargo light button.

031464207

CargoLightButton

The cargo light will also turn on for approximately 30 seconds when a RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pushed, as part of the Illuminated Entry feature.

176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Multifunction Lever

The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column.

Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

Interior view of a car dashboard with gauges and control buttons (no visible text or symbols)

TurnSignalLever

NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177

Lane Change Assist

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released.

High/Low Beam Switch

Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the multifunction lever back toward the steering wheel will turn the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.

Interior view of a car dashboard with infotainment gauges and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

High/LowBeamSwitch

178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

Windshield Wipers

The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the multifunction lever. Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper speed.

Interior view of a car showing a black handheld device with directional arrows indicating left and right motion (no text or symbols on the device itself)

WindshieldWiper/WasherSwitch

Windshield Wiper Operation

Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.

Intermittent Wiper System

The intermittent feature of this system was designed for use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob into the upper end of the delay range.

The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it enters the low continual speed position. The delay can be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles, to a cycle every one second. The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.

Windshield Washers

To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the wiper will operate for two to three cycles after the washer knob is released from this position.

If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer knob is released. It will then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer knob is pushed while in the off position, the wiper will turn on and cycle approximately three times after the wash knob is released.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179

rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers.

WARNING!

Suddenlossofvisibilitythroughthewindshield couldleadtoacollision.Youmightnotseeother vehiclesorotherobstacles.Toavoidsuddenicingof thewindshieldduringfreezingweather,warmthe windshieldwiththedefrosterbeforeandduring windshieldwasheruse.

Mist Feature

When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the first detent and release. The wipers will cycle one time and automatically shut off.

180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.

Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped

This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings to activate this feature.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions. Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 and 5 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system.

NOTE:

• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance.

The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the following conditions:

- LowAmbientTemperature— When the ignition is first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32^ (0°C).

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181

- TransmissionInNEUTRALPosition—When the ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.

RemoteStartModeInhibit— On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.

TILT STEERING COLUMN

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the steering column, below the multifunction lever.

182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired. Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in place.

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

TiltSteeringLever

WARNING!

Donotadjustthesteeringcolumnwhiledriving. Adjustingthesteeringcolumnwhiledrivingordrivingwiththesteeringcolumnunlocked,couldcause thedrivertolosecontrolofthevehicle.Failureto followthiswarningmayresultinseriousinjuryor death.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED

The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 30 to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm.

The heated steering wheel control button is located on the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls.

If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the heated steering wheel control button is located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.

- Press the heated steering wheel button turn the heating element On.

once to

- Press the heated steering wheel button time to turn the heating element Off.

a second

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate.

VehiclesEquippedWithRemoteStart

On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

183

If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

WARNING!

- Persons who are unable to feel painted the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise

(Continued)

184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

carewhenusingthesteeringwheelheater.Itmay causeburnsevenatlowtemperatures,especiallyif usedforlongperiods.

- Donotplaceanythingonthesteeringwheelthat insulatesagainstheat,suchasablanketorsteering wheelcoversofanytypeandmaterial.Thismay causethesteeringwheelheatertooverheat.

DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED

The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator, and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel.

The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of the steering column.

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel, dashboard controls, and a black arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols visible)

AdjustablePedalsSwitch

•The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
- The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control System is on. The following messages will be displayed on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) or Driver Information Display

(DID) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out ("Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged" or "Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse".

NOTE:

• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find the best possible seat/pedal position.
• For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver's door trim panel to return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed positions. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185

CAUTION!

Donotplaceanyarticleundertheadjustablepedals orimpedeitsabilitytomoveasitmaycauseddamage tothepedalcontrols.Pedaltravelmaybecomelimitedifmovementisstoppedbyanobstructioninthe adjustablepedal'spath.

WARNING!

Donotadjustthepedalswhilethevehicleismoving. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveanaccident.Always adjustthepedalswhilethevehicleisparked.

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL

When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).

186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.

ElectronicSpeedControlSwitches

1—ON/OFF 3—SET -

2—RES+4—CANCEL

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.

To Activate

Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use.

WARNING!

LeavingtheElectronicSpeedControlsystemon whennotinuseisdangerous.Youcouldaccidentally setthesystemorcauseittogofasterthanyouwant. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveanaccident.Always leavethesystemOFFwhenyouarenotusingit.

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187

To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory.

Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).

188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Vary The Speed Setting

ToIncreaseSpeed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button.

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S.Speed(mph)

• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

MetricSpeed(km/h)

• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

ToDecreaseSpeed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S.Speed(mph)

• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

MetricSpeed(km/h)

- Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189

- If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

To Accelerate For Passing

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

UsingElectronicSpeedControlOnHills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control.

190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

ElectronicSpeedControlcanbedangerouswherethe systemcannotmaintainaconstantspeed.Yourvehiclecouldgotoofastfortheconditions,andyou couldlosecontrolandhaveanaccident.Donotuse ElectronicSpeedControlinheavytrafficoronroads thatarewinding,icy,snow-coveredorslippery.

PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED

The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations.

ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.

ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever/gear selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever/gear selector position, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the system's operating speed, a warning will appear within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).

ParkSense® Sensors

The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect

obstacles from approximately 18 in (45 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

ParkSense® Warning Display

The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) Settings” in Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191

system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

ParkSense® Display

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status.

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the object's distance and location relative to the vehicle.

If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single solid arc in the left and/or

192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.

Top-down diagram of a car with sensor waves and 'PRND' label below (no other text or symbols)

Single1/2SecondTone

032771343

SlowTone

032771342

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193

Top-down diagram of a car with sensor waves, labeled 'PRND' below (no other text or symbols)

032771344

032771345

FastToneContinuousTone

194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

WARNINGALERTS
Rear Distance (in/cm)	Greater than 79 in (200 cm)	79-45 in (200-115 cm)	45-31 in (115-80 cm)	31-18 in (80-45 cm)	Less than 18 in (45 cm)
Audible Alert Chime	None Single	1/2 Second Tone	Slow Fast Continuous
Arc None 4th Solid 3rd			Solid	2nd Flashing	1st Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced	No Yes Yes	Yes Yes

NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

AdjustableChimeVolumeSettings

The Rear chime volume settings are programmable.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the settings may be programmed through the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, the settings may be programmed through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®

ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense® switch.

When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will display the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for approximately five seconds. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will display the "PARKSENSE OFF" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

NOTE: The ParkSense® system will automatically disable when the system detects that a trailer with trailer brakes has been connected to the Integrated Trailer Brake Module. The EVIC/DID will display "PARKSENSE OFF" message for as long as the vehicle is in reverse.

The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when ParkSense® is disabled or defective. The ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled.

If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system is disabled or requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.

Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System

During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC/DID will display the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense® will not operate.

If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.

If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" appears in the EVIC/DID, see your authorized dealer.

Cleaning The ParkSense® System

Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.

ParkSense® System Usage Precautions

NOTE:

• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense®.
• When you turn ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster will display "PARKSENSE OFF". Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197

• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense® is turned off, the instrument cluster will display "PARKSENSE OFF" message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
• Ensure the ParkSense® system is OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within 18 in (45 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the

198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor problem, causing the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message to be displayed in the instrument cluster.

- On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense® should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

CAUTION!

- ParkSense®isonlyaparkingaidanditisunableto recognizeeveryobstacle, includingsmallobstacles. Parkingcurbsmightbetemporarilydetectedornot detectedatall.Obstacleslocatedaboveorbelow thesensorswillnotbedetectedwhentheyarein closeproximity.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

- The vehicle must bedrivenslowly when using ParkSense® inordertobeabletostopintime when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/shoulder when using ParkSense®.

WARNING!

- Driversmustbecarefulwhenbackingupeven whenusingParkSense®.Alwayscheckcarefully behindyourvehicle,lookbehindyou,andbesure tocheckforpedestrians,animals,othervehicles, obstructions,andblindspotsbeforebackingup. Youareresponsibleforsafetyandmustcontinueto payattentiontoyoursurroundings.Failureretodoso canresultinseriousinjuryordeath.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- BeforeusingParkSense®,itisstronglyrecommendedthattheballmountandhitchballassemblyisdisconnectedfromthevehiclewhenthe vehicleisnotusedfortowing.Failureretodosocan resultininjuryordamagetovehiclesorobstacles because the hitchballwillbemuchclosertothe obstacle thantherear fasciawhentheloudspeaker soundsthecontinuoustone.Also,thesensors could detect the ballmountandhitchballassembly,dependingonitssizeandshape,givingafalse indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

PARKSENSE® FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED

The ParkSense® Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199

up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense® System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations.

ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.

ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense® is enabled at one of these shift lever positions, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A display warning will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) indicating the vehicle is above ParkSense® operating speed. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).

200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ParkSense® Sensors

The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 18 in (45 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

The six ParkSense® sensors, located in the front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors' field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

ParkSense® Warning Display

The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) Settings” in Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

ParkSense® Display

The warning display will turn ON indicating the system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the obstacle's distance and location relative to the vehicle.

If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.

202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.

The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

WARNINGALERTS
Rear Distance (in/cm)	Greater than 79 in (200 cm)	79-45 in (200-115 cm)	45-31 in (115-80 cm)	31-18 in (80-45 cm)	Less than 18 in (45 cm)
Front Distance (in/cm)	Greater than 47 in (120 cm)	47-39 in (120-100 cm)	39-25 in (100-65 cm)	25-12 in (65-30 cm)	Less than 12 in (30 cm)
Audible Alert (Chime)	None Single	1/2 Second Tone (for rear only)	Slow (for rear only)	Fast Continuous
Arcs None 4th Solid 3rd Solid 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced	No Yes Yes	Yes	Yes

NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

FrontParkAssistAudibleAlerts

ParkSense® will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.

AdjustableChimeVolumeSettings

The Front and Rear chime volume settings are programmable.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the settings may be programmed through the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, the settings may be programmed through the Electronic

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" or "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear ParkSense®

Front ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the Front ParkSense® switch.

Rear ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the Rear ParkSense® switch.

When the Front or Rear ParkSense® switch is pushed to disable the system, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) will display the

"PARKSENSE OFF" message for approximately five seconds. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the Front or Rear system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will display the "FRONT PARKSENSE OFF" or "REAR PARKSENSE OFF" message for five seconds, followed by a car graphic with "OFF" in the corresponding side. This car graphic will be displayed for as long as the vehicle is in RE-VERSE.

NOTE: Arc alerts from the enabled ParkSense® system, will interrupt the five second messages, and the EVIC/DID will display the car graphic with the corresponding arcs and "OFF" message.

The Front or Rear ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when Front or Rear ParkSense® is disabled or requires service. The Front or Rear ParkSense® switch LED will be OFF when the Front or Rear system is enabled. If the Front or Rear ParkSense® switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the Front or Rear ParkSense® switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.

Service The ParkSense® Park Assist System

During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for five seconds. When the shift lever/gear selector is moved to Reverse and the system has detected a faulted condition, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) will display a "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED"

pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a car graphic will be displayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either the front or rear sensor location depending on where the fault is detected. The system will continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if an object is detected within the five second pop-up duration. The car graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or "Driver Information Display (DID)" for further information.

If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS" appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.

If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message appears in the EVIC/DID, see an authorized dealer.

Cleaning The ParkSense® System

Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.

ParkSense® System Usage Precautions

NOTE:

• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense®.
• When you turn Front or Rear ParkSense® off, the instrument cluster will display "FRONT PARKSENSE OFF" or "REAR PARKSENSE OFF." Furthermore, once you turn Front or Rear ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and Front or Rear ParkSense® is turned off, the instrument cluster will display "FRONT

PARKSENSE OFF"or "REAR PARKSENSE OFF"message for five seconds, followed by a car graphic with "OFF"in the corresponding side. This car graphic will be displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

• ParkSense®, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense® system off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 18 in (45 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the

system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor problem, causing the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message to be displayed in the instrument cluster.

- On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense® should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open position. A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

CAUTION!

- ParkSense®isonlyaparkingaidanditisunableto recognizeveryobstacle, includingsmallobstacles. Parkingcurbsmightbetemporarilydetectedornot detectedatall.Obstacleslocatedaboveorbelow thesensorswillnotbedetectedwhentheyarein closeproximity.

CAUTION!(Continued)

- The vehicle must bedrivenslowly when using ParkSense® inordertobeabletostopintime when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/shoulder when using ParkSense®.

WARNING!

- Driversmustbecarefulwhenbackingupeven whenusingParkSense®.Alwayscheckcarefully behindyourvehicle,lookbehindyou,andbesure tocheckforpedestrians,animals,othervehicles,obstructions,andblindspotsbeforebackingup. Youareresponsibleforsafetyandmustcontinueto payattentiontoyoursurroundings.Failureretodoso canresultinseriousinjuryordeath.

(Continued)

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- BeforeusingParkSense®,itisstronglyrecommendedthattheballmountandhitchballassemblyisdisconnectedfromthevehiclewhenthe vehicleisnotusedfortowing.Failureretodosocan resultininjuryordamagetovehiclesorobstacles because the hitchballwillbemuchclosertothe obstacle thantherearfasciawhentheloudspeaker soundsthecontinuoustone.Also,thesensors could detect the ballmountandhitchballassembly,dependingonitssizeandshape,givingafalse indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see a image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift

lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed in the rearview mirror display (if equipped) or Uconnect® screen (if equipped) along with a caution note to "check entire surroundings" across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.

The ParkView® camera is located to the left of the tailgate handle.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), The rear camera image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of "REVERSE" unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into "PARK" or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position. The active guide lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.

NOTE: For further information about how to access and change the programmable features of the ParkView® Rear Backup Camera, refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:

ZonesDistancetotherearofthevehicle

Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)

Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2m)

Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)

WARNING!

Driversmustbecarefulwhenbackingupevenwhen usingtheParkView®RearBackUpCamera.Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to checkforpedestrians,animals,othervehicles,obstructions,orblindspotsbeforebackingup.Youare responsible for the safety of your surroundings and mustcontinuetopayattentionwhilebackingup. Failuretodosocanresultinseriousinjuryordeath.

210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be drivenslowly when using ParkView® to be able to stop in tim when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his shoulder when using ParkView®.

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED

The overhead console is located on the headliner above the review mirror. The overhead console contains the following features:

•Courtesy/Reading Lights
• Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped
- Power Sliding Rear Window Switch — If Equipped
• Universal Garage Door Opener — If Equipped

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and directional buttons (no text or symbols visible)

OverheadConsole

Courtesy/Reading Lights

Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the courtesy light position (full right position), or when the UNLOCK button is pushed on the Remote Keyless Entry

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211

(RKE) transmitter, if equipped. These lights are also operated individually as reading lights by pushing on the corresponding lens.

Interior view of a car dashboard with two digital switches and directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

FrontCourtesy/ReadingLights

212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Illustration of a rectangular object with a circular opening and a black arrow pointing to it, no text or symbols present.

RearPassengerCourtesy/ReadingLight
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until the switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF, they will automatically turn off after 15 minutes.

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.

The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the overhead console designate the three different HomeLink® channels.

Close-up of a metallic control panel with three vertical slots and three horizontal bars, no text or symbols visible.

HomeLink®Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213

WARNING!

• Yourmotorizeddoororgatewillopenandclose whileyouaretrainingtheuniversaltransceiver.Do nottrainthetransceiverifpeople,petsorother objectsareinthepathofthedoororgate.Onlyuse thistransceiverwithagaragedooropenerthathas a"stopandreverse"featureasrequiredbyFederal safetystandards.Thisincludesmostgaragedoor openermodelsmanufacturedafter1982.Donotuse agaragedooropenerwithoutthesesafetyfeatures. Calltoll-free1-800-355-3515or,ontheInternetat www.HomeLink.comforsafetyinformationorassistance.
• Vehicleexhaustcontainscarbonmonoxide,adangerousgas.Donotrunyourvehicleinthegarage whiletrainingthetransceiver.Exhaustgascan causeseriousinjuryordeath.

214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.

Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®

Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming.

For efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® system.

To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds. The Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), or Driver Interactive Display (DID) will display "CLEARING CHANNELS." Release the buttons when the EVIC/DID displays "CHANNELS CLEARED."

NOTE:

• For vehicle's equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

Programming A Rolling Code

For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified by the "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215

TrainingTheGarageDoorOpener

1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

For vehicle's equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.

216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program.
2. Push and hold the Homelink® button you want to program while you push and hold the hand - held transmitter button.
3. Continue to hold both buttons until the EVIC/DID display changes from "CHANNEL # TRAINING" to "CHANNEL # TRAINED," then release both buttons.

NOTE:

• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases for the channel to train.

• If the EVIC/DID displays "DID NOT TRAIN" repeat from Step 2.

• At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the "LEARN" or "TRAINING" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener/device motor.

Firmly push and release the "LEARN" or "TRAINING" button. On some garage door openers/devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.

NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pushed.

1. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two seconds each time). The EVIC/DID will display "CHANNEL # TRANSMIT." If the garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete.

NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the training.

To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

ReprogrammingASingleHomeLink®Button (RollingCode)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
   For vehicle's equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not releasethebutton.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with "Programming A Rolling Code" step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

Programming A Non-Rolling Code

For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program.
3. Push and hold the Homelink® button you want to program while you push and hold the hand - held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons until the EVIC/DID display changes from "CHANNEL # TRAINING" to "CHANNEL # TRAINED," then release both buttons.

NOTE:

• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases for the channel to train.
• If the EVIC/DID displays "DID NOT TRAIN" repeat from Step 2.

218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button. The EVIC/DID will display "CHANNEL # TRANSMIT." If the garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete.

To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

ReprogrammingASingleHomeLink®Button (Non—RollingCode)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

For vehicle's equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.

1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do notreleasethebutton.

2. Without releasing the button proceed with "Programming A Non-Rolling Code" step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

Canadian/Gate Operator Programming

For programming transmitters in Canada/United States that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after several seconds of transmission.

Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

For vehicle's equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.

1. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program.
2. Push and hold the Homelink® button while you push and release ("cycle"), your hand - held transmitter every two seconds.
3. Continue to hold both buttons until the EVIC/DID display changes from "CHANNEL # TRAINING" to "CHANNEL # TRAINED," then release both buttons.

NOTE:

• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases for the channel to train.
• If the EVIC/DID displays "DID NOT TRAIN" repeat from Step 2.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219

1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button. The EVIC/DID will display "CHANNEL # TRANSMIT." If the device is plugged in and activates, programming is complete.

If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programming, plug it back in at this time.

ReprogrammingASingleHomeLink®Button (Canadian/GateOperator)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. For vehicle's equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the EVIC/DID displays "CHANNEL # TRAINING" Donotreleasethebutton.

220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1. Withoutreleasingthebuttonproceed with "Canadian/Gate Operator Programming" Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

Using HomeLink®

To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

Security

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle.

To erase the channels press and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver

Interactive Display (DID) will display "CLEARING CHANNELS." Release the buttons when the EVIC/DID displays "CHANNELS CLEARED."

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

Troubleshooting Tips

If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here are some of the most common solutions:

• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in?

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

WARNING!

• Vehicleexhaustcontainscarbonmonoxide,adangerousgas.Donotrunyourvehicleinthegarage whileprogrammingthetransceiver.Exhaustgas cancauseseriousinjuryordeath.
• Yourmotorizeddoororgatewillopenandclose whileyouareprogrammingtheuniversaltransceiver.Donotprogramthetransceiverifpeople, petsorotherobjectsareinthepathofthedooror gate.Onlyusethistransceiverwithagaragedoor openerthathasa"stopandreverse"featureas requiredbyFederalsafetystandards.Thisincludes mostgaragedooropenermodelsmanufactured

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221

WARNING!(Continued)

after1982.Donotuseagaragedooropenerwithout thesesafetyfeatures.Calltoll-free800-355-3515or, ontheInternetatHomeLink.comforsafetyinformationorassistance.

General Information

This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.

(Continued)

222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead console between the courtesy/reading lights.

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

PowerSunroofSwitch

WARNING!

- Neverleavechildrenunattendedinvehicle,or withaccesstoun unlockedvehicle.Neverleavethe KeyFobinornearthevehicle,orinalocation

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

accessibletochildren.Donotleavetheignitionof avehicleequippedwithKeylessEnter-N-Go™in theACCorON/RUNmode.Occupants,particularlyunattendedchildren,canbecomeentrapped bythepowersunroofwhileoperatingthepower sunroofswitch.Suchentrapmentmayresultin seriousinjuryordeath.

• Inacollision, thereisagreatarriskofbeingthrown fromvehiclewithanopensunroof. Youcould alsobeseriouslyinjuredorkilled. Alwaysfasten yourseatbeltproperlyandmakesureallpassengersarealsoproperlysecured.
• Donotallowsmallchildrentooperatethesunroof. Neverallowyourfingers,otherbodyparts,orany object,toprojectthroughthesunroofopening. Injurymayresult.

Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode

To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again.

Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode

To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again.

Opening Sunroof — Express

Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any

224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

Closing Sunroof — Express

Push the switch forward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

Pinch Protect Feature

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and release to Express Close.

NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. Push and hold close switch to fully close sunroof.

Venting Sunroof — Express

Push and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called "Express Vent" and it will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

Sunshade Operation

The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.

NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.

Sunroof Maintenance

Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225

Ignition Off Operation

The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

NOTE:Ignition Off time is programmable through the Uconnect® System. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Features" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS

The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets can provide power for in-cab accessories designed for use with the standard "cigar lighter" plug. The 12 Volt power outlets have a cap attached to the outlet indicating "12V DC," together with either a key symbol or a battery symbol.

226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to provide power. The battery symbol indicates that the outlet is connected to the battery, and can provide power at all times.

NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR® knob and element must be used.

The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following locations:

CAUTION!

• Donotexceedthemaximumpowerof160Watts(13 Amps)at12Volts.Ifthe160Watts(13Amps)power ratingisexceeded,thefuseprotectingthesystem willneedtobereplaced.
• Poweroutletsaredesignedforaccessoryplugs only.Donotinsertanyotherobjectinthepower outletsasthiswilldamagetheoutletandblowthe fuse.Improperuseofthepoweroutletcancause damagenotcoveredbyyourNewVehicleLimited Warranty.

- Lower left and lower right of the center stack when equipped with a bench seat.

PowerOutlets—CenterStack

1 — Power Outlet
2 — USB Port (Charge Only)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227

- Center console when equipped with bucket seats.

Close-up of a car dashboard control panel showing a rotary switch labeled '12V DC' with an arrow pointing to it, no readable text or symbols beyond the label.

PowerOutlet—CenterConsole

228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

- Inside the upper lid of the center storage compartment — if equipped.

- Rear of the center console storage compartment — Quad Cab® or Crew Cab.

Interior view of a car air conditioner unit with control panel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

PowerOutlet—UpperLidPowerOutlet—RearCenterConsole

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229

PowerOutlet—RearCenterConsoleFusePowerOutletFuseLocations

1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Rear Center Console
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel

230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The key symbol indicates that this outlet can supply power when the key is in the ON/RUN or ACC positions.

All accessories connected to the outlet(s) should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge.

WARNING!

Toavoidseriousinjuryordeath:

• Onlydevicesdesignedforuseinthistypeofoutlet shouldbeinsertedintoany12Voltoutlet.
• Donottouchwithwethands.
• Closethelidwhennotinuseandwhiledrivingthe vehicle.
• If this outletismishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

CAUTION!

• Manyaccessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in longenough, the vehicle's battery will discharges sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the battery even more quickly. Only us these intermittently and with greater caution.
• Aftertheuseofhighpowerdrawaccessories,or longperiodsofthevehiclenotbeingstarted(with accessoriesstillpluggedin),thevehiclemustbe driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generatortorechargethevehicle'sbattery.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231

CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF EQUIPPED

A removable cigar lighter and ash receiver are available. For vehicles with a bench seat the cupholder tray can be used to hold the ash receiver.

CigarLighterAndAshReceiver

1 — Cigar Lighter
2 — Ash Receiver

232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED

A 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet is located on the center stack of the instrument panel, to the right of the radio. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as PlayStation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.

The power inverter is designed with built-in overload protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset.

PowerInverterOutlet

To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the device. The outlet automatically turns off when the device is unplugged.

NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.

WARNING!

Toavoidseriousinjuryordeath:

• Donotinsertanyobjectsintothereceptacles.
• Donottouchwithwethands.
  •Closethelidwhennotinuse.
• If this outletismishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED

There can be up to five auxiliary switches located in the lower switch bank of the instrument panel which can be used to power various electronic devices and PTO (Power Take Off) – If Equipped. If Power Take Off is equipped, it will take the place of the fifth Auxiliary switch. Connections to the switches are found under the hood in the connectors attached to the auxiliary Power Distribution Center.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233

You have the ability to configure the functionality of the auxiliary switches via the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). All switches can now be configured for setting the switch type operation to latching or momentary, power source of either battery or ignition, and ability to hold last state across key cycles.

NOTE: Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition.

For further information on using the auxiliary switches, please refer to the Ram Body Builders Guide by accessing www.rambodybuilder.com and choosing the appropriate links.

234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CUPHOLDERS

Front Seat Cupholders (40–20–40 Seats)

The cupholders are located on the backside of the center portion of the front seat (20). Fold down the center section of the front seat to gain access to the cupholders.

Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Floor Mounted Shifter

For vehicles equipped with bucket seats there are two cupholders located in the floor console.

Interior view of a car gear shift register with two white arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Cupholders

Rear Cupholders — If Equipped

Some vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders located in the center armrest.

Interior view of a car showing rear seats and seatbelt, with a black arrow pointing to the side arm (no text or symbols visible)

RearArmrestCupholder

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235

Some vehicles may be equipped with a rear cupholder that consists of two cup wells for rear passenger convenience.

Close-up of a car interior with a highlighted oval and arrow pointing to the center (no text or symbols)

RearCupWells

236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

STORAGE

Glove Compartment

The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel and features both an upper and lower storage area.

GloveCompartment

1 — Upper Glove Compartment
2 — Lower Glove Compartment

To open the upper glove compartment push upward on the handle release. The glove compartment door will automatically open.

Interior view of a car dashboard and air conditioner unit (no text or symbols visible)

UpperGloveCompartment

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237

To open the lower glove compartment, pull on the handle to release the latch and lower the glove compartment door.

Interior view of a car showing the front and rear seats with a door handle (no visible text or symbols)

LowerGloveCompartment

238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Door Storage

FrontDoorStorage—IfEquipped

Storage areas and bottle holders (drivers side only) are located in the door trim panels.

Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating movement or flow (no text or symbols)

FrontDoorStorage

RearDoorStorage—IfEquipped

Storage compartments are located in both the driver and passenger rear door trim panels.

Interior view of a car showing the backrest door and side panel with two arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

RearDoorStorage

Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped

The center storage compartment is located between the driver and passenger seats. The storage compartment provides an armrest and contains both and upper and lower storage area.

Interior view of a car showing the rear seat and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

CenterStorageCompartment

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239

WARNING!

• Thisarmrestisnotaseat.Anyoneseatedonthe armrestcouldbeseriouslyinjuredduringvehicle operation,oracollision.Onlyusethecenterseatingpositionwhenthearmrestisfullyupright.
• Inacollision, the latch may open if the total weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs (4.5 kg). These item should be thrown about endangering occupants of the vehicle. Items stored should not exceed at total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).

240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to raise the cover. The upper storage area contains a 12 Volt power outlet that can be used to power small electrical devices, refer to “Electrical Power Outlets” for further information.

Interior view of a car showing the backrest seat, dashboard, and passenger seat with a white arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols on the main objects)

UpperStorageCompartment

With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower handle to open the lower storage bin.

Interior view of a car showing the backrest seat, rear seats, and dashboard compartment with a white arrow pointing to a vehicle (no text or symbols on main objects)

LowerStorageBin

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241

WARNING!

Donotoperatethisvehiclewithaconsolecompartmentlidintheopenposition.Drivingwiththe consolecompartmentlidopenmayresultininjuryin acollision.

Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin — If Equipped

In-floor storage bins are located in front of the second row seats and can be used for extra storage. The storage bins have removable liners that can be easily removed for cleaning.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the button (no text or symbols visible)

In-FloorStorageBinAndLatch

To open in-floor storage bin, lift upward on the handle of the latch and open the lid.

NOTE: The front seat may have to be moved forward to fully open the lid.

242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Interior view of a car showing the seat, dashboard, and side panel (no text or symbols visible)

OpenedStorageBin

Seatback Storage

Located in the back of both the driver and passenger front seats are pockets that can be used for storage.

Interior view of a car showing the backrest and side arm, with a white arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

DriversSideSeatbackStorage

Storage (Regular Cab)

The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs the length of the cab.

Interior view of a car showing the door panel with lock icons and a black arrow pointing to a specific area (no text or symbols present)

StorageBin

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243

Storage and Seats (Crew Cab)

The Crew Cab models provide additional storage under the rear seats. Lift the seats to access the storage compartment.

To open the storage compartments, lift upward on the handle of the latch and open the lid.

Interior view of a vehicle showing two directional arrows pointing to car seats and rear seats (no text or symbols visible)

CrewCabStorage

244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Alwaysliftthestoragecompartmentlidsbyusing thehandle.Failureretoliftthelidsbyusingthehandle canresultindamagetothelids.

Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Regular Cab Models)

Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles are built into the back panel of the cab, behind the rear seat.

Interior view of a car showing three directional arrows pointing to the door panel (no text or symbols present)

GroceryBagHooks

REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window Defroster

The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel. Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, push the button a second time.

NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:

• Usecarewhenwashingtheinsideoftherear window.Donotuseabrasivewindowcleanerson theinteriorsurfaceofthewindow.Useasoftcloth andamildwashingsolution,wipingparalleltothe heatingelements.Labelscanbepeeledoffafter soakingwithwarmwater.
• Donotusescrapers, sharpinstruments, or abrasive window cleanerson the interiorsurface of the window.
• Keepallobjectsasafedistancefromthewindow.

246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped

The switch for the power sliding rear window is located on the overhead console.

Interior view of a car dashboard with control panel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

RearWindowSwitch

Push the switch to the right to open the glass. Pull the switch to the left to close the glass.

Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped

A locking device in the center of the window helps to prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the lock to release the window.

FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR — IF EQUIPPED

Quad Cab® and Crew Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat may be equipped with a folding load floor.

WARNING!

Donotoperatethevehiclewithlooseitemsstoredon theloadfloor. Whiledrivingorinanaccidentyou mayexperienceabruptstopping,rapidacceleration, orsharpturns. Looseobjectsstoredontheloadfloor maymovearoundwithforceandstrikeoccupants, resultinginseriousorfatalinjury.

UnfoldingTheLoadFloor/QuadCab®

1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.

Interior view of a vehicle showing seat, dashboard, and rear seats with a black arrow pointing to the dashboard (no text or symbols present)

UnfoldingTheLoadFloor

1. Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until the load floor unfolds into position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247

Interior view of a car showing the rear seats and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

LoadFloorInOpenPosition

1. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.

248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UnfoldingTheLoadFloor/CrewCab®

1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.

Interior view of a car showing a vehicle's dashboard and steering wheel (no text or symbols visible)

LoadFloorLegsInStowedPosition

1. Unfold both the legs using the straps.

Interior view of a car showing a vehicle seat with a directional arrow indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

LoadFloorLegsInOpenedPosition

1. Lift the front panel until the load floor unfolds into position.

Interior view of a car showing seat compartments and dashboard, with a white arrow pointing to the lower side (no text or symbols present)

LoadFloorInOpenPosition

1. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249

PositioningTheLoadFloorForStorageAccessUnder TheSeat

1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the load floor.
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load floor.

WARNING!

Donotdrivewiththeloadfloorintheupposition. Whenstoppingfastorinanaccident,theloadfloor couldmovetothedownpositioncausingserious injury.

250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

QuadCab®—IfEquippedCrewCab®—IfEquipped

Interior view of a car showing the seatbelt and door mechanism, with a black arrow pointing to the side of the seatbelt (no text or symbols present)

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard, seatbelt, and door (no text or symbols visible)

LoadFloorSecuringStraps/QuadCab®LoadFloorSecuringStraps/CrewCab®

1. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the secured down position before you operate the vehicle.

PICKUP BOX

The pickup box has many features designed for utility and convenience.

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    B --> C["3"]
    C --> A
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

PickUpBoxFeatures

1 — Upper Load Floor Indents
2 — Bulk Head Dividers
3 — Cleats

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251

NOTE: If you are installing a Toolbox, Ladder Rack or Headache Rack at the front of the Pickup Box, you must use Mopar Box Reinforcement Brackets that are available from your authorized dealer.

You can carry wide building materials (sheets of plywood, etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place lumber across the box in the indentations provided above the wheel housings and in the bulkhead dividers to form the floor.

WARNING!

• Thepickupboxisintendedforloadcarryingpurposesonly,notforpassengers,whoshouldsitin seatsanduseseatbelts.
• Careshouldalwaysbeexercisedwhenoperatinga vehiclewithunrestrainedcargo.Vehiclespeeds mayneedtobereduced.Severeturnsorrough

(Continued)

252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

roadsmaycauseshiftingorbouncingofthecargo thatmayresultinvehicledamage.Ifwidebuilding materialsaretobefrequentlycarried,theinstallationofasupportisrecommended.Thiswillre-strainthecargoandtransfertheloadtothepickup boxfloor.

- If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs (272 kg) of materials suspended above the wheel house, supports must be installed to transfer the weight of the load to the pickup box floor or vehicle damage may result. The use of propers supports will permit loading up to otherated payload.

- Unrestrainedcargomaybethrownforwardinan accidentcausingseriousorfatalinjury.

There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner side bulkheads of the box in front of and behind both wheel

housings. Place wooden boards across the box from side to side to create separate load compartments in the pickup box.

There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower sides of the pickup box that can sustain loads up to 1000 lbs (450 kg) total.

Cargo Camera — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cargo Camera that allows you to see an image of the inside of the pickup box. The image will be displayed in the Uconnect® screen.

A display timer is initiated when the cargo camera image is displayed. The image will continue to be displayed until the display timer exceeds 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) or the image is deactivated by touching the Uconnect® display.

NOTE: If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the cargo camera image will be displayed continuously until deactivated by touching the Uconnect® display.

The Cargo Camera is located in the bottom center area of the center high-mounted stoplamp (CHMSL).

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

Turning Cargo Camera On Or Off — With Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN

1. Press the "Controls" button located on the bottom of the Uconnect® display.
2. Press the "Cargo Camera" button → to turn the Cargo Camera system ON.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253

NOTE: The Cargo Camera image may be deactivated by pressing the Uconnect® display. The previous selected screen will appear.

RAMBOX® — IF EQUIPPED

The RamBox® system is an integrated pickup box storage and cargo management system consisting of three features:

• Integrated box side storage bins
• Cargo extender/divider
• Bed rail tie-down system

254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

RamBox® Integrated Box Side Storage Bins

Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the pickup box. The cargo storage bins provide watertight, lockable, illuminated storage for up to 150 lbs (68 kg) for 1500 series vehicles or 300 lbs (136 kg) for 2500 and 3500 series vehicles of evenly distributed cargo.

Interior view of a vehicle showing structural components and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

RamBox®CargoStorageBins

CAUTION!

Failure to follow the following items could cause damage to the vehicle:

• Assurethatallcargoinsidethestoragebinsis properlysecured.
- Donotexceedcargoweightratingof150lb(68kg) 1500seriesvehiclesor300lbs(136kg)for2500and 3500seriesvehiclesperbin.

To open a storage bin with the RamBox® unlocked, push and release the button located on the lid. The RamBox® lid will open upward to allow hand access. Lift the lid to fully open.

NOTE:RamBox® will not open when the pushbutton is pushed if the RamBox® is locked.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255

Side view of a pickup truck's side panel showing a black arrow pointing to the nose area (no text or symbols present)

Close-up of a car door panel with a black arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols on the panel itself)

RamBox®PushbuttonAndLockRamBox®LightSwitch

The interior of the RamBox® will automatically illuminate when the lid is opened. In addition to the automatic illumination switch, there is a manual on/off switch located at the rear of each storage bin. Pushing the switch once will turn off the bin lights, pushing the switch again will turn the lights back on.

CAUTION!

Leavingthelidopenforextendedperiodsoftime couldcausethevehiclebatterytodischarge.Ifthelid isrequiredtostayopenforextendedperiodsoftime,

(Continued)

256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!(Continued)

itisrecommendedthatthebinlightsbeturnedoff manuallyusingtheon/offswitch.

Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs (to allow water to drain from bins). To remove plug, pull up on the edge. To install push plug downward into drain hole.

NOTE:Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo dividers and shelf supports. These accessories (in addition to other RamBox® accessories) are available from MOPAR®.

Locking And Unlocking RamBox®

Push and release the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox® (if equipped). Refer to "Remote Keyless Entry" for further details. The RamBox® storage bins can be locked using the vehicle key. To lock and unlock

the storage bin, insert the key into the keyhole on the pushbutton and turn clockwise to lock or counterclockwise to unlock. Always return the key to the upright (vertical) position before removing the key from the pushbutton.

CAUTION!

• Ensurecargobinlidsareclosedandlatchedbefore movingordrivingvehicle.
• Loadsappliedtothetopofthebinlidshouldbe minimizedtopreventdamagethelidand latching/hingingmechanisms.
• DamagetotheRamBox®binmayoccurdueto heavy/sharpobjectsplacedinbinthatshiftdueto vehiclemotion.Inordertominimizepotentialfor damage,secureallcargotopreventmovementand protectinsidesurfacesofbinfromheavy/sharp objectswithappropriatepadding.

RamBox® Safety Warning

Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

WARNING!

• Alwaysclosethestoragebincoverswhenyour vehicleisunattended.
- Donotallowchildrentohaveaccesstothestorage bins.Onceinthestoragebin,youngchildrenmay notbeabletoescape.Iftrappedinthestoragebin, childrencandiefromsuffocationorheatstroke.
- Inanaccident,seriousinjurycouldresultifthe storagebincoversarenotproperlylatched.
- Donotdrivethevehiclewiththestoragebincovers open.
- Keepthestoragebincoversclosedandlatched whilethevehicleisinmotion.
- Donotuseastoragebinlatchasatiedown.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257

RamBox®StorageBinCoverEmergencyRelease Lever—IfEquipped

As a security measure, a Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release is built into the storage bin cover latching mechanism.

Interior view of a car intake manifold showing a mechanical component and a tool, with no visible text or symbols.

StorageBinCoverEmergencyReleaseLever

258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from inside of the bin by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.

Bed Extender — If Equipped

The bed extender has three functional positions:

• Storage Position
• Divider Position
• Extender Position

StoragePosition

The storage position for the bed extender is at the front of the truck bed which maximizes the bed cargo area when not in use.

To install the bed extender into the storage position, perform the following:

1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to release the extender side gates.

CenterHandleAndLock

1 — Center Handle Lock

2 — Handle

1. With the side gates open, position the extender fully forward in the bed against the front panel.

Interior view of a vehicle dashboard with structural panels and a directional arrow indicating orientation (no text or symbols)

StoragePosition

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259

1. Rotate the side gates closed allowing the outboard ends to be positioned in front of the cargo tie down loops.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a belt switch and connector (no text or symbols visible)

CargoTieDownLoop

260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side gates in the closed position.

Top-down view of a mechanical component with a central knob and four rectangular slots, showing no text or symbols.

SideGatesClosed

1. Lock the center handle using the vehicle key to secure the panel into place.

DividerPosition

The divider position is intended for managing your cargo and assisting in keeping cargo from moving around the bed. There are 11 divider slots along the bed inner panels which allow for various positions to assist in managing your cargo.

To install the bed extender into a divider position perform the following:

1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to release the extender side gates.

CenterHandleAndLock

1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261

1. With the side gates open, position the extender so the outboard ends align with the intended slots in the sides of the bed.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a lever mechanism with a downward arrow indicating force or motion (no text or symbols present)

AligningGateToSlots

1. Rotate the side gates closed so that the outboard ends are secured into the intended slots of the bed.

262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side gates in the closed position.

Top-down view of a mechanical component with a central knob and four rectangular slots, showing no text or symbols.

SideGatesClosed

1. Lock the center handle to secure the panel into place.

ExtenderPosition

The extender position allows you to load the bed of the truck beyond the tail gate. The bed extender will add an additional 15 in (38 cm) in the back of the truck when additional cargo room is needed. The extender position utilizes a locating pin and rotating handle located on both sides of the truck bed near the tailgate.

Technical illustration of a vehicle's front compartment showing structural details (no text or symbols)

ExtenderPosition

To install the bed extender into the extender position perform the following:

1. Lower the tailgate.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263

1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked and rotate the center handle vertically in order to release the extender side gates.
2. Fit the end of the side gate ends onto the pin and handle.

Close-up of a mechanical component with two arrows pointing to a panel (no text or symbols visible)

ExtenderInstallation

264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1. Rotate the handles to the horizontal position to secure into place.

Close-up of a vehicle's front panel showing structural components and a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

LockingTab

WARNING!

Toreducetheriskofpotentialinjuryorproperty damage:

• Cargomustbesecured.
- Donotexceedcargoloadratingofyourvehicle.
- Secureallloadstotruckutilizingcargotiedowns.
- Extendershouldnotbeusedascargotiedown.
- When vehicle is in motion on the not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg) load on the tail gate.
• Thebedextenderisnotintendedforoffroaduse.
- When not in use, the extender/dividers should be in stowed or divider position with the tail gate closed.
- Wheninuseallhandlesaretobeinthelocked position.

Bed Rail Tie-Down System

CAUTION!

Themaximumloadpercleatshouldnotexceed 250lbs(113kg)andtheangleoftheloadoneachcleat shouldnotexceed45degreesabovehorizontal,or damagetothecleatorcleatrailmayoccur.

There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the bed that can be used to assist in securing cargo.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265

Diagram of a vehicle's side panel with two upward arrows indicating heating or ventilation zones (no text or symbols present)

AdjustableCleats

Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one of the detents, along either rail, in order to keep cargo properly secure.

To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn the nut counterclockwise, approximately three turns. Then pull

266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

out on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the desired location. Make sure the cleat is seated in the detent and tighten the nut.

1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat

To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove the end cap screw located in the center of the end cap, using a #T30 Torx® head driver. Remove the end cap and slide the cleat off the end of the rail.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a sliding door with a black arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols present)

UtilityRailEndCap

SLIDE-IN CAMPERS

Camper Applications

Certain truck models are not recommended for slide-in campers. To determine if your vehicle is excluded, please refer to the "Consumer Information Truck-Camper Loading" document available from your authorized dealer. For safety reasons, follow all instructions in this important document.

NOTE: When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a vehicle, an alternate Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) must be provided.

EASY-OFF TAILGATE

To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang, the tailgate can be removed.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a rear camera or RKE the electrical connector must be disconnected prior to removing the tailgate.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267

Disconnecting The Rear Camera Or Remote Keyless Entry — If Equipped

1. Open the tailgate to access the rear camera or RKE (Remote Keyless Entry) connector bracket located on the rear sill.

Microscopic view of a microfluidic channel with a black arrow pointing to a feature, no visible text or symbols

ConnectorBracket

268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1. Remove the connector bracket from the sill by pushing inward in the locking tab.

Close-up of a USB flash drive with a cable and indicator light (no text or symbols visible)

036906362

LockingTab

1. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness, ensuring the connector bracket does not fall into the sill.

2. Connect the chassis plug and bracket (provided in the glove box) to the chassis wiring harness and insert the bracket back into the sill.

3. Connect the tailgate plug (provided in the glove box) to the tailgate wiring harness to ensure that the terminals do not corrode.
4. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against the forward-facing surface of the tailgate. This will prevent damaging the connector and bracket when storing or reinstalling the tailgate.

Removing The Tailgate

1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear camera and or power locks (if equipped), refer to "Disconnecting the Rear Camera — If Equipped" in this section.
2. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables by releasing the lock tang from the pivot.

NOTE: Make sure tailgate is supported when removing support cables.

Close-up of a car door panel with a cable inserted, showing a white arrow pointing to the connector (no text or symbols visible)

LockingTang

1. Raise the tailgate to a 45 degree angle.
2. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side pivot clears the hanger bracket.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269

1. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left side pivot.
2. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.

NOTE: Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck pickup box.

WARNING!

To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly, the exhaust system on vehicle equipped with "Capor Slide-In Campers" should extend beyond the overhanging camper compartment and be free of leaks.

Locking Tailgate

The lock is located next to the tailgate handle. The tailgate can be locked using the vehicle key or by locking the truck with the key-fob if equipped with remote keyless entry.

270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover which consists of different features:

• Easy Tri-Fold cover
  • Tonneau fore aft locator
  •Crosscar inside bed locator
• Front and rear clamps
• Stowage strap
• Locking Capability

NOTE: The Tonneau Cover can be folded up and secured at the front of the box without removing completely.

Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal

To remove the Tonneau Cover follow the following steps:

1. Lower the tailgate to gain access to the first set of two tonneau cover clamps located on the driver and passengers under side of the tonneau cover.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a bracket with attached clamping device (no text or symbols)

ClampedPosition

NOTE: If clamp wire is damaged replace immediately.

1. Pull down on the first set of clamps on both driver and passenger sides to the semi clamped position.

Interior view of a vehicle showing mechanical components and wiring (no text or symbols visible)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271

1. Pull down on the clamp wire and push the clamp up into the proper released position.

Interior view of a vehicle showing a mechanical lock and bracket (no text or symbols visible)

SemiClampedPositionProperReleasedPosition

NOTE: Be sure the clamp and clamp wire is in the proper released position.

272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Close-up of a mechanical device with a circular symbol indicating no prohibition (no text or labels present)

ImproperClampWireReleasedPosition

CAUTION!

Makesurethetonneaucoverclampandclampwire isintheproperreleasedposition.Iftheclampand clampwireisnotproperlyreleased,damagetothe tonneaucovermaterialwillresult.

1. Pick up on the tonneau cover and fold it back onto the second panel.

2. Pick up on the cover and fold it back onto the third panel.

3. Once in the third panel position pull down on the second set of clamps on both driver and passenger sides to the semi clamped position.

Interior view of a vehicle showing mechanical components and wiring (no text or symbols visible)

SemiClampedPosition

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273

1. Pull down on the clamp wire and push the clamp up into the proper released position.

Interior view of a vehicle suspension lock mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

ProperReleasedPosition

274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1. Be sure to clip both stowage straps together to insure the cover stays together.

Black-and-white illustration of a curved mechanical component or bracket, possibly a tool or clamp, against a dark background with diagonal lines (no text or symbols visible)

StowageStrap

1. With two people remove the cover.

NOTE: Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded completely before removing.

Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation

To install the Tonneau Cover follow the following steps:

1. Position the folded Tonneau Cover on the truck bed and push the Cover forward against the front of the truck bed. The Tonneau Cover centers itself when placed on the vehicle.

2. Pull down on the first set of clamp handles to release the clamps from the stowed position.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a bracket with attached components and a numbered label (036774434) in the corner.

StowedPosition

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275

1. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of box (or flange of Ram Box rail, if equipped) to the semi clamped position.

Interior view of a vehicle showing mechanical components and wiring (no text or symbols visible)

SemiClampedPosition

276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped position to properly engage the clamps.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a bracket with attached clamping device and connecting wires (no text or symbols)

ClampedPosition

NOTE: Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not partially clamped to the truck bed flange.

Close-up of a mechanical device with a circular no-smoking symbol (no text or labels visible)

ImproperClampPosition

1. Disengage the stowage straps.

2. Unfold Tonneau Cover to the intermediate position.

NOTE: The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau Cover is in this position.

Side view of a pickup truck's front bumper with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols on the vehicle itself)

IntermediatePosition(VehicleCannotBeDriven)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277

1. Completely unfold the Tonneau Cover.

Top-down view of a white pickup truck with black trim and rear bumper (no visible text or symbols)

FullyUnfoldedPosition

278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1. Pull down on the second set of clamp handles to release the clamps from the stowed position.

Interior view of a vehicle suspension lock mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

StowedPosition

1. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of box (or flange of Ram Box rail, if equipped) to the semi clamped position.

Interior view of a vehicle showing mechanical components and wiring (no text or symbols visible)

SemiClampedPosition

1. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped position to properly engage the clamps.

Technical illustration of a mechanical assembly with clamps and rods (no text or symbols)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279

NOTE: Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not partially clamped to the truck bed flange.

Close-up of a mechanical device with a no-smoking symbol (no text or labels visible)

ClampedPositionImproperClampPosition

280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The Tonneau Cover clamps can be locked when in the clamped position by placing a lock through the locking hole.

Mechanical component diagram showing a bracket with a highlighted connection point and an arrow indicator (no text or symbols present)

LockingHole

CAUTION!

Itisthedriver's responsibility to ensure the Tonneau Coveris properly installed on the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure can result in detachment of the Tonneau Cover from the vehicle and ordamageto the vehicle/Tonneau Cover.

Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning

For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover use MOPAR® Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and MOPAR® Leather & Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS

■INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES....284
■INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — MIDLINE (EVIC) . .285
■INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM (DID) .286
■INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .287
■ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC)....299

□Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays — 3.5" Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
□Oil Life Reset....304
□EVIC Messages Menu Item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

□EVIC Red Telltales....310
□EVIC Yellow Telltales....312
□EVIC White Telltales....314
□EVIC Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

■DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) . . . . .328

□Driver Information Display (DID) Displays . . .331
□ Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
□DID Messages....334
□DID Red Telltales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
□ DID Yellow Telltales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

□DID White Telltales .....343
□DID Selectable Menu Items .....344

■Uconnect® SETTINGS....356

□Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
□Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
□Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect® 5.0 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
□Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

■Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED .....395

■iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .395

■STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED....396

□Radio Operation....397
□CD Player — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

□ Regulatory And Safety Information .....398

■CLIMATE CONTROLS....400

□Manual Climate Controls Without Touchscreen — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
□Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If Equipped....405
□Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283

□Climate Control Functions .....416
□Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .....418
□Operating Tips....419

■Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION .....423

□Introducing Uconnect®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
□Get Started....424
□Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
□Radio....427
□Media. 429
□Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)....431

□Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)....432
□Phone. 433
□Voice Text Reply....434
□Uconnect® Access (8.4A/8.4AN) ..... .435
□Register (8.4A/8.4AN)....436
□Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)....437
□Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)....438
□Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
□SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN) .....440
□Additional Information....441

284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Headlight Switch 7 — 115v Power Inverter Outlet 13 — Gear Selector/Transfer Case Position

Switch — If Equipped

2 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Power Outlet — If Equipped 14 — Ignition Switch
3 — Radio 9 — Lower Switch Bank 15 — Hood Release
4 — Hazard Switch 10 — Instrument Panel Drawer 16 — Parking Brake Release
5 — Upper Glove Compartment 11 — Climate Controls
6 — Lower Glove Compartment 12 — Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter — If

Equipped

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — MIDLINE (EVIC)

Electronic Vehicle Information Display(EVIC)
0403017342

286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM (DID)

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS

1. Tachometer

The tachometer indicates engine speed in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM x 1000).

CAUTION!

Donotoperatetheenginewiththetachometer pointerathighRPMforextendedperiods.Engine operationover3200RPM(Redline)canresultin significantdamagethatwillnotbecoveredunderthe NewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

2. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light

This light monitors the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

3. MalfunctionIndicatorLight(MIL)

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an onboard diagnostic (OBDII) system which monitors the emissions and engine control system. If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing, the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on, as a bulb check, until the engine is started. If the vehicle is not ready for emissions

288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on for 15 seconds, then blink for 5 seconds, and remain on until the vehicle is started. If the bulb does not come on during starting, have the condition investigated promptly.

If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it suggests a potential engine control problem and the need for system service.

Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

ProlongeddrivingwiththeMalfunctionIndicator Light(MIL)oncouldcausedamagetotheengine controlsystem.Italsocouldaffectfueleconomyand driveability.IftheMILisflashing,severecatalytic

CAUTION!(Continued)

converterdamageandpowerlosswillsoonoccur. Immediateserviceisrequired.

WARNING!

Amalfunctioningcatalyticconverter, as referenced above, can reach high temperature than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in deathor serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

4. TurnSignalIndicators

The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated.

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289

NOTE:

• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator remains on and does not flash, or flashes at a rapid rate.

5.Voltmeter—IfEquipped

When the engine is running, the gauge indicates the electrical system voltage. The pointer should within the normal range if the battery is charged. If inter moves to either extreme left or right and as there during normal driving, the electrical sys-ould be serviced.

NOTE: The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at various engine temperatures. This cycling operation is caused by the post-heat cycle of the intake manifold heater system. The number of cycles and the length of the cycling operation is controlled by the engine control module. Post-heat operation can run for several minutes, and then the electrical system and voltmeter needle will stabilize.

6.BrakeWarningLight

BRAKE This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-lock Brake System reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake

290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

WARNING!

Drivingvehiclewiththeredbrakelightonis dangerous.Partofthebrakesystemmayhavefailed. Itwilltakelongertostopthevehicle.Youcouldhave acollision.Havethevehiclecheckedimmediately.

Vehicles equipped with the ABS, are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off

unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

7. HighBeamIndicator

This light shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. If the driver's door is open, and the headlights or park lights are left on, the high beam indicator light will remain illuminated and a chime will sound.

8.SeatBeltReminderLight

When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver's seat belt remains unbuckled, the seat belt reminder light will flash or remain on continuously. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.

9. AirBagWarningLight

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while

driving, have the system inspected at an authorized

292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

dealer as soon as possible. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.

10.OilPressureGauge—IfEquipped

The pointer should always indicate some oil pressure when the engine is running. A continuous high or low reading under normal driving conditions may indicate a lubrication system malfunction. Immediate service should be obtained from an authorized dealer.

11.Speedometer

The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour and/or kilometers per hour (mph/km/h).

12. Park/HeadlightONIndicator—IfEquipped

This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.

13.CargoLight—IfEquipped

The cargo light will illuminate when the cargo light is activated by pressing the cargo light button on the headlight switch.

14.FuelGauge

Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.

15. VehicleSecurityLight—IfEquipped

This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.

16. TirePressureMonitoringTelltaleLight—If Equipped

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires).

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293

overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety

294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

TheTPMShasbeenoptimizedfortheoriginal equipmenttiresandwheels.TPMSpressuresand warninghavebeenestablishedforthetiresize equippedonyourvehicle.Undesirablesystemoperationorsensordamagemayresultwhenusingreplacementequipmentthatisnotofthesamesize, type,and/orstyle.Aftermarketwheelscancause sensordamage.Usingaftermarkettiresealantsmay

CAUTION!(Continued)

causetheTirePressureMonitoringSystem(TPMS) sensortobecomeinoperable. Afterusinganafter-markettiresealantitisrecommendedthatyoutake yourvehicletoanauthorizeddealershiptohaveyour sensorfunctionchecked.

NOTE: The TPMS telltale is also accompanied by a "Low Tire" message in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) screen indicating "Low Tire" for EVIC enabled clusters.

1. FrontFogLightIndicator—IfEquipped

This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

(Continued)

1. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)

The EVIC/DID features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

19.ShiftLeverIndicator

The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission.

NOTE: The highest available transmission gear is displayed in the lower right corner of the EVIC/DID whenever the Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature is active. Use the +/- selector on the shift lever to activate ERS. Refer to "Automatic Transmission" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

20.DriverInformationDisplay(DID)Menu

The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. Refer to "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

1. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light—IfEquipped

This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.

When the “Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF” indicator illuminates in the instrument cluster it indicates that the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) has been turned off by the driver.

22.TOW/HAUL

The TOW HAUL button is located on the center stack upper switch bank. This light will illuminate when TOW HAUL mode is selected.

23.ElectronicStabilityControl(ESC)Activation/MalfunctionIndicatorLight—IfEquipped

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the nning. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-light” comes on continuously with the engine a malfunction has been detected in the ESC of this light remains on after several ignition and the vehicle has been driven several miles (rs) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see norized dealer as soon as possible to have the diagnosed and corrected.

NOTE:

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

24. Temperature Gauge

The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

CAUTION!

Drivingwithahotenginecoolingsystemcould damageyourvehicle.Ifthetemperaturegaugereads "H"pulloverandstopthevehicle.Idlethevehicle withtheairconditionerturnedoffuntilthepointer dropsbackintothenormalrange.Ifthepointer remainsonthe"H"andyouhearcontinuouschimes, turntheengineoffimmediatelyandcallanaauthorizeddealerforservice.

WARNING!

Ahotenginecoolingsystemisdangerous.Youor otherscouldbebadlyburnedbysteamorboiling coolant.Youmaywanttocallanauthorizeddealer forserviceifyourvehicleoverheats.Ifyoudecideto lookunderthehoodyourself,see“MaintainingYour Vehicle.”Followthewarningsunderthe“Cooling SystemPressureCap”paragraph.

25.ElectronicThrottleControl(ETC)Light

This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb

check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the

298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.

If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required. You may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.

26.4LOW—IfEquipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels.

Refer to "Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use.

27.4WDAUTOIndicatorLight—IfEquipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive auto mode, and the front axle is engaged, but the vehicle's power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction.

Refer to "Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use.

28.4WDIndicatorLight—IfEquipped

4WD

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive mode, and the front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.

Refer to "Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use.

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC)

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.

ElectronicVehicleInformationCenter(EVIC)

The EVIC Menu items consists of the following:

• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
  • Fuel Economy Info

300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Trip A
• Trip B
• Stop/Start Info (If Equipped)
  • Air Suspension (If Equipped)
• Trailer Tow
• Messages
• Screen Setup
• Vehicle Settings (Not Equipped with a Uconnect 5.0 & 8.4 radio)

The system allows the driver to select information by pushing the following EVIC Control buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel:

040971549

EVICControlButtons

- UPArrowButton

Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll upward through the main menu items.

- DOWNArrowButton

Push and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu items.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301

•RIGHTArrowButton

Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to access/select the information screens or sub-menu screens of a main menu item. Push and hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds displayed/selected features that can be reset.

- LEFTArrowButton

Push and release the LEFT arrow button to return to the main menu, to exit the main menu push and release the UP or DOWN arrow to highlight Turn Menu Off, then push and re-RIGHT arrow.

302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Displays — 3.5" Display

graph TD
    1 --> 2
    2 --> 3
    3 --> 4
    4 --> 5
    5 --> 6
    6 --> 7
    7 --> 1
    1 --> 8
    8 --> 9
    9 --> 10
    10 --> 11
    11 --> 12
    12 --> 13
    13 --> 14
    14 --> 15
    15 --> 16
    16 --> 17
    17 --> 18
    18 --> 19
    19 --> 20
    20 --> 21
    21 --> 22
    22 --> 23
    23 --> 24
    24 --> 25
    25 --> 26
    26 --> 27
    27 --> 28
    28 --> 29
    29 --> 30
    30 --> 31
    31 --> 32
    32 --> 33
    33 --> 34
    34 --> 35
    35 --> 36
    36 --> 37
    37 --> 38
    38 --> 39
    39 --> 40
    40 --> 41
    41 --> 42
    42 --> 43
    43 --> 44
    44 --> 45
    45 --> 46
    46 --> 47
    47 --> 48
    48 --> 49
    49 --> 50
    50 --> 51
    51 --> 52
    52 --> 53
    53 --> 54
    54 --> 55
    55 --> 56
    56 --> 57
    57 --> 58
    58 --> 59
    59 --> 60
    60 --> 61
    61 --> 62
    62 --> 63
    63 --> 64
    64 --> 65
    65 --> 66
    66 --> 67
    67 --> 68
    68 --> 69
    69 --> 70
    70 --> 71
    71 --> 72
    72 --> 73
    73 --> 74
    74 --> 75
    75 --> 76
    76 --> 77
    77 --> 78
    78 --> 79
    79 --> 80
    80 --> 81
    81 --> 82
    82 --> 83
    83 --> 84
    84 --> 85
    85 --> 86
    86 --> 87
    87 --> 88
    88 --> 89
    89 --> 90

0409021772

The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the cluster and consists of seven sections:

1. CompassDisplay

Displays the current direction. Refer to "Compass Settings" under "Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect® 5.0/8.4 Settings" for further information.

2. TemperatureDisplay

Displays the temperature in degrees Celsius or degrees Fahrenheit.

3.MainScreen

Displays main menu, sub-menus, settings.

4.EVICWhiteTelltales

5.EVICAmberTelltales

6.EVICRedTelltales

1. Audio/PhoneInformationAndSub-menuInformation

Whenever there are sub-menus available, the position within the sub-menu is shown here.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303

The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu. The main display area also displays "pop up" messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall into several categories:

- FiveSecondStoredMessages

When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the condition that activated it remains active) and can be reviewed from the "Messages" main menu item. As long as there is a stored message, an "i" will be displayed in the EVIC's compass/outside temp line. Examples of this message type are "Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out" and "Low Tire Pressure."

- UnstoredMessages

This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples of this message type are "Turn Signal On" (if a turn signal is left on) and "Lights On" (if driver leaves the vehicle).

- UnstoredMessagesUntilRUN

These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are "Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar" and "Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start."

- FiveSecondUnstoredMessages

When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An example of this message type is “Automatic High Beams On.”

304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Oil Life Reset

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will display in the EVIC after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.

NOTE: Use the steering wheel EVIC controls for the following procedure(s).

VehiclesEquippedWithPassiveEntry

1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).

2. Push and release the DOWNarrow button to scroll downward through the main menu to "Vehicle Info."

3. Push and release the RIGHTarrow button to access the "Vehicle Info" screen, then scroll UP or DOWN to select "Oil Life."

4. Push and hold the RIGHTarrow button to select "Reset," then push and release the Right arrow button to select "NO" or "YES" to reset the Oil Life to 100%.
5. Push and release the Up arrow button to exit the EVIC screen.

VehiclesNotEquippedWithPassiveEntry

1. Without depressing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the DOWNarrow button to scroll downward through the main menu to "Vehicle Info."
3. Push and release the RIGHTarrow button to access the "Vehicle Info" screen then scroll UPor DOWNto select "Oil Life."

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305

1. Push and hold the RIGHTarrow button to select "Reset," then select "NO" or "YES" by pushing the RIGHTarrow then push the RIGHTarrow button to select reset of the Oil Life to 100%.
2. Push and release the Up arrow button to exit the EVIC screen.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the Oil Life indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

EVIC Messages Menu Item

• Front Seat Belts Unbuckled
- Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
•Service Air Bag System
- Traction Control Off

• Washer Fluid Low
• Oil Pressure Low
• Oil Change Due
• Fuel Low
  •Service Anti-lock Brake System
  •Service Electronic Throttle Control
  •Service Power Steering
  • Cruise Off
  • Cruise Ready
  • Cruise Set To XXX MPH
  • Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)
  •Service Tire Pressure System

- Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) "Inflate Tire to XX"

306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Parking Brake Engaged
• Brake Fluid Low
  •Service Electronic Braking System
  •Engine Temperature Hot
• Battery Voltage Low
  •Service Electronic Throttle Control
  •Lights On
  • Right Turn Signal Light Out
  • Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Turn Signal On
• Sound Horn with Remote Lock: Off; 1st Push; 2nd Push
• Vehicle Not In Park

•Key in Ignition
•Key in Ignition Lights On
- Remote Start Active Key To Run
- Remote Start Active Push Start Button
- Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
- Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
- Remote Start Aborted Door Open
- Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
- Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open
- Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
- Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
•Service Airbag System
•Service Airbag Warning Light

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307

• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
  • Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
  • Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Door Open
• Doors Open
• Gear Not Available
• Shift Not Allowed
• Shift To Neutral Then Drive Or Reverse
  • Autostick Unavailable Service Required
  • Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
  • Transmission Getting Hot Push Brake
  • Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift To Park Wait To Cool
  •Transmission Cool Ready To Drive

• Trailer Brake Disconnected
•Service Transmission
•Service Shifter
- Engage Park Brake To Prevent Rolling
• Transmission Too Cold Idle With Engine On
- Washer Fluid Low
•Service Air Suspension System
•Heavy Duty Air Suspension System Disabled
- Selected Ride Height Not Permitted Due To Speed
- Selected Ride Height Not Permitted Due To Payload
- Selected Ride Height Not Permitted - Payload Too Light
- Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height

308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

•Normal Ride Height Achieved
• Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved
- Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved
- Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved
- Entry/Exit Ride Height Achieved
- Selected Ride Height Not Permitted
•Service Air Suspension System Immediately
- Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height
• Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait
- Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open
- Off Road 2 Watch For Clearance
- Entry/Exit Watch For Clearance

• Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For Jacking And Tire Change
- Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height
- Stop/Start Ready – If Equipped
- Stop/Start Not Ready – If Equipped
- Stop/Start Not Ready Hood Open – If Equipped
- Stop/Start Not Ready Battery Charging – If Equipped
- Stop/Start Not Ready Trailer Tow/Haul Selected – If Equipped
- Stop/Start Not Ready 4WD/Low Range Selected – If Equipped
- Stop/Start Not Ready Fuel Level Low – If Equipped
- Stop/Start Not Ready Steep Incline – If Equipped

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309

• Stop/Start Not Ready Extreme Outside Temperature – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Engine Temperature Too High – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Engine Temperature Too Low – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Driver Door Open – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Cabin Cooling Or Heating – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Not Ready Max Cooling Or Heating – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Max Cooling Or Heating Selected – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Front Defrost Selected – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Steering Wheel Turned – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Autostop Active – If Equipped
• Stop/Start To Restart Push Clutch Or Shift To Neutral – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Req'd Fault Detected – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Cannot Autostart Hood Open – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Unavailable Service Battery – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Unavailable Service Stop/Start System – If Equipped
• Stop/Start To Restart Shift Out Of Park – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Off – If Equipped

310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

- Autostop Duration – If Equipped

The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white telltales area on the right, yellow telltales in the middle, and red telltales on the left.

EVIC Red Telltales

This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These telltales include:

•DoorAjar

This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors may be ajar.

• OilPressureWarningLight

This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

• OilTemperatureWarningLight

This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.

- ChargingSystemLight

This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while g, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential cal devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If charging system light remains on, it means that the e is experiencing a problem with the charging h. OBTAIN SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an au-ed dealer.

Refer to "Jump Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies" if jump starting is required.

• ElectronicThrottleControl(ETC)Light.

This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.

If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required. You may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.

• EngineTemperatureWarningLight

This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-hes H, this indicator will illuminate and a single will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further heating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, inuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to "If Your Engine Overheats" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.

312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: When the transmission is shifted to Neutral, activate the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.

• ElectricPowerSteeringMalfunctionWarningLight

This telltale is on when the Electric Power Steering is not operating and needs service.

• TrailerBrakeDisconnectedWarningLight

This telltale is on when the Trailer Brake has been disconnected.

EVIC Yellow Telltales

This area will show reconfigurable yellow caution tell-tales. These telltales include:

- LowFuelTelltale

When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L), this light will turn on, and remain on until added.

•WindshieldWasherFluidLowIndicator

This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind-shield washer fluid is low.

- LowCoolantLevelIndicator

This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle coolant level is low.

• Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale

This telltale indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing.

If this telltale turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.

CAUTION!

ContinuousdrivingwiththeTransmissionTemperatureWarningLightilluminatedwilleventuallycauseseveretransmissiondamageortransmissionfailure.

WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to oil over, come in contact with hot engine exhaust components and cause a fire.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313

- AirSuspensionPayloadProtectionTelltale—If Equipped

This telltale will turn on to indicate that the maximum payload may have been exceeded or load leveling cannot be achieved at its current ride height.

Protection Mode will automatically be selected in order to "protect" the air suspension system, air suspension adjustment is limited due to payload.

• ServiceStop/StartSystemTelltale—IfEquipped

This telltale will turn on to indicate that the Stop/Start is Unavailable, service Stop/Start system.

314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

- LooseFuelFillerCap

This telltale will turn on to indicate that the fuel filler cap may be loose.

EVIC White Telltales

•ElectronicSpeedControlON

This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON. Refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

•ElectronicSpeedControlSET

This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET. Refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

• HillDescentControl-Ifequipped

This indicator will illuminate when Hill Descent Control (HDC) has been selected using the Hill Descent Control Switch. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control" in "Starting And Operat-

ing" for further information.

EVIC Selectable Menu Items

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until the desired Selectable Menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.

SpeedometerMenuItem

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the speedometer menu item is highlighted in the EVIC. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to cycle the display between MPH and km/h.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315

VehicleInfoMenuItem

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button(s) until the Vehicle Info menu item is highlighted in the EVIC. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to enter the submenus items of Vehicle Info. follow the directional prompts to access or reset any of the following Vehicle Info submenu items:

• Tire Pressure
• Coolant Temp
  • Transmission Temp (Automatic only)
• Oil Temp
• Oil Pressure
• Oil Life
• Battery Voltage

•Gauge Summary
•Engine Hours

FuelEconomyMenuItem

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Fuel Economy menu item is highlighted. Push and Hold the RIGHT arrow button to reset Average Fuel Economy.

• Current Fuel
  • Economy gauge
  • Average Fuel Economy value
• Range to Empty

316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

TripMenuItem

TripA

Push and release the UPor DOWNarrow button until the Trip A menu item is highlighted in the EVIC. The Trip A information will display the following:

• Distance
  • Average MPG
• Elapsed Time

Push and hold RIGHT arrow button to reset all information.

TripB

Push and release Up & Down arrow button until the Trip B menu item is highlighted in the EVIC. The Trip B information will display the following:

- Distance

• Average MPG
- Elapsed Time

Push and hold the RIGHTarrow button to reset all the information.

Stop/StartMenuItem-IfEquipped

Push and release the UPor DOWNarrow button until the Stop/Start menu item is highlighted in the EVIC. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to display the Stop/Start status.

AirSuspensionMenuItem—IfEquipped

Push and release the UPor DOWNarrow button until the Air Suspension menu item is highlighted in the EVIC. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to display the Air Suspension status.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317

Trailer Tow MenuItem

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Trailer Tow menu item is highlighted. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button and the next screen will display the following trailer trip information:

- Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold the RIGHT arrow button to reset the distance.

- Trailer Brake

• Output

- Type

•Gain

EVICMessagesMenuItem

• Front Seat Belts Unbuckled
- Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
- Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled

•Service Air Bag System
- Traction Control Off
- Washer Fluid Low
- Oil Pressure Low
- Oil Change Due
- Fuel Low
•Service Anti-lock Brake System
•Service Electronic Throttle Control
•Service Power Steering
• Cruise Off
• Cruise Ready
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH

318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) "Inflate Tire to XX"
  •Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)
  •Service Tire Pressure System
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Brake Fluid Low
  •Service Electronic Braking System
  •Engine Temperature Hot
• Battery Voltage Low
  •Service Electronic Throttle Control
  •Lights On
  • Right Turn Signal Light Out

• Left Turn Signal Light Out

• Turn Signal On

• Sound Horn with Remote Lock: Off; 1st Push; 2nd Push
• Vehicle Not In Park
  •Key in Ignition
  •Key in Ignition Lights On
• Remote Start Active Key To Run
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button
• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319

• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
  •Service Airbag System
  •Service Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
  • Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
  •Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
• Door Open
• Doors Open
• Gear Not Available
• Shift Not Allowed
• Shift To Neutral Then Drive Or Reverse
  • Autostick Unavailable Service Required

•Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
•Transmission Getting Hot Push Brake
•Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift To Park Wait To Cool
• Transmission Cool Ready To Drive
- Trailer Brake Disconnected
•Service Transmission
•Service Shifter
- Engage Park Brake To Prevent Rolling
• Transmission Too Cold Idle With Engine On
- Washer Fluid Low
•Service Air Suspension System
•Heavy Duty Air Suspension System Disabled
- Selected Ride Height Not Permitted Due To Speed

320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted Due To Payload
• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted - Payload Too Light
• Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height
  •Normal Ride Height Achieved
  • Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved
• Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved
• Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved
• Entry/Exit Ride Height Achieved
• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted
  •Service Air Suspension System Immediately
• Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height
  • Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait

• Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open
- Off Road 2 Watch For Clearance
- Entry/Exit Watch For Clearance
- Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For Jacking And Tire Change
- Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height
- Stop/Start Ready – If Equipped
- Stop/Start Not Ready – If Equipped
- Stop/Start Not Ready Hood Open – If Equipped
- Stop/Start Not Ready Battery Charging – If Equipped
- Stop/Start Not Ready Trailer Tow/Haul Selected – If Equipped
- Stop/Start Not Ready 4WD/Low Range Selected – If Equipped

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321

• Stop/Start Not Ready Fuel Level Low – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Steep Incline – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Extreme Outside Temperature – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Engine Temperature Too High – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Engine Temperature Too Low – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Driver Door Open – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Cabin Cooling Or Heating – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Not Ready Max Cooling Or Heating – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Max Cooling Or Heating Selected – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Front Defrost Selected – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Steering Wheel Turned – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Autostop Active – If Equipped
• Stop/Start To Restart Push Clutch Or Shift To Neutral
• If Equipped
• Stop/Start Req'd Fault Detected – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Cannot Autostart Hood Open – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Unavailable Service Battery – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Unavailable Service Stop/Start System – If Equipped

322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Stop/Start To Restart Shift Out Of Park – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Off – If Equipped
• Autostop Duration – If Equipped

The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white telltales area on the right, yellow telltales in the middle, and red telltales on the left.

ScreenSetupMenuItem

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Screen Setup menu item is highlighted in the EVIC. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to enter the Screen Setup submenu. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed.

VehicleSettingsMenuItem

Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK.

Push and release the UP and DOWN button until Settings displays in the EVIC.

Follow the prompts to display and set any of the following Vehicle Settings.

NOTE: Your vehicle may or may not be equipped with all the following settings.

• If equipped with a base radio (Non-Touchscreen) Vehicle Settings will be included in the EVIC.
• If equipped with a Touchscreen radio, the Vehicle Settings will be included in the radio head unit.

	SettingNames	SettingNamesAbbreviated(LeftSub-menuLayer)	Sub-Menus(RightSubmenuLayer)
1 Language Select Language English, Spanish, French, Italian, German, Dutch
2 Units Units U.S.; Metric
3 ParkSense ParkSense			•Notification — Sound Only; Sound & Display•Front Volume — Low; Medium; High•Rear Volume — Low; Medium; High
4 Tilt Mirror in Reverse	Tilt Mirror in R On; Off
5 Rain Sensing Wipers Auto Wipers			On; Off
6	Hill Start Assist	Hill Start Assist	On; Off
7	Headlights Off Delay	Lights Off Delay	0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
8	Illuminated Approach	Lights w/ Unlock	0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
9	Headlights On with Wipers	Lights w/ Wipers	On; Off
10	Automatic High-beams	Auto Highbeams On;	Off
11	Daytime RunningLights — IfEquipped	Daytime Lights On;	Off
12	Flash Lights withLock	Lights w/ Lock On;	Off
13	Auto Lock Doors Auto Lock	Doors On; Off
14	Auto Unlock Doors Auto Unlock Doors On; Off
15	Sound Horn withRemote Start	Horn w/ Rmt Start On; Off
16	Sound Horn withRemote Lock	Horn w/ Rmt Lock Off; 1st Press; 2nd Press
17	Remote Unlock Sequence	Remote Unlock Driver Door; All Doors
18	Key Fob Linked to Memory	Key in Memory On; Off
19	Passive Entry Passive Entry	On; Off
20	Remote Start Comfort System	Rmt Start Comfort Off; Remoter Start; All starts
21	Easy Exit Seat Easy Exit Seat	On; Off
22	Key-off Power Delay Power	Off Delay Off; 45 seconds; 5 minutes; 10 minutes
23	Air Suspension Display Alerts	Air Susp. Alerts	All;Warnings Only
24	Aero Ride Height Mode	Aero Mode	On; Off
27	Tire/Jack Mode	Tire/Jack Mode	On; Off
28 Transport Mode Transport Mode On; Off
29 Wheel Alignment Mode	Wheel Alignment On; Off
30 Horn w/ Remote Lower	Horn w/ Rmt Lwr On; Off
31 Lights w/ Remote Lower	Lights w/ Rmt Lwr On; Off
32 Trailer Select Trailer Select Trailer 1; Trailer 2; Trailer 3; Trailer 4
33	Brake Type	Brake Type	Light Electric; Heavy Electric; Light EOH; Heavy EOH

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327

	SettingNames	SettingNamesAbbreviated(LeftSub-menuLayer)	Sub-Menus(RightSubmenuLayer)
34	Trailer Name Trailer Name		• Trailer # (# is equal to slot position) • Boat • Car • Cargo • Dump • Equipment • Flatbed • Gooseneck • Horse • Livestock • Motorcycle • Snowmobile • Travel • Utility • 5th Wheel
35	Compass Variance Compass	Var 1-15 increments of 1
36	Calibrate Compass Compass	Cal Cancel; Calibrate
37	Fuel Saver Display Fuel Saver	On; Off

TurnMenuOFF

Push and release the RIGHTarrow button to exit the main menu.

Push and release any EVIC control button to enter the EVIC main menu again.

DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)

The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329

0409076652

DriverInformationDisplay(DID)

The DID Menu items consists of the following:

• Digital Speedometer

• Vehicle Info

• Fuel Economy Info

• Trip A
• Trip B
• Stop/Start Info (If Equipped)
• Trailer Tow
  • Audio
• Stored Messages
• Screen Setup
• Vehicle Settings (Not Equipped with a Uconnect 5.0 & 8.4 radio)

330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The system allows the driver to select information by pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:

040971549

DIDControls

-UPArrowButton

Push and release the UParrow button to scroll upward through the main menu and submenus.

- DOWNArrowButton

Push and release the DOWNarrow button to scroll downward through the main menu and submenus.

•RIGHTArrowButton

Push and release the RIGHTarrow button to access/select the information screens or sub-menu screens of a main menu item. Push and hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds displayed/selected features that can be reset.

- LEFTArrowButton

Push and release the LEFTarrow button to return to the main menu from an info screen or submenu item.

Driver Information Display (DID) Displays

The DID displays are located in the center portion of the cluster and consists of eight sections:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331

1. Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for non critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and white for on demand information.
2. Audio / Phone Information and Sub-menu Information — Whenever there are sub-menus available, the position within the sub-menus is shown here.
3. Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average MPG, Trailer Trip (distance only), Trailer Brake Gain, Time)
4. Telltales/Indicators
5. Shift Lever Status (PRNDL)
6. Selectable Menu Icons
7. Air Suspension Status – If Equipped
8. 4WD Status

332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Selectable Gauge 2 (Trans Temp, Oil Temp, Oil Life, Trailer Brake, Current MPG)
2. Selectable Gauge 1 (Trans Temp, Oil Temp, Oil Life, Trailer Brake, Current MPG)

The main display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu. The main display area also displays "pop up" messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall into several categories:

- FiveSecondStoredMessages

When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the condition that activated it remains active) and can be reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. As long as there is a stored message, an “i” will be displayed in the DID's compass/outside temp line. Examples of this message type are "Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out" and "Low Tire Pressure."

- UnstoredMessages

This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples of this message type are "Turn Signal On" (if a turn signal is left on) and "Lights On" (if driver leaves the vehicle).

• UnstoredMessagesUntilRUN

These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are "Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar" and "Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start."

- FiveSecondUnstoredMessages

When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five

seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An example of this message type is “Automatic High Beams On.”

Oil Life Reset

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will flash in the DID display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.

NOTE: Use the steering wheel DID controls for the following procedure(s).

VehiclesEquippedWithPassiveEntry

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the DOWNarrow button to scroll downward through the main menu to "Vehicle Info."
3. Push and release the RIGHTarrow button to access the "OilLife" screen.
4. Push and hold the RIGHTarrow button for one second to access the "OilLifeReset" screen.
5. Push and release the DOWNarrow button to select "Yes," then push and release the RIGHTarrow button to select reset of the Oil Life.
6. Push and release the Uparrow button to exit the DID screen.

334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

VehiclesNotEquippedWithPassiveEntry

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the DOWNarrow button to scroll downward through the main menu to "Vehicle Info."
3. Push and release the RIGHTarrow button to access the "OilLife" screen.
4. Push and hold the RIGHTarrow button for one second to access the "OilLifeReset" screen.
5. Push and release the DOWNarrow button to select "Yes," then push and release the RIGHTarrow button to select reset of the Oil Life.
6. Push and release the Uparrow button to exit the DID screen.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

DID Messages

•Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
- Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
•Service Airbag System
• Traction Control Off
- Washer Fluid Low
- Oil Pressure Low
- Oil Change Due
- Fuel Low
•Service Antilock Brake System

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335

•Service Electronic Throttle Control
•Service Power Steering
• Cruise Off
• Cruise Ready
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
- Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) "Inflate Tire to XX"
• Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)
•Service Tire Pressure System
- Parking Brake Engaged
- Brake Fluid Low
•Service Electronic Braking System
•Engine Temperature Hot

• Battery Voltage Low
  •Service Electronic Throttle Control
  •Lights On
  • Right Turn Signal Light Out
  • Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Turn Signal On
• Sound Horn with Remote Lock: Off; 1st Push; 2nd Push
• Vehicle Not in Park
  • Key in Ignition
  •Key in Ignition Lights On
• Remote Start Active Key to Run
• Remote Start Active Push Start Button

336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
  •Service Airbag System
  •Service Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
  • Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
  • Front Seatbelts Unbuckled

• Door Open

• Doors Open

• Gear Not Available
• Shift Not Allowed
• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
  • Autostick Unavailable Service Required
  •Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
  • Transmission Getting Hot Push Brake
  •Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
  • Transmission Cool Ready to Drive
• Trailer Brake Disconnected
  •Service Transmission
  •Service Shifter
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337

• Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On
- Washer Fluid Low
•Service Air Suspension System
•Heavy Duty Air Suspension System Disabled
- Selected Ride Height Not Permitted Due To Speed
- Selected Ride Height Not Permitted Due To Payload
- Selected Ride Height Not Permitted - Payload Too Light
- Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height
•Normal Ride Height Achieved
• Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved
- Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved
- Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved

• Entry/Exit Ride Height Achieved
• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted
  •Service Air Suspension System Immediately
• Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height
  • Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait
  • Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open
• Off Road 2 Watch For Clearance
• Entry/Exit Watch For Clearance
  • Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For Jacking And Tire Change
• Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height
• Stop/Start Ready – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready – If Equipped

338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Stop/Start Not Ready Hood Open – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Battery Charging – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Trailer Tow/Haul Selected – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready 4WD/Low Range Selected – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Fuel Level Low – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Steep Incline – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Extreme Outside Temperature – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Engine Temperature Too High – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Engine Temperature Too Low – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Driver Door Open – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Cabin Cooling Or Heating – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Not Ready Max Cooling Or Heating – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Max Cooling Or Heating Selected – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Front Defrost Selected – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Not Ready Steering Wheel Turned – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Autostop Active – If Equipped

• Stop/Start To Restart Push Clutch Or Shift To Neutral – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Req'd Fault Detected – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Cannot Autostart Hood Open – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Unavailable Service Battery – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Unavailable Service Stop/Start System – If Equipped
• Stop/Start To Restart Shift Out Of Park – If Equipped
• Stop/Start Off – If Equipped
• Autostop Duration – If Equipped

The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white telltales area on the right, yellow telltales in the middle, and red telltales on the left.

DID Red Telltales

This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These telltales include:

- DoorAjar

This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors may be ajar.

• OilPressureWarningLight

This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not show how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

- OilTemperatureWarningLight

This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.

- ChargingSystemLight

This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. OBTAIN SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.

Refer to "Jump Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies" if jump starting is required.

• ElectronicThrottleControl(ETC)Light

This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.

If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required. You may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341

• EngineTemperatureWarningLight

This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to "If Your Engine Overheats" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.

NOTE: When the transmission is shifted to Neutral, activate the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.

• ElectricPowerSteeringMalfunctionWarningLight

This telltale is on when the Electric Power Steering is not operating and needs service.

- TrailerBrakeDisconnectedWarningLight

This telltale is on when the Trailer Brake has been disconnected.

DID Yellow Telltales

This area will show reconfigurable yellow caution tell-tales. These telltales include:

- LowFuelTelltale

When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L), this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.

342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

•WindshieldWasherFluidLowIndicator

This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind-shield washer fluid is low.

- LowCoolantLevelIndicator

This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle coolant level is low.

• Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale

This telltale indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this telltale turns on, safely pull over and

stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEU-TRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.

CAUTION!

ContinuousdrivingwiththeTransmissionTemperatureWarningLightilluminatedwilleventuallycauseseveretransmissiondamageortransmissionfailure.

WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to oil over, come in contact with hot engine exhaust components and cause a fire.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343

• AirSuspensionPayloadProtectionTelltale—If Equipped

This telltale will turn on to indicate that the maximum payload may have been exceeded or load leveling cannot be achieved at its current ride height.

Protection Mode will automatically be selected in order to "protect" the air suspension system, air suspension adjustment is limited due to payload.

• ServiceStop/StartSystemTelltale—IfEquipped

This telltale will turn on to indicate that the Stop/Start is Unavailable, service Stop/Start system.

- LooseFuelFillerCap

This telltale will turn on to indicate that the fuel filler cap may be loose.

DID White Telltales

•ElectronicSpeedControlReady

This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON. Refer to "Electronic Speed Control" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.

•ElectronicSpeedControlSET

This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET. Refer to "Electronic Speed Control" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.

344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• HillDescentControl-Ifequipped

This indicator will illuminate when Hill Descent Control (HDC) has been selected using the Hill Descent Control Switch. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

DID Selectable Menu Items

Push and release the UPor DOWNarrow buttons until the desired Selectable Menu icon/title is highlighted in the DID.

DigitalSpeedometer

Push and release the UPor DOWNarrow button until the Digital display icon is highlighted in the DID. Push and release the RIGHTarrow button to change the display between mph and km/h.

VehicleInfo

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to enter the submenus items of Vehicle

Info. follow the directional prompts to access or reset any of the following Vehicle Info submenu items:

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (1500 & 2500 Series) A vehicle ICON is displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON.

- Tire Pressure:

– Tire Pressure Information System (3500 Series Heavy Duty Ram Trucks)
- A vehicle ICON is displayed with the tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345

• If the Tire Pressure system requires service, "Service Tire Pressure System" is displayed.
  – Tire Pressure is an information only function and cannot be reset.
  – Refer to the "Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)" under "Starting and Operating" for further information.

• Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission Only

• Oil Temperature
• Oil Life
• Battery Voltage — If Equipped

•Gauge Summary:

– Coolant Temperature
- Transmission Temperature (automatic only)
- Oil Temperature
- Oil Pressure

- Engine Hours

FuelEconomy

Push and release the UPor DOWNarrow button until the Fuel Economy Menu icon/title is highlighted. Push and hold the OK button to reset feature.

• Range
  • Current MPG or L/100 km
  • Average MPG or L/100 km

346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

TripA

Push and release the UPor DOWNarrow button until the Trip A icon/title is highlighted in the DID. The Trip A information will display the following:

• Distance MI or km
  • Average MPG or L/100 km
  • Average MPH or km/h
• Elapsed Time

Hold the RIGHTarrow button to reset all the information.

Push the DOWNarrow button to enter Trip B.

TripB

The Trip B information will display the following:

• Distance MI or km
  • Average MPG or L/100 km
  • Average MPH or km/h
• Elapsed Time

Hold the RIGHTarrow button to reset all the information.

Stop/Start-IfEquipped

Push and release the UPor DOWNarrow button until the Stop/Start icon is highlighted in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to display the Stop/Start status.

TrailerTow

Push and release the UPor DOWNarrow button until the Trailer Tow icon is highlighted. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button and the next screen will display the following

trailer trip information:

• Trailer Trip
• Trailer Brake

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Audio

Push and release the UPor DOWNarrow button until the Audio display icon is highlighted in the DID. Push and release the RIGHTarrow button to display the active

source.

StoredMessages

Push and release the UP arrow button until the Messages display icon is highlighted in the DID. This feature shows the number of stored warning messages. Pushing the RIGHTarrow

button will allow you to see what the stored messages are.

348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

ScreenSetup

Push and release the UPor DOWNarrow button until the Screen Setup display icon is highlighted in the DID. Push and release the

RIGHT arrow button to enter the Screen Setup submenu. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed.

	SettingsOptions
1 Upper Left		NoneCompassOutside Temp.TimeRangeAverage MPGCurrent MPG

	SettingsOptions
		Trip ATrip BTrailer TripTrailer Brake Gain
2 Upper Right		NoneCompassOutside Temp.TimeRangeAverage MPGCurrent MPGTrip ATrip BTrailer TripTrailer Brake Gain

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349

	SettingsOptions
3 Lower Left		NoneCompassOutside Temp.TimeRangeAverage MPGCurrent MPGTrip ATrip BTrailer TripTrailer Brake Gain

	SettingsOptions
4 Lower Right		NoneCompassOutside Temp.TimeRangeAverage MPGCurrent MPGTrip ATrip BTrailer TripTrailer Brake Gain
5 Upper Gauge		NoneTrans Temp.Oil Temp.Oil LifeCurrent MPGTrailer Brake Gain

350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

	SettingsOptions
6 Lower Gauge		NoneTrans Temp.Oil Temp.Oil LifeCurrent MPGTrailer Brake Gain
7 Odometer		000000.0
8 Restore Defaults		CancelOK

VehiclesSettings(Customer-Programmable Features)

NOTE: This feature is only available on 5.0 and 8.4 Uconnect® Radios

Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK.

Push and release the UPand DOWNbutton until Personal Settings displays in the DID.

Follow the prompts to display and set any of the following Personal Settings.

NOTE: Your vehicle may or may not be equipped with all the following settings.

	SettingNames	SettingNamesAbbreviated (LeftSubmenuLayer)	Sub-Menus(RightSubmenu Layer)
1 Language Select Language English, Spanish, French, Italian,			German, Dutch
2 Units Units U.S.; Metric
3 ParkSense ParkSense			•Notification — Sound Only;Sound & Display•Front Volume — Low; Medium; High•Rear Volume — Low; Medium; High
4	Tilt Mirror in Reverse	Tilt Mirror in R	On; Off
5	Rain Sensing Wipers	Auto Wipers	On; Off
6	Hill Start Assist	Hill Start Assist	On; Off
7	Headlights Off Delay	Lights Off Delay	0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
8 Illuminated Approach Lights w/ Unlock	0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds		90 seconds
9 Headlights On with Wipers Lights w/ Wipers On; Off
10 Automatic Highbeams Auto Highbeams On; Off
11 Flash Lights with Lock Lights w/ Lock On; Off
12 Auto Lock Doors Auto Lock Doors			On; Off
13	Auto Unlock Doors	Auto Unlock Doors	On; Off
14	Sound Horn with Remote Start	Horn w/ Rmt Start	On; Off
15	Sound Horn with Remote Lock	Horn w/ Rmt Lock	On; Off
16	Remote Unlock Sequence	Remote Unlock	Driver Door; All Doors
17	Key Fob Linked to Memory	Key in Memory	On; Off
18	Passive Entry	Passive Entry	On; Off
19	Remote Start Comfort System	Rmt Start Comfort	On; Off
20	Easy Exit Seat	Easy Exit Seat	On; Off
21 Key-off Power Delay Power Off Delay		Off; 45 seconds; 5 minutes; 10	minutes
22 Commercial Settings Commercial			•Aux Switches•Power Take-Off•PIN Setup
23 Air Suspension Display Alerts Air Susp. Alerts All;Warnings Only
24 Aero Ride Height Mode Aero Mode On; Off
25 Tire/Jack Mode	Tire/Jack Mode		On; Off
26	Transport Mode	Transport Mode	On; Off
27	Wheel Alignment Mode	Wheel Alignment	On; Off
28	Horn w/ Remote Lower	Horn w/ Rmt Lwr	On; Off

354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

	SettingNames	SettingNamesAbbreviated (LeftSubmenuLayer)	Sub-Menus(RightSubmenu Layer)
29 Lights w/ Remote Lower Lights w/ Rmt Lwr On; Off
30 Trailer Select Trailer Select Trailer 1; Trailer 2; Trailer 3;			Trailer 4
31 Brake Type Brake Type Light Electric; Heavy Electric;			Light EOH; Heavy EOH

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355

	SettingNames	SettingNamesAbbreviated (LeftSubmenuLayer)	Sub-Menus(RightSubmenu Layer)
32 Trailer Name Trailer Name			Trailer # (# is equal to slot position)BoatCarCargoDumpEquipmentFlatbedGooseneckHorseTagMotorcycleSnowmobileTravelUtility5th Wheel
33	Compass Variance Compass Var 1-15 increments of 1
34	Calibrate Compass Compass Cal Cancel; Calibrate
35	Fuel Saver Display Fuel Saver On; Off
36	Park Assist Front Chime Volume	Park Assist Front Chime Volume	On; Off
37	Park Assist Rear Chime Volume Park Assist Rear Chime Volume On; Off

Uconnect® SETTINGS

The Uconnect® system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features. Many features can vary by vehicle.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357

Uconnect®5.0ButtonsOnTheTouchscreenAndButtons OnTheFaceplate

1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate

Uconnect®8.4A/8.4ANButtonsOnTheTouchscreenAndButtonsOnTheFaceplate

1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate

358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Buttons On The Faceplate

Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect® system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).

Your Uconnect® system may also have Screen Off and Back buttons located below the Uconnect® system.

Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect® touchscreen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to turn the touchscreen on.

Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect® system.

Buttons On The Touchscreen

Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect® display.

Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect® 5.0 Personal Settings

Push the Settings button on the faceplate to display the settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if equipped), Engine Off Options, Suspension, Trailer Brake, Audio, Compass Settings, Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped), Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data and System Information.

NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.

When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting until the button is highlighted. Once the setting is complete, either press the back arrow or Done button on the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the touchscreen on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the list of available settings.

NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in the "Run" position.

Display

After pressing the "Display" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.

- DisplayMode

When in this display you may select the Auto or Manual display settings. To change Mode status, press and release the "Auto" or "Manual" button on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- SetLanguage

When in this display, you may select one of multiple languages (English/Français/Espanol) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the "Language" button on the touchscreen and select from "English," "Français," or "Español." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- Units

When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC/DID, odometer, and navigation system (if equipped)

360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

changed between US and Metric units of measure. Press "US" or "Metric" to make your selection. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- TouchscreenBeep

When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. To change the Mode status, press and release the "On" or "Off" button on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow/ Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu

•FuelSaverDisplay—IfEquipped

This feature will allow you to enable fuel saver mode and will be displayed in the EVIC/DID. Press the "Fuel Saver Display" button on the touchscreen select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

Voice

After pressing the "Voice" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

- VoiceResponseLength

When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length, press the "Voice Response Length" button on the touchscreen and select from "Brief" or "Detailed." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• ShowCommandList

When in this display, you may change the Show Command List settings. To change the Show Command List settings, press the "Show Command List" button on the touchscreen and select from "Always," "With Help" or "Never." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

Clock&Date

After pressing the "Clock & Date" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

- Set Time

When in this display, you may set the time and format manually. Press the "Set Time" button then choose from a "12 hour" or "24 hour format." Press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then select "AM" or "PM." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- Set Date

When in this display, you may set the date manually. Press the "Set Date" button then press the corresponding arrows above and below the current date to adjust. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

Safety/Assistance

After pressing the "Safety/Assistance" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

- ParkSense®

The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever/gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the ParkSense® status, press and release the "Sound Only" or "Sounds and Display" button. Then press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen. Refer to "ParkSense®" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for system function and operating information.

362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

- TiltMirrorsInReverse—IfEquipped

When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever/gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. To make your selection, press the "Tilt Mirrors In Reverse" button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow/ Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- ParkView®BackupCameraActiveGuidelines

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to "check entire surroundings" across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. To make your selection, press the "ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines" button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

•ParkView®BackupCameraDelay

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of "REVERSE" unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the ParkView® Backup Camera Delay push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate, then the "Safety & Driving

Assistance" button on the touchscreen. Press the "Parkview Backup camera Delay" button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView® Delay ON or OFF.

• RainSensingAutoWipers

When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your selection, press the "Rain Sensing" button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• HillStartAssist—IfEquipped

When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

Lights

After pressing the "Lights" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

- HeadlightOffDelay

When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off. To change the Headlight Off Delay setting, press the "Headlight Off Delay" button on the touchscreen and choose either "0," "30," "60," or "90" buttons on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

•HeadlightIlluminationOnApproach

When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,

364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

press the "Illuminated Approach" button on the touchscreen and choose either "0," "30," "60," or "90" buttons on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• HeadlightsWithWipers—IfEquipped

When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off, if they were turned on by this feature. To make your selection, press the "Lights w/Wipers" button and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow/ Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• AutoDimHighBeams—IfEquipped

When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the "Auto High Beams" button on the touchscreen, and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. Refer to "Automatic High Beam — If Equipped" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.

•DaytimeRunningLights—IfEquipped

When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is running. To make your selection, press the "Daytime Running Lights" button on the touchscreen, and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365

- FlashLightsWithLock

When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press the "Flash Lights w/Lock" button on the touchscreen, and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

Doors&Locks

After pressing the "Doors & Locks" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

•AutoDoorLocks

When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, press the "Auto Door Locks" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

•AutoUnlockOnExit

When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened. To make your selection, press the "Auto Unlock On Exit" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- SoundHornWithLock

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the door locks are activated. To make your selection, press the "Horn w/Lock" Button and choose "Off," "1st Press" or "2nd Press." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• SoundHornWithRemoteStart

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the remote start is activated. To make your selection, press the "Horn w/Remote Start" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- RemoteDoorUnlock

This feature will allow you to program your remote door locks to open "All doors" or only the "Driver door" with the first push of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or grabbing the Passive Entry door handle. To make your selection, press the "Remote Door Unlock" button on the touchscreen and choose from "All" or "Driver." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

NOTE: If "Driver Door" is selected, the (RKE) transmitter will have to be pushed two times in order to unlock all doors.

- MemoryLinkedtoFob—IfEquipped

This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the "Memory Linked to Fob" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat location if "Memory Linked to Fob" is set to (ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to unlock the door. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.

- PassiveEntry

This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle's door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. It automatically unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is grabbed. To make your selection, press the "Passive Entry" button on the touchscreen and select from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go™" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.

- FlashLightsWithLock

When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press the "Flash Lights w/Lock" button on the touchscreen, and select from

"On" or "Off." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

AutoComfortSystems—IfEquipped

After pressing the "Auto-On Comfort" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

- Auto-OnDriverHeated/VentilatedSeat&Steering WheelWithVehicleStart—IfEquipped

When this feature is selected the driver's heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when temperatures are below 40^ F ( 4.4^ C). When temperatures are above 80^ F ( 26.7^ C) the driver vented seat will turn ON. To make your selection, press the "Auto Heated Seats" button on the touchscreen, then select either "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

EngineOffOptions

After pressing the "Engine Off Options" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.

- EasyExitSeats—IfEquipped

When this feature is selected, the Driver's seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off. To make your selection, press the "Easy Exit Seats" button on the touchscreen and make your selection. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- HeadlightOffDelay

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. Press the "Headlight Off Delay" button on the touchscreen and choose from "0," "30," "60," or "90" seconds to select your desired time interval. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- EngineOffPowerDelay

When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. Press the "Engine Off Power Delay" button on the touchscreen and choose from "0 sec," "45 sec," "5 min" or "10 min" to select your desired time interval. Then press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• AutoEntry/Exit—IfEquipped

When this feature is selected, it automatically lowers the vehicle ride height position when shifted into park. Press the "Auto Entry/Exit" button on the touchscreen and

choose from "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

Suspension—IfEquipped

After pressing the "Suspension" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

- SoundHornWithLower

When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE LOWER button is pressed. To make your selection, press the "Horn w/lower" button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off" followed by pressing the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen.

- FlashLightsWithLower

When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the RKE transmitter REMOTE LOWER button is pressed twice. To make your selection, press the "Light w/Lower" button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off" followed by pressing the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen.

• AutoEntry/ExitSuspension

When this feature is selected, the vehicle automatically lowers from ride height position when vehicle shifted to park for easy entry/exit. To make your selection, press the "Auto Entry/Exit" button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off" followed by pressing the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen.

• DisplaySuspensionMessages

When "All" is selected, all the Air Suspension Alerts will be displayed. When "Warning Only" is selected only the Air Suspension Warnings will be displayed.

•AutomaticAeroMode(1500ModelOnly)

When this feature is selected the Ride Height will automatically be adjusted depending on the vehicle speed. To

370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

make your selection, press the "Aero Mode" button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off" followed by pressing the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen.

•TireJackMode

When this feature is selected the air suspension system is disabled to prevent auto leveling of the suspension, while the vehicle is on a jack changing a tire. To make your selection, press the "Tire Jack Mode" button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off" followed by pressing the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen.

- TransportMode

When this feature is selected the air suspension system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing. To make your selection, press the "Transport Mode" button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off" followed by pressing the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen.

- WheelAlignmentMode

This feature prevents auto leveling of the air suspension while performing a wheel alignment service. Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled. Refer to your authorized dealer for further information.

TrailerBrake

After pressing the "Trailer Brake" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

- TrailerSelect

When this feature is selected, the Trailer Type can be selected between "Trailer 1," "Trailer 2," "Trailer 3" and "Trailer 4."

- TrailerBrakeType

When this feature is selected, the Trailer Brake Type can be changed between "Light Electric," "Heavy Electric,"

"Light EOH" and "Heavy EOH." Refer to "Integrated Trailer Brake Module" in "Starting And Operating."

Audio

After pressing the "Audio" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

•Balance/Fade

This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the arrows to adjust, tap the "C" icon to readjust to the center. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• Equalizer

When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the "+" and "-" buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the "+" and "-" buttons on the

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- SpeedAdjustedVolume

This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the "Speed Adjusted Volume" button on the touchscreen and select from "Off," "1," "2" or "3" buttons on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- SurroundSound—IfEquipped

This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To make your selection, press the "Surround Sound" button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• AUXVolumeOffset—IfEquipped

This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. To make your selection, press the "AUX Volume Offset" button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- Loudness—IfEquipped

This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes. To make your selection, press the "Loudness" button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

CompassSettings—IfEquipped

After pressing the "Compass Settings" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

•Variance

Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.

NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel, such as iPod's, Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.

• PerformCompassCalibration

Press the "Calibration" button on the touchscreen to change this setting. This compass is self-calibrating,

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373

which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic until it is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by pressing the "ON" button on the touchscreen and completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects). The compass will now function normally.

Phone/Bluetooth®

After pressing the "Phone/Bluetooth" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

- PairedDevices

This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.

374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped

After pressing the "SiriusXM Setup" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

- ChannelSkip

SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the "Channel Skip" button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen.

- SubscriptionInformation

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.

Press the "Subscription Info" button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.

Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.

NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.

Restore Settings

After pressing the "Restore Settings" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

- RestoreSettings

When this feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default setting, press the "Restore Settings" button and select from "Yes" or "No." If "Yes" is selected a pop-up will appear asking "Are you

sure you want to reset your settings to default?" select "Yes" to restore, or "Cancel" to exit. Press back arrow/ Done button to return to the previous menu.

ClearPersonalData

After pressing the "Clear Personal Data Settings" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

- ClearPersonalData

When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove all personal information, press the "Clear Personal Data" button and select from "Yes" or "No." If "Yes" is selected a pop-up will appear asking "Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?" select "Yes" to Clear, or "Cancel" to exit. Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

SystemInformation

After pressing the "System Information" button on the touchscreen the following information will be available:

- SystemInformation

When System Information is selected, a System Information screen will appear displaying the system software version.

Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Personal Settings

Press the "Settings" button on the touchscreen (if equipped) or press the "Apps" button on the touchscreen then press the "Settings" button on the touchscreen to display the settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect® system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors &

376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if equipped), Engine Off Options, Suspension, Trailer Brake, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped), Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data and System Information.

NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.

When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the back arrow button on the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu or press the "X" button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the touchscreen on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the list of available settings.

NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in the "Run" position.

Display

After pressing the "Display" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.

- DisplayMode

When in this display you may select one of the auto display settings. To change Mode status, select from "Day," "Night" or "Auto" until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen.

NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control even though the headlights are on.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377

• DisplayBrightnessWithHeadlightsON

When in this display, you may select the brightness with the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the "+" and "-" setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the "+" and "-" buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen.

NOTE: To make changes to the "Display Brightness with Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" positions.

- DisplayBrightnessWithHeadlightsOFF

When in this display, you may select the brightness with the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the "+" and "-" setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the "+" and "-" buttons on the touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen.

NOTE: To make changes to the "Display Brightness with Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" positions.

- SetTheme

This feature will allow you to choose a background theme for the display screen. The theme will change the background color, highlight color, and button color of the display screen. Press the "Set Theme" button on the touchscreen and select one of the pre-configured themes available.

- SetLanguage

When in this display, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display

378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- Units

When in this display, you may select to have the Driver Information Display (DID), odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed between US and Metric units of measure. Press "US" or "Metric" until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- TouchscreenBeep

When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the sound heard when a touchscreen button (button on the touchscreen) is pressed. Press the "Touchscreen Beep" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- NavigationTurn-By-TurnInCluster—IfEquipped

When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your selection, press the "Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- ControlsScreenTime-Out—IfEquipped

When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open

until it is manually closed. Press the "Controls Screen Time-Out" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

•FuelSaverDisplay—IfEquipped

This feature will allow you to enable fuel saver mode and will be displayed in the DID. Press the "Fuel Saver Display" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

Voice

After pressing the "Voice" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

- VoiceResponseLength

When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length, select from the "Brief" or "Detailed" buttons on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• ShowCommandList

When in this display, you may change the Show Command List settings. To change the Show Command List settings, select from the "Always," "With Help" or "Never" buttons on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Clock

After pressing the "Clock" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

- SyncTimeWithGPS—IfEquipped

This feature will allow you to automatically have the radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press the "Sync with GPS Time" button on the touchscreen to turn the feature on or off. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- SetTimeHours

This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The "Sync with GPS Time" button on the touchscreen must not be selected. To make your selection, press the "+" or "-" buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or press the" X" button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.

- SetTimeMinutes

This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The "Sync with GPS Time" button on the touchscreen must be unchecked. To make your selection, press the "+" or "-" buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or press the "X" button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.

- TimeFormat

This feature will allow you to select the time format display setting. Press the "Time Format" button on the touchscreen and select from "12hrs" or "24hrs." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• ShowTimeInStatusBar—IfEquipped

This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time

Status setting press the "Show Time in Status Bar" button on the touchscreen to turn the feature on or off. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

Safety&DrivingAssistance

After pressing the "Safety & Driving Assistance" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.

- ParkSense®

The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE-VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only or Sound and Display. To change the Park Assist status, select the "Sound Only" or the "Sound and Display" button on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen. Refer to "ParkSense® Rear Park

Assist" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for system function and operating information.

•FrontParkSense®ChimeVolume

The Front ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be selected from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect® System — if equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To change the mode status, press the “Front ParkSense® Volume” button and select the “Low” “Med” or “High” buttons on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.

•RearParkSense®ChimeVolume

The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be selected from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect® System — if equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting

382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

is MEDIUM. To change the mode status, press the "Rear ParkSense® Volume" button and select the "Low" "Med" or "High" buttons on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.

- TiltSideMirrorsInReverse

When this feature is selected, the outside sideview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the RE-VERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. To make your selection, press the "Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse" button on the touchscreen to select from on or off. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• ParkView®BackupCamera

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to "check entire surroundings" across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your selection, press the "ParkView® Backup Camera" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, indicating that the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383

- ParkView®BackupCameraActiveGuidelines

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see Active (Dynamic) Guidelines which deflect with steering wheel angle over the ParkView Back up Camera display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to "check entire surroundings" across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. To make your selection, press the "ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines" and select from on or off. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

•ParkView®BackupCameraDelay

When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph. To make your selection, press the "ParkView® Backup Camera Delay" button on the touchscreen to select from on or off. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• RainSensingAutoWipers

When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your selection, press the "Rain Sensing" button on the touchscreen to select from on or off. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• HillStartAssist—IfEquipped

When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is active. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control System" in "Starting And Operating" for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press the "Hill Start Assist" button on the touchscreen to select from on or off. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

- TwoOrFourCornerAirSuspensionModes—If Equipped

There are four air suspension modes designed to protect the system in unique situations. Tire Jack Mode is selected to assist in changing a spare tire. Transport Mode is selected to assist when the vehicle is being flat bed towed. Wheel Alignment Mode is selected before performing a wheel alignment, refer to your authorized dealer for information. Protection Mode will automatically be selected to “protect” the air suspension system when the payload has been exceeded or load leveling cannot be achieved.

Lights

After pressing the "Lights" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.

- HeadlightOffDelay

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the "+" or "-" buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the seconds up or down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

•HeadlightIlluminationOnApproach

When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection, press the "+" or "-" buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the seconds up or down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385

• HeadlightsWithWipers—IfEquipped

When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your selection, press the "Headlights With Wipers" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• AutoDimHighBeams—IfEquipped

When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the "Auto Dim High Beams" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears

next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. Refer to "Lights/ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.

- FlashLightsWithLock

When this feature is selected, the exterior lamps will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press the "Flash Lights with Lock" button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Doors&Locks

After pressing the "Doors & Locks" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

•AutoDoorLocks

When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, press the "Auto Door Lock" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

•AutoUnlockOnExit

When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened. To make your selection, press the "Auto Unlock On Exit" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- FlashLightsWithLock

When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press the "Flash Lights With Lock" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• SoundHornWithLock

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the door locks are activated. To make your selection,

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387

press the "Sound Horn With Lock" button on the touchscreen and select from "Off", "1st Press" or "2nd Press". Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• SoundHornWithRemoteStart

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the remote start is activated. To make your selection, press the "Sound Horn With Remote Start" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- 1stPressOfKeyFobUnlocks

When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks "Driver Door" is selected, only the driver's door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button you must push the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger's doors. When Unlock "All Doors" On 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first push of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.

NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks "All Doors", all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks "Driver Door" is programmed, only the driver's door will unlock when the driver's door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks "Driver Door" is programmed pushing the handle more than once will only result in the driver's door opening. If driver door is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use RKE transmitter).

- PassiveEntry

This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry

388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

(RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press the "Passive Entry" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go™" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle".

- PersonalSettingsLinkedToKeyFob—IfEquipped

This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the "Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat location (if Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob is set to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to unlock the door. Refer to "Driver Memory Seat" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle" for further information.

AutoComfortSystems—IfEquipped

After pressing the "Auto-On Comfort" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

- Auto-OnDriverHeated/VentilatedSeat&Steering WheelWithVehicleStart—IfEquipped

When this feature is selected the driver's heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when temperatures are below 40^ F ( 4.4^ C). When temperatures are above 80^ F ( 26.7^ C) the driver vented seat will turn ON. To make your selection, press the "Auto Heated Seats" button on the touchscreen, then select either "Off," "Remote Start" or "All Starts". Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

EngineOffOptions

After pressing the "Engine Off Options" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.

- EasyExitSeat

When this feature is selected, the Driver's seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off. To make your selection, press the "Easy Exit Seat" button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- EngineOffPowerDelay

When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped),

DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. To change the Engine Off Power Delay status press the "+" or "-" buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the time delay up or down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- HeadlightOffDelay

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection press the "+" or "-" buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the seconds up or down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu

390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

AirSuspension—IfEquipped

After pressing the "Suspension" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available.

- SoundHornWithLower

When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE LOWER button is pressed. Press the box next to your selection and a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated.

- FlashLightsWithLower

When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the RKE transmitter REMOTE LOWER button is pressed twice. This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn on Lower feature selected. Press the box next to your selection and a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the

system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated.

- SuspensionDisplayMessages

When “All” is selected, all the Air Suspension Alerts will be displayed. When “Warning” is selected only the Air Suspension Warnings will be displayed.

•AutomaticAeroMode(1500ModelOnly)

When this feature is selected the Ride Height will automatically be adjusted depending on the vehicle speed. Press the box next to your selection and a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated.

•TireJackMode

When this feature is selected the air suspension system is disabled to assist with changing a spare tire. Press the box next to your selection and a check-mark appears next to

the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated.

- TransportMode

When this feature is selected the air suspension system lowers and then disables to assist with flat bed towing. Press the box next to your selection and a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check-mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated.

- WheelAlignmentMode

Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled. Refer to your authorized dealer for further information.

TrailerBrake

After pressing the "Trailer Brake" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

- TrailerSelect

When this feature is selected, the Trailer Type can be selected between "Trailer 1," "Trailer 2," "Trailer 3" and "Trailer 4." To make your selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.

- TrailerBrakeType

When this feature is selected, the Trailer Brake Type can be changed between "Light Electric," "Heavy Electric," "Light EOH" and "Heavy EOH." To make your selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Refer to "Integrated Trailer Brake Module" in "Starting And Operating."

392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Audio

After pressing the "Audio" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

•Balance/Fade

This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the arrows to adjust, tap the "C" icon to readjust to the center. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• Equalizer

When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the "+" and "-" buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on the scale between the "+" and "-" buttons on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- SpeedAdjustedVolume

This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume press the "Speed Adjusted Volume" button on the touchscreen and select from "Off," "1," "2" or "3" buttons on the touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- SurroundSound—IfEquipped

This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. To make your selection, press the "Surround Sound" button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• AUXVolumeOffset—IfEquipped

This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. To make your selection, press the "AUX Volume Offset"

button on the touchscreen, select "On" or "Off." Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

- Loudness—IfEquipped

This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes. To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

Phone/Bluetooth®

After pressing the "Phone/Bluetooth®" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

- PairedPhones

This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.

• PairedAudioSources

This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.

SiriusXMSetup—IfEquipped

After pressing the "SiriusXM Setup" button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

- ChannelSkip

SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the "Channel Skip" button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.

394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

- SubscriptionInformation

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.

Press the "Subscription Info" button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.

Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.

NOTE:SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only.

RestoreSettings

After pressing the "Restore Settings" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

- RestoreSettings

When this feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default setting, press the "Restore Settings" button on the touchscreen and pop-up will appear asking "Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?" select "OK" to restore, or "Cancel" to exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop-up appears stating "settings reset to default."

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395

ClearPersonalData

After pressing the "Clear Personal Data Settings" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

- ClearPersonalData

When this feature is selected it will remove personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove personal information, press the "Clear Personal Data" button and a pop-up will appear asking "Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?" select "OK" to Clear, or "Cancel" to exit. Once the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating "Personal data cleared."

SystemInformation

After pressing the "System Information" button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

- SystemInformation

When System Information is selected, a System Information screen will appear displaying the system software version.

Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED

For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio, refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.

iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

Located inside the center console upper lid, this feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port.

iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod® and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please visit Apple's website for software updates.

396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Close-up of a car air conditioner unit panel showing mode dial, switch, and ventilation slots (no text or symbols visible)

CenterConsoleUSB/AUXSDCardMediaHub

For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual or visit UconnectPhone.com.

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED

The remote sound system controls are located on the back surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the switches.

Interior view of a car steering wheel with black arrows indicating clockwise direction (no text or symbols)

045035190
RemoteSoundSystemControls(RearviewOfSteering Wheel)

The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push-button in the center. Pushing the top of the switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume.

The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio, CD or other valid audio sources.

The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push-button in the center. The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode.

Radio Operation

Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next pre-set station that you have programmed in the radio pre-set buttons.

CD Player — If Equipped

Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to play.

If you push the switch up or down twice it plays the second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE

To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following precautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.

398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge.
2. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
3. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays.
4. Store the disc in its case after playing.
5. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
6. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high.

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before considering disc player service.

Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect® (if equipped).

Regulatory And Safety Information

USA/CANADA

Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation

The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399

Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human body.

The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community.

The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

• This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician for help.

CLIMATE CONTROLS

The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the instrument panel below the radio.

Manual Climate Controls Without Touchscreen — If Equipped

The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions.

ManualClimateControls

1 — Front Blower 5 — MAX A/C
2 — Temperature Control 6 — Air Conditioning (A/C)
3 — MODE Control 7 — DEFROST Mode
4 — RECIRCULATION Control

FrontBlowerControl

045671419

There are four blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the OFF position.

TemperatureControl

045671420

Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates

warmer temperatures.

402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

AirConditioningOperation

Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate when the A/C system is engaged.

MAXA/C

For maximum cooling, when MAX A/C is selected the A/C is turned on automatically and the air is recirculated.

NOTE:A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/C position. The LED will blink three times if the A/C button is pushed. If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C

condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.

ModeControl(AirDirection)

045671421

Mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribution. You can select either a primary mode, as identified by the symbols, or a blend of two of these modes. The closer the control is to a particular mode, the more air distribution you

receive from that mode.

PanelMode

Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.

Bi-LevelMode

Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions.

FloorMode

Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount through the defrost and side window demist outlets.

MixMode

Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side window demist outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort, while reducing moisture on the windshield.

DefrostMode

Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode

404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

with maximum blower and warm temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the A/C button is not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.

RecirculationControl

Push the Recirculation Control button to choose between outside air intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. A LED will illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode. Only use the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any outside odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start-up in very hot or humid weather.

NOTE:

• If the RECIRCULATION button is pushed when the system is in Defrost mode, the Recirculation LED indicator will flash three times and then turn off to indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum defogging, select the outside air position.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection by pushing the A/C button.

AirOutlets

The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can be adjusted for direction, and turned on or off to control airflow.

NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear seat passengers.

EconomyMode

If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor. Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired temperature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.

Stop/StartSystem—IfEquipped

While in an Autostop, the Climate Controls system may automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an engine running condition.

Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If Equipped

ButtonsOnTheFaceplate

The buttons on the faceplate are located below the radio touchscreen.

ClimateControls—ButtonsOnTheFaceplate

406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

ButtonsOnTheTouchscreen

Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the radio.

TemperatureControls—ButtonsOnTheTouchscreen

ButtonDescriptions(AppliesToBothButtonsOnTheFaceplateandButtonsOnTheTouchscreen)

1.MAXA/CButton

Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.

2.A/CButton

Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.

3. RecirculationButton

Press and release to change the current setting; the indicator illuminates when ON.

4.FrontDefrostButton

Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting.

5.DefrostButton

Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped) and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.

CAUTION!

Failuretofollowthesecautionscancausedamageto theheatingelements:

• Usecarewhenwashingtheinsideoftherear window.Donotuseabrasivewindowcleanerson theinteriorsurfaceofthewindow.Useasoftcloth andamildwashingsolution,wipingparalleltothe heatingelements.Labelscanbepeeledoffafter soakingwithwarmwater.
• Donotusescrapers, sharpinstruments, or abrasive window cleanerson the interiorsurface of the window.
• Keepallobjectsasafedistancefromthewindow.

408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

6.Modes

The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:

- PanelMode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.

- Bi-LevelMode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

NOTE:BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

- FloorMode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

- MixMode

Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window demister outlets. This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX and DEFROST modes even if the A/C button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, utilize these modes only when required.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409

7.BlowerControl

Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using either buttons on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen as follows:

BlowerControlKnobOnTheFaceplate

The blower speed increases as you turn the control clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.

ButtonsOnTheTouchscreen

Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.

8. ClimateControlOFFButton

Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.

9.TemperatureControlDownButton

Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings. On the touchscreen, slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button for cooler temperature settings.

10. TemperatureControlUpButton

Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings. On the touchscreen, slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button for cooler temperature settings.

410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

RecirculationControl

When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION control butto Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The recirculation LED will illuminate on the blower control knob when this button is selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle.

NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected.

Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If Equipped

ButtonsOnTheFaceplate

The buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect® screen.

AutomaticClimateControls—ButtonsOnThe Faceplate

ButtonsOnTheTouchscreen

Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.

Uconnect®5.0AutomaticTemperatureControls—ButtonsOnTheTouchscreen

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411

Uconnect®8.4AutomaticTemperatureControls—ButtonsOnTheTouchscreen

ButtonDescriptions(AppliesToBothButtonsOnTheFaceplateAndButtonsOnTheTouchscreen)

1.MAXA/CButton

Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing

412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.

2.A/CButton

Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.

3. RecirculationButton

Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when ON.

4. AUTOOperationButton

Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information.

5.FrontDefrostButton

Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting.

6.DefrostButton

Press and release this button to turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped) and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:

• Usecarewhenwashingtheinsideoftherear window.Donotuseabrasivewindowcleanerson theinteriorsurfaceofthewindow.Useasoftcloth andamildwashingsolution,wipingparalleltothe heatingelements.Labelscanbepeeledoffafter soakingwithwarmwater.
• Donotusescrapers, sharpinstruments, or abrasive windowcleanersontheinteriorsurfaceofthe window.
• Keepallobjectsasafedistancefromthewindow.

7.PassengerTemperatureControlUpButton (Uconnect®8.4)

Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer

temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow for warmer temperature settings.

NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.

8.PassengerTemperatureControlDownButton (Uconnect®8.4)

Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow for cooler temperature settings.

NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.

9.SYNC

Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated

414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.

10.BlowerControl

Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using either Buttons on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen as follows:

BlowerControlKnobOnTheFaceplate

The blower speed increases as you turn the control clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.

ButtonOnTheTouchscreen

Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.

11.Modes

The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:

- PanelMode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow

direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.

- Bi-LevelMode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

NOTE:BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

- FloorMode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

- MixMode

Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions.

12. ClimateControlOFFButton

Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.

13.DriverTemperatureControlDownButton (Uconnect®8.4)

Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow for cooler temperature settings.

NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.

416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

14. DriverTemperatureControlUpButton(Uconnect®8.4)

Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate button for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow for warmer temperature settings.

NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.

15.TemperatureControl(Uconnect®5.0)

Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the temperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperatures.

Climate Control Functions

A/C(AirConditioning)

The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.

NOTE:

- For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417

• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.

MAXA/C

MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.

Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.

In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.

RecirculationControl

When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION control button on the touchscreen or faceplate. Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The recirculation LED button on the faceplate will illuminate when either button is selected. Push either button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle.

418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button on the faceplate to blink and then turn off.

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)

AutomaticOperation

1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate or press the "AUTO" button on the touchscreen.

2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature buttons on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.

3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the temperature. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically.

NOTE:

- It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419

- The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units by selecting the Uconnect® customer-programmable feature. Refer to the "Uconnect® System Settings" in this section of the manual.

To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.

ManualOperationOverride

The system allows for manual selection of blower speed, air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control.

The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.

The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C operation and Recirculation control can also be manually selected in Manual operation.

NOTE: Each of these features operates independently from each other. If any feature is controlled manually, temperature control will continue to operate automatically.

Operating Tips

NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions.

SummerOperation

The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.

420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. Refer to "Maintenance Procedures" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for proper coolant selection.

WinterOperation

To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging.

Vacation/Storage

Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in fresh air with the blower setting in high. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

WindowFoggingandFrosting

Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost on the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.

NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.

OutsideAirIntake

Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains. In winter months, ensure the air intake is clear of ice, slush and snow.

422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

ControlSettingSuggestionsForVariousWeatherConditions

WEATHER	CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot weather and vehicle interior is very hot	Set the mode control toA/C on, and blower on high. Roll down the windows for a minute to flush out the hot air. Once comfort is achieved adjust controls for comfort.
Warm weather	Turn A/C on and set the mode control to the position.
Cool Sunny	Operate in position.
Cool	Set the mode control to window and turn on A/U to keep windows clear.
Col	Set the mode control to fogging start to occur, more the control toward the position.

0456001003

OperatingTipsChart

Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION

Introducing Uconnect®

Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect® 5.0 or 8.4A/8.4AN system.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423

0501043050

Uconnect®5.0

Key Features:

• 5" touchscreen
• Three buttons on either side of the display

424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Uconnect®8.4AN

If you see the HD icon on your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect® 8.4AN system. If not, you have a Uconnect® 8.4A system.

Get Started

1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425

1. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.
2. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category.

Two buttons are all you need to control your Uconnect® system with your voice.

VoiceRecognition(VR)/PhoneButtons

1 — Push To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation, Apps And Climate Functions
2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text

426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Basic Voice Commands

The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect® system.

Push the VR button (w_2^cv_R) . After the beep, say...

• Cancelto stop a current voice session
• Helpto hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again

Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system's status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.

Uconnect®5.0

Uconnect®8.4A/8.4AN

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427

Radio

Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio® stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio® trial required.)

Push the VR button _ VR . After the beep, say...

• Tunetoninety-five-point-five FM
• TunetoSatellite Channel Hits 1

428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button and say "Help." The system will provide you with a list of commands.

Uconnect®5.0Radio

Uconnect®8.4A/8.4ANRadio

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429

Media

Uconnect® offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth® and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)

Push the VR button (VR). After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.

• Changesourceto Bluetooth®

• Changesourceto iPod®

• Changesourceto USB

• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; PlaygenreClassical

TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre information is displayed.

430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Uconnect®5.0MediaUconnect®8.4A/8.4ANMedia

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431

Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)

Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)

Push the VR button (VR). After the beep, say one of the following commands:

• Setdrivertemperatureto70 degrees
• Setpassengertemperatureto70 degrees

TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.

Uconnect8.4A/8.4ANClimate

432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)

The Uconnect® navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive when you know exactly how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the Uconnect® 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate navigation at any time.)

1. To enter a destination, push the VR button _VR . After the beep, say:

- For the 8.4A Uconnect® System, say: "Enterstate."

- For the 8.4AN Uconnect® System, say: "Navigate to 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan."

1. Then follow the system prompts.

TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button of EVR. After the beep, say: "Findnearestcoffee shop."

Uconnect®8.4A/8.4ANNavigation

Phone

Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect®. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433

Push the Phone button 📋. After the beep, say one of the following commands...

• CallJohn Smith
  •Dial123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial(call previous outgoing phone number)
• Callback(call previous incoming phone number)

TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button 📋 and say "Call," then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say "CallJohn Smith work."

434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Uconnect®5.0PhoneUconnect®8.4A/8.4ANPhone

Voice Text Reply

Uconnect® will announce incomingtext messages. Push the Phone button 📋 and say Listen.(Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.)

1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the Phone button . After the beep, say: "Reply."
2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system prompts.

PRE-DEFINEDVOICETEXTREPLYRESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in Traffic. See you later.
No.	Start without me.	I'll be Late.
Okay. Where are you? I will beminutes late.
Call me.	Are you there yet?
I'll call you later.	I need directions.	See you inof minutes.
I'm on my way.	Can't talk right
I'm lost. Than	ks. now.

TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later supports reading incomingtext messages only.

Uconnect® Access (8.4A/8.4AN)

An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the Uconnect® Access services in the next section of this guide. To register with Uconnect® Access, press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get started. Detailed registration instructions can be found on the next page.

436 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: Uconnect® Access is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States and Alaska. Services can only be used where coverage is available; see coverage map for details.

CALL 9-1-1 Call

⚠ Security Alarm Notification

Remote Door Lock/Unlock

Stolen Vehicle Assistance

Remote Vehicle Start**

Remote Horn and Lights

Yelp® Search

Voice Texting

Roadside Assistance Call

Wi-Fi Hotspot***

**If vehicle is equipped.

***Extra charges apply.

Register (8.4A/8.4AN)

1. Press the Appsbutton on the bottom of the 8.4-inch touchscreen.
2. If a pop-up message appears, press Registeror go to the FavoriteAppsmenu and press Uconnect®Registration.
3. Read through the registration instructions. Enter and confirm your personal email address. Then press Send.

4. Check your personal inbox for an email from Uconnect® Access.

5. Click on the link inside the email within 72hours and complete the easy online registration process to create a personal Mopar® Owner Connect account linked to your vehicle.

Uconnect®Registration8.4A/8.4AN

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 437

Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)

Securely link your mobile device to your vehicle with the Uconnect® Access App. Once you have downloaded the App, you may start your vehicle or lock it from virtually any distance. (Vehicle must be properly equipped with factory-installed Remote Start.)

MobileApp

Download the Uconnect® Access App to a compatible Apple® or Android® mobile devices. All you need to do is:

1. After registering with Uconnect® Access, log on to your Mopar® Owner Connect account at moparownerconnect.com.
2. On the Dashboard page, enter your mobile phone number to receive a link to download the App on your mobile device. Or go to iTunes®, or Google Play, and search for the Uconnect® Access App.
3. To activate the App, enter your Mopar Owner Connect user name and password and log in. Your vehicle is then connected to your mobile device.

Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)

1. To send a message, push the Phone button 📋. After the beep, say the following command: "Sendmessageto John Smith."

2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect® to process your message.

3. The Uconnect® system will repeat your message and provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect® what you'd like to do. For instance, if you're happy with your message, after the beep, say: "Send."

You must be registered with Uconnect® Access and have a compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice to send a personalized text message.

TIP:

• Not compatible with iPhone®.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be illuminated to use the feature.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 439

Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN)

Once registered with Uconnect® Access, you can use your voice to search for the most popular places or things around you.

1. Press the "Apps" button on the touchscreen.

2. Press the "All Apps" button on the touchscreen.

3. Press the "Yelp" button on the touchscreen.

4. Once the YELP® home screen appears on the touchscreen, push the VR button "eV" , then say: "YELP search."

5. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell Uconnect® the place or business that you'd like Uconnect® to find.

TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.

Yelp®

440 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN)

Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check a sports score or the 5-day weather forecast?

SiriusXM Travel Link™ is a suite of services that brings a wealth of information right to your Uconnect® 8.4AN system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)

Push the VR button _VR . After the beep, say one of the following commands:

• Showfuelprices
• Show5-dayweatherforecast
• Showextendedweather

TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.

SiriusXMTravelLink™

Additional Information

© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp.

Uconnect® System Support:

• U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400 or visit DriveUconnect.com
- Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca

Mon. – Fri., 7:00 am – 12:00 am, ET

Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241. Please have your Uconnect® Security PIN ready when you call.

STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

■STARTING PROCEDURES....450

□Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

□Automatic Transmission....451

□Keyless Enter-N-Go™. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

□Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

□Extreme Cold Weather (Below -20°F Or -29°C)....453

□If Engine Fails To Start....453

□After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

■STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .....455

□Automatic Mode .....455

□Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop....456

□To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode. .457

□To Manually Turn Off The Stop Start System . .458

□To Manually Turn On The Stop Start System . .459

□System Malfunction....459

■ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ...459

444 STARTING AND OPERATING

■AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .....460

□Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

□Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .462

☐Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ..... 463

☐Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — 1500 Models Only (If Equipped) .....472

☐Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — 2500/3500 Models Only .485

■FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED....496

□Manually Shifted Transfer Case — If Equipped....496

□Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Four-Position Switch) — If Equipped . . . . . . .500

□Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Five-Position Switch) — If Equipped . . . . . . .506

☐Four-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Eight Speed Transmission Only) — If Equipped....513

☐Five-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Eight Speed Transmission Only) — If Equipped....520

■ AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (1500 MODELS) — IF EQUIPPED....527

□Description....527

□Air Suspension Modes....531

□Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) Display Messages....533

□Operation....533

STARTING AND OPERATING 445

■AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (2500/3500 MODELS) — IF EQUIPPED....535

□Description....535

□Air Suspension Modes....537

□Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) Display Messages....539

□Operation....539

☐Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle Characteristics .....544

□Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand .....547

□Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High Points)....548

□Hill Climbing....551

□Driving Through Water....554

□Airing Down For Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . .556

□Vehicle Recovery....557

□After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

■LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL....562

■DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES....563

□Acceleration....563

□Traction....564

■DRIVING THROUGH WATER....564

□Flowing/Rising Water....564

□Shallow Standing Water....565

■OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS....566

□After Driving Off-Road .....566

■WINCH USAGE — POWER WAGON ONLY — (IF EQUIPPED)....568

□Things To Know Before Using Your Winch. . . .568

□Understanding The Features Of Your Winch. . .570

□Winch Accessories....572

□Operating Your Winch....573

□Rigging Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585

■POWER STEERING....587

□Electric Power Steering — 1500 Models . . . . .587

□Hydraulic Power Steering — 2500/3500 Models ..... .588

■FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4L ENGINES ONLY — IF EQUIPPED .....590

■PARKING BRAKE....590

□ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .....593

□Traction Control System (TCS)....595

□Brake Assist System (BAS)....595

□Hill Start Assist (HSA) .....596

STARTING AND OPERATING 447

□Electronic Stability Control (ESC)....598
□ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
□Trailer Sway Control (TSC)....604
□Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped . . .604

■TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .....608

□Tire Markings....608
☐Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
□Tire Terminology And Definitions....614
□Tire Loading And Tire Pressure .....615

■TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION .....620

□Tire Pressure....620
□Tire Inflation Pressures .....621

☐Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .623
□Radial Ply Tires....623
□Tire Types....624
□Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
□Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
□Tire Spinning....629
□Tread Wear Indicators....629
□Life Of Tire....630
□Replacement Tires....631

■SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION — IF EQUIPPED....632
■TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .....632
■TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....635

448 STARTING AND OPERATING

☐Directional Tires — If Equipped .....636
□Dual Rear Wheels — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .636

■TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) .638

□Premium System....640
☐Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) 3500 Series Trucks....645
□General Information....646

■FUEL REQUIREMENTS....647

□3.6L Engine....647
□5.7L/6.4L Engines....647
□Reformulated Gasoline....648
□Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends....648
□E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .....649

□MMT In Gasoline....649
□Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
□Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
□Carbon Monoxide Warnings .....651

■FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED....652

□E-85 General Information....652
□Ethanol Fuel (E-85)....652
□Fuel Requirements....653
☐Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
□Starting .654
□Cruising Range....654
□Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654

STARTING AND OPERATING 449

□Maintenance....655

■ADDING FUEL....655

□Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

■VEHICLE LOADING....658

□Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658

■TRAILER TOWING....660

□Common Towing Definitions....660

□Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight....668

□Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)....669

□Trailer And Tongue Weight....669

□Towing Requirements....670

□Towing Tips....680

■SNOWPLOW....682

□1500 Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682

□2500/3500 Models Only....683

■RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)....686

□Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .686

□Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models .....687

□Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

450 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING PROCEDURES

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belt.

The starter should not be operated for more than 10-second intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such intervals will protect the starter from overheating.

WARNING!

- Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoan unlocked vehicle.Leavingchildrenin avehicleunattendedisdangerousforanumberof reasons.Achildorotherscouldbeseriouslyor fatally injured.Childrenshouldbewarnednotto touchtheparkingbrake,brakepedalorthegear selector.

WARNING!(Continued)

- DonotleavetheKeyFobinornearthevehicle, or inalocationaccessibletochildren, and donot leavetheignitionofavehicleequipped with KeylessEnter-N-GointheACCorON/RUNmode. Achildcouldoperatepowerwindows, othercontrols, ormovethevehicle.

Normal Starting

Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. Cycle the ignition to the START position and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, cycle the ignition to the OFF position, wait five seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

(Continued)

Automatic Transmission

Start the engine with the transmission in PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting into any driving range.

NOTE:

- This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be pressed to shift out of PARK.

- If equipped with an 8 speed transmission starting the vehicle in NEUTRAL is not possible unless the Manual Park Release has been activated. For the Manual Park Release operation refer to Manual Park Release in "What To Do In Emergencies".

TipStartFeature

Donotpress the accelerator. Cycle the ignition switch briefly to the START position and release it. The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage when the engine is running.

Keyless Enter-N-Go™

This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob is in the passenger compartment.

Normal Starting

UsingTheENGINESTART/STOPButton

1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.

2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.

3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds.

452 STARTING AND OPERATING

1. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, push the button again.

NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.

ToTurnOffTheEngineUsingENGINE START/STOPButton

1. Place the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, then push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will

shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the shift lever/gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF position. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once, the EVIC/DID will display a "Vehicle Not In Park" message and the engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.

NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) position and the transmission is in PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position.

ENGINESTART/STOPButtonFunctions—With Driver'sFootOFFTheBrakePedal(InPARKOr NEUTRALPosition)

The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC, RUN. To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps:

1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF position:
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to change the ignition to the ACC position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to change the ignition to the RUN position.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to return the ignition to the OFF position.

Extreme Cold Weather (Below -20°F Or -29°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

If Engine Fails To Start

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal Starting" procedure, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while the engine is cranking. This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.

The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.

454 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

Topreventdamagetothestarter, donotcrank the engineformorethan10secondsatatime. Wait10to 15secondsbeforetryingagain.

WARNING!

• Neverpourfuelorotherflammableliquidsinto thethrottlebodyairinletopeninginanattemptto startthevehicle. This could result in a flashfire causing serious personal injury.
• Donotattempttopushortowyourvehicletogetit started. Vehiclesequippedwithanautomatictransmissioncannotbestedthisway.Unburnedfuel couldenterthecatalyticconverterandoncethe enginehasstarted,igniteanddamagetheconverter andvehicle.

WARNING!(Continued)

- If the vehicle has ad discharged battery, booster cables maybe used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to "Jump Starting" in "What ToDo In Emergencies" for further information.

If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not have enough power to continue running when the ignition button/key is released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the ignition button/key once the engine is running smoothly.

If the engine shows no sign of starting after a 10 second period of engine cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.

(Continued)

After Starting

The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up.

STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

The Stop/Start function is developed to save fuel and reduce emissions. The system will stop the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal will automatically re-start the vehicle.

Automatic Mode

The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal customer engine start. It will remain in STOP/START NOT READY until you drive forward with a vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). At that time, the system will go into STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are met, can go into an STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE "Autostop" mode.

ToActivateTheAutostopMode, TheFollowingMust Occur:

1. The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) within the Stop/Start section. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.
2. The vehicle must be completely stopped.
3. The transmission Gear Selector must be in DRIVE and the brake pedal depressed.

The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the zero position and the stop/start telltale will illuminate indicating you are in an Autostop. While in an

456 STARTING AND OPERATING

Autostop, the Climate Controls system may automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an engine running condition.

Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop

Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled. In following situations the engine will not stop:

• Driver's seat belt is not buckled
• Driver's door is not closed
• Outside temperature is less than 1^ F ( -17^ C) or greater than 104^ F ( 40^ C)

• Battery temperature too warm or cold
  • The vehicle is on a steep grade

• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable cabin temperature has not been achieved
  • HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed
  •Engine has not reached normal operating temperature

• Battery discharged
  • The transmission is not in DRIVE
• Hood is open
• Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode

Other factors which can inhibit AutoStop include: fuel level, accelerator pedal input, engine temp too high and steering angle.

It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times without the STOP/START system going into a STOP/START READY state under more extreme conditions of the items listed above.

To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode

While in DRIVE the engine will start when the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed. The transmission will automatically reengage upon engine restart. During this transition the brakes will hold the vehicle to avoid undesired vehicle movement.

ConditionsthatwillcausetheenginetostartautomaticallywhileinAutostopmode.

The Engine Will Start Automatically When:

• The transmission selector is moved from DRIVE to REVERSE or NEUTRAL
• To maintain cabin temperature near the HVAC settings
  •HVAC is set to full defrost mode
  • Autostop time exceeds 5 minutes

• Battery voltage drops too low

• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal applications)

• STOP/START OFF switch is pressed
• 4WD system is put into 4LO mode
  • The emissions system requires it
• A STOP/START system error occurs

ConditionsthatforceanautomaticshifttoPARKwhile inAutostopmode.

The Engine Will Not Start Automatically and the Transmission will be placed in PARK if:

• The driver door is open and brake pedal released
- The driver door is open and the driver seat belt is unbuckled
• The engine hood has been opened
- A STOP/START system error occurs

458 STARTING AND OPERATING

The engine may then be restarted by moving the transmission shift selector out of PARK (e.g. to DRIVE) or, in some cases, only by a KEY START. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) will display a SHIFT OUT OF PARK message, or a STOP/START KEY START REQUIRED message, to indicate which action is required. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

To Manually Turn Off The Stop Start System

1. Press the STOP/START Off switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.

STOP/STARTOFFSwitch

1. The STOP/START OFF message will appear in Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

2. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/START system) the engine will not be stopped.

3. If the STOP/START system is manually turned off, the engine can only be started and stopped by cycling the ignition switch.
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an ON condition every time the key is turned off and back on.

To Manually Turn On The Stop Start System

1. Press the STOP/START Off switch (located on the switch bank).
2. The light on the switch will turn off.

System Malfunction

If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the system will not shut down the engine. A SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

The system will need to be checked by your authorized dealer.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

460 STARTING AND OPERATING

1500Models

The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the passenger side of the vehicle near the right head lamp assembly. It is located between the front grill and the radiator, but underneath the black upper seal.

2500/3500Models

The engine block heater cord is routed through the grille by the right front tow hook.

It includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered strap. It also has a c-clip that is used for storage when not in use for the winter months. During winter months, remove the heater cord wiring assembly from itself on the c-clip.

The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.

WARNING!

Remembertodisconnecttheengineblockheater cordbeforedriving.Damagetothe110-115Volt electricalcordcouldcauseelectrocution.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

CAUTION!

Damagetothetransmissionmayoccurifthefollowingprecautionsarenotobserved:

• ShiftintooroutofPARKorREVERSEonlyafter thevehiclehascometoacompletestop.
• DonotshiftbetweenPARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, orDRIVEwhentheengineisaboveidle speed.
• Beforeshiftingintoanygear,makesureyourfoot isfirmlypressingthebrakepedal.

NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engines speed higher than idlespeed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintendedmovementofavehiclecouldinjure thoseinornearthevehicle.Aswithallvehicles, youshouldneverexitavehiclewhiletheengineis running.Beforeexitingavehicle,alwaysapplythe parkingbrake,shiftthetransmissionintoPARK,

WARNING!(Continued)

turntheengineOFF, and remove the KeyFob. Whentheignition is in the LOCK/OFF(keyremoval) position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.

- NeverusethePARKpositionasasubstituteforthe parkingbrake.Alwaysapplytheparkingbrake fullywhenparkedtoguardagainstvehiclemovementandpossibleinjuryordamage.

- Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoan unlocked vehicle. Allowingchildrento beinavehicleunattendedisdangerousfora numberofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbe seriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbe warnednottotouchtheparkingbrake,brakepedal orthetransmissiongearselector.

(Continued)

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• DonotleavetheKeyFobinornethevehicle(or inalocationaccessibletochildren), and donot leavetheignition(inavehicleequipped with KeylessEnter-N-Go) in the ACCorON/RUNposition. Achild could operate power windows, other controls, or movethevehicle.
• DonotleavetheKeyFobinornethevehicle(or inalocationaccessibletochildren), and donot leavetheignitionofavehicleequipped with KeylessEnter-N-GointheON/RUNmode. Achild could operate powerwindows, other controls, or movethevehicle.

Key Ignition Park Interlock

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/

OFF (key removal) position. The Key Fob can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, and the transmission is locked in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF position.

NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the Key Fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but the Key Fob cannot be removed until you obtain service.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position (engine running, for vehicles with eight-speed transmission) and the brake pedal must be pressed.

In 8-speed vehicles, the brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.

Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If Equipped

The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic gear selector located on the instrument panel. The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both above the gear selector and in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID). To select a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector. You must press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE, when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as Park to Drive), simply rotate the gear selector to the appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.

464 STARTING AND OPERATING

The transmission gear selector has only PARK, RE-VERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer to "Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation" in this section for further information). Pressing the GEAR-/GEAR+ switches (on the steering wheel) while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear, and will display that gear limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Models with the Driver Information Display (DID) will display both the selected gear limit, and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode.

051269900
ElectronicTransmissionGearSelector

GearRanges

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold.

PARK(P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case is in a drive position.

WARNING!

• NeverusethePARKpositionasasubstituteforthe parkingbrake.Alwaysapplytheparkingbrake fullywhenparkedtoguardagainstvehiclemovementandpossibleinjuryordamage.
• Yourvehiclecouldmoveandinjureyouandothers ifitisnotinPARK.Makesurethetransmissionis inPARKbeforeleavingthevehicle.
• ItisdangeroustoshiftoutofPARKorNEUTRAL iftheenginespeedishigherthanidlespeed.If

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

yourfootisnotfirmlypressingthebrakepedal, the vehiclecouldacceleratequicklyforwardorinreverse.Youcouldlosecontrolofthevehicleandhit someoneorsomething.Onlyshiftintogearwhen theengineisidlingnormallyandyourfootis firmlypressingthebrakepedal.

- Unintendedmovementofvehiclecouldinjure thoseinornearthevehicle.Aswithallvehicles, youshouldneverexitavehiclewhiletheengineis running.Beforeexitingavehicle,alwaysapplythe parkingbrake,shiftthetransmissionintoPARK, turntheengineOFF,andremovethekeyfob.When theignitionisintheLOCK/OFF(keyremoval) position,thetransmissionislockedinPARK,securingthevehicleagainstunwantedmovement.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysmakesurethe ignitionisintheOFFposition,removethekeyfob fromthevehicle,andlockthevehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoan unlocked vehicle. Allowingchildrento beinavehicleunattendedisdangerousfora numberofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbe seriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbe warnednottotouchtheparkingbrake,brakepedal orthetransmissiongearselector.
• Donotleavethekeyfobinornearthevehicle(or inalocationaccessibletochildren), and donot leavetheignition(inavehicleequipped with KeylessEnter-N-Go™) in the ACCorON/RUN position. Achild could operate power windows, other controls, ormovethevehicle.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

• DONOTracetheenginewhenshifting from PARKorNEUTRALintoanothergearrange, asthis candamagethedrivetrain.
• Beforemoving the transmission gear selector out of PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damageto the gear selector could result.

The following indicator should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into PARK:

- With brake pedal released, look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).

REVERSE(R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL(N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!

DonotcoastinNEUTRALandneverturnoffthe ignitiontocoastdownahill.Theseareunsafe practicesthatlimityourresponsetochangingtraffic orroadconditions.Youmightlosecontrolofthe vehicleandhaveacollision.

CAUTION!

Towingthevehicle,coasting,ordrivingforanyother reasonwiththetransmissioninNEUTRALcancause severetransmissiondamage.Referto"Recreational Towing"in"StartingAndOperating"and"TowingA DisabledVehicle"in"WhatToDoInEmergencies" forfurtherinformation.

DRIVE(D)

This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers), select TOW/HAUL mode or use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer to "Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation" in this section for further information) to select a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

During extremely cold temperatures ( -22^ [-30^] or below), transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.

TransmissionLimpHomeMode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may be necessary.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:

NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).

1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. On vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go ^TM , push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.

470 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.

If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.

ElectronicRangeSelect(ERS)Operation—Eight-SpeedTransmission

The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear when the transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmission gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmission will not shift above fourth gear (except to prevent engine overspeed), but will shift through the lower gears normally.

You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed. When the transmission gear selector is in DRIVE, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between all available gears. Tapping the GEAR-switch (on the steering wheel) will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the GEAR- or GEAR+ switch will change the top available gear.

051269899
1 — ERS (-) Switch 2 — ERS (+) Switch

To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the GEAR+ switch until the gear limit display disappears from the instrument cluster.

WARNING!

Donotdownshiftforadditionalenginebrakingona slipperysurface. Thedrivewheelscouldlosetheir gripandthevehiclecouldskid,causingacollisionor personalinjury.

WhentoUseTOW/HAULMode

When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, press the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting.

472 STARTING AND OPERATING

TOW/HAULSwitch

The "TOW/HAUL Indicator Light" will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores normal operation. Normal operation is always

the default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be pushed each time the engine is started.

Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — 1500 Models Only (If Equipped)

The transmission gear position display (located in the instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. The shift lever is mounted either on the right side of the steering column (if equipped) or on the console (if equipped). You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK (refer to "Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System" in this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. Pull the shift lever toward you when shifting into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of PARK (column shift only).

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.

The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer to "Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation" in this section for further information). Pressing the ERS (- / + ) switches (column shift) or moving the shift lever to the left or right (- / + ) (console shift) while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear, and will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.

GearRanges

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold.

PARK(P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.

474 STARTING AND OPERATING

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

WARNING!

- NeverusethePARKpositionasasubstituteforthe parkingbrake.Alwaysapplytheparkingbrake fullywhenparkedtoguardagainstvehiclemovementandpossibleinjuryordamage.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- Yourvehiclecouldmoveandinjureyouandothers ifitisnotcompletelyinPARK.Checkbytryingto movetheshiftleveroutofPARKwiththebrake pedalreleased.Makesurethetransmissionisin PARKbeforeleavingthevehicle.

- It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engines speed higher than midlespeed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift intake for when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

- Unintendedmovementofavehiclecouldinjure thoseinornearthevehicle.Aswithallvehicles, youshouldneverexitavehiclewhiletheengineis

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

running.Beforeexitingvehicle,alwaysapplythe parkingbrake,shiftthetransmissionintoPARK, turntheengineOFF,andremovetheKeyFob. WhentheignitionisintheLOCK/OFF(keyremoval)position,thetransmissionislockedin PARK,securingthevehicleagainstunwanted movement.

• Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysmakesurethe ignitionisintheOFFposition,removetheKeyFob fromthevehicle,andlockthevehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoanunlockedvehicle.Allowingchildrento beinavehicleunattendedisdangerousfora numberofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbe seriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbe

WARNING!(Continued)

warnednottotouchtheparkingbrake,brakepedal ortheshiftlever.

- DonotleavetheKeyFobinornearthevehicle(or inalocationaccessibletochildren), and donot leavetheignition(inavehicleequipped with KeylessEnter-N-Go™) in the ACCorON/RUN position. Achild could operate power windows, other controls, ormovethevehicle.

CAUTION!

- BeforemovingtheshiftleveroutofPARK,you mustturntheignitionswitchfromtheLOCK/OFF positiontotheON/RUNposition,andalsopress thebrakepedal.Otherwise,damagetotheshift levercouldresult.

(Continued)

(Continued)

476 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!(Continued)

- DONOTracetheenginewhenshiftingfrom PARKorNEUTRALintoanothergearrange,asthis candamagethedrivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:

• When shifting into PARK, pull the column-mounted shift lever toward you and move it all the way counterclockwise until it stops. For console-mounted shifter, firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops.
• Release the shift lever and make sure it is fully seated in the PARK gate.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).

- With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK.

REVERSE(R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into Reverse only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL(N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!

DonotcoastinNEUTRALandneverturnoffthe ignitiontocoastdownahill.Theseareunsafe

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

practices that limity your responsetochanging traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

CAUTION!

Towingthevehicle,coasting,ordrivingforanyother reasonwiththetransmissioninNEUTRALcancause severetransmissiondamage.Referto"Recreational Towing"in"StartingAndOperating"and"TowingA DisabledVehicle"in"WhatToDoInEmergencies" forfurtherinformation.

DRIVE(D)

This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission

automatically upshifts through underdrive first and second gears, direct third gear and overdrive fourth and fifth gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

To access all six available gears, you must use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, described below.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation” in this section for further information) to select a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the powertrain controller will modify the transmission shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating.

If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger of overheating, the “Transmission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down.

NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a significant additional heat load on the cooling system. Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible gear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL (when stopped in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this excess heat generation.

During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of both the torque converter clutch and the top overdrive gear are inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the "Note" under "Torque Converter Clutch" in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be limited to first and direct gears only. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.

TransmissionLimpHomeMode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains

in direct gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.

4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.

5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.

If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.

ElectronicRangeSelect(ERS)Operation—Six-SpeedTransmission(1500ModelsOnly)

The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear when the transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmission gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmission will not shift above fourth gear, but will shift through the lower gears normally.

Use of ERS (or TOW/HAUL mode) also enables an additional underdrive gear which is not normally used during through-gear accelerations. This additional gear can improve vehicle performance and cooling capability when towing a trailer on certain grades. In ERS mode, gears 1 though 3 are underdrive gears, and ERS 4 is direct drive. ERS 5 and 6 (Overdrive gears) are the same as the normal fourth and fifth gears.

You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-) switch (column shift) or tapping the shift lever to the left (-) (console shift) will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top available gear. For example, if you are in DRIVE and are in third (direct) gear, when you tap the shift lever/switch one time in the (-) direction, the display will show 4 (ERS 4 is direct gear). Another tap down (-) will shift the transmission down to ERS 3 (the added under-drive gear). Once in ERS mode, tapping (-) or (+) will change the top available gear.

STARTING AND OPERATING 481

Close-up of a car's side panel showing a black handle and a white arrow pointing to a button, with no visible text or symbols.

ColumnShiftLeverConsoleShiftLever

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a hand operating a gear shift into a multi-compartment container with no visible text or symbols

To exit ERS mode, simply hold the shift lever to the right (+) (console shift) or press and hold the ERS (+) switch (column shift) until the gear limit display disappears from the instrument cluster.

482 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

Donotdownshiftforadditionalenginebrakingona slipperysurface. Thedrivewheelscouldlosetheir gripandthevehiclecouldskid,causingacollisionor personalinjury.

NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the shift lever to the left (-) (console shift) or the ERS (-) switch down (column shift). The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.

CAUTION!

When using ERSforengine braking while descending steep grades, be careful not too overspeed the

CAUTION!(Continued)

engine.Applythebrakesasneededtopreventengineoverspeed.

OverdriveOperation

The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive (fourth and fifth gears). The transmission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present:

• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
- the transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature,
- the engine coolant (antifreeze) has reached an adequate temperature,
- vehicle speed is sufficiently high,

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 483

• the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated, and
• the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.

WhenToUseTOW/HAULMode

When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transmission will automatically downshift (for engine braking) when the throttle is closed and/or during steady braking maneuvers.

TOW/HAULSwitch

The "TOW/HAUL Indicator Light" will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores normal operation. Normal operation is always the default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is

484 STARTING AND OPERATING

desired, the switch must be pushed each time the engine is started.

WARNING!

Donotusethe"TOW/HAUL"featurewhendriving inicyorslipperyconditions.Theincreasedengine brakingcancausetherearwheelstoslide,andthe vehicletoswingaroundwiththepossiblelossof vehiclecontrol,whichmaycauseanaccidentpossiblyresultinginpersonalinjuryordeath.

TorqueConverterClutch

A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in

the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.

NOTE:

• The torque converter clutch will not engage, and the transmission will not shift into the top overdrive gear, until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because top gear is disabled, and the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when cold. This is normal. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the

fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission. This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter will refill within five seconds after starting the engine.

Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — 2500/3500 Models Only

The transmission gear position display (located in the instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. The shift lever is mounted on the right side of the steering column. You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section for further information). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. Pull the shift lever toward you when shifting into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of PARK.

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.

The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation” in this section for further information). Pressing the ERS (-/+) switches (on the shift lever) while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear, and will display that gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.

486 STARTING AND OPERATING

GearRanges

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold.

PARK(P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case is in a drive position.

WARNING!

• NeverusethePARKpositionasasubstituteforthe parkingbrake.Alwaysapplytheparkingbrake fullywhenparkedtoguardagainstvehiclemovementandpossibleinjuryordamage.
• Yourvehiclecouldmoveandinjureyouandothers ifitisnotcompletelyinPARK.Checkbytryingto

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

movetheshiftleveroutofPARKwiththebrake pedalreleased.Makesurethetransmissionisin PARKbeforeleavingthevehicle.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engines speed higher than idlespeed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift to gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintendedmovementofavehiclecouldinjure thoseinornearthevehicle.Aswithallvehicles, youshouldneverexitavehiclewhiletheengineis running.Beforeexitingavehicle,alwaysapplythe parkingbrake,shiftthetransmissionintoPARK,

WARNING!(Continued)

turntheengineOFF, and remove the KeyFob. Whentheignition is in the LOCK/OFF(keyremoval) position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.

• Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysmakesurethe ignitionisintheOFFposition,removetheKeyFob fromthevehicle,andlockthevehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoan unlocked vehicle. Allowing childrento be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a numberofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbe seriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbe warnednottotouchtheparkingbrake,brakepedal ortheshiftlever.

(Continued)

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- DonotleavetheKeyFobinornearthevehicle(or inalocationaccessibletochildren), and donot leavetheignition(inavehicleequipped with KeylessEnter-N-Go™) in the ACCorON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or movethe vehicle.

CAUTION!

- BeforemovingtheshiftleveroutofPARK,you mustturntheignitionswitchfromtheLOCK/OFF positiontotheON/RUNposition,andalsopress thebrakepedal. Otherwise,damagetotheshift levercouldresult. - DONOTracetheenginewhenshiftingfrom PARKorNEUTRALintoanothergearrange,asthis candamagethedrivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:

• When shifting into PARK, pull the shift lever toward you and move it all the way counterclockwise until it stops.
• Release the shift lever and make sure it is fully seated in the PARK gate.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK.

REVERSE(R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL(N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!

DonotcoastinNEUTRALandneverturnoffthe ignitiontocoastdownahill.Theseareunsafe practicesthatlimityourresponsetochangingtraffic orroadconditions.Youmightlosecontrolofthe vehicleandhaveacollision.

CAUTION!

Towingthevehicle,coasting,ordrivingforanyother reasonwiththetransmissioninNEUTRALcancause

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

severetransmissiondamage.Referto"Recreational Towing"in"StartingAndOperating"and"TowingA DisabledVehicle"in"WhatToDoInEmergencies" forfurtherinformation.

DRIVE(D)

This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second, and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth and sixth gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range

490 STARTING AND OPERATING

Select (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation” in this section for further information) to select a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the powertrain controller will modify the transmission shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating.

If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger of overheating, the “Transmission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down.

NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a significant additional heat load on the cooling system. Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible gear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL (when stopped in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this excess heat generation.

During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of both the torque converter clutch and the top overdrive gear are inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the "Note" under "Torque Converter Clutch" in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be limited to first and

direct gears only. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.

TransmissionLimpHomeMode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.

If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.

492 STARTING AND OPERATING

ElectronicRangeSelect(ERS)Operation

The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear when the transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmission gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmission will not shift above fourth gear, but will shift through the lower gears normally.

You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-) switch will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping (-) or (+) will change the top available gear.

Close-up of a car interior showing a black connector lever and a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

ColumnShiftLever

To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the ERS (+) switch until the gear limit display disappears from the instrument cluster.

WARNING!

Donotdownshiftforadditionalenginebrakingona slipperysurface. Thedrivewheelscouldlosetheir gripandthevehiclecouldskid,causingacollisionor personalinjury.

NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration (engine braking), simply push and hold the ERS (-) switch. The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.

CAUTION!

When using ERSforengine braking while descending steep grades, be careful not too overspeed the engine. Apply the brakes as needed to prevent engine overspeed.

OverdriveOperation

The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive (fifth and sixth gears). The transmission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present:

• The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature.
• The engine coolant has reached an adequate temperature.

- Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.

- The TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated.

- The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.

494 STARTING AND OPERATING

WhenToUseTOW/HAULMode

When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transmission will automatically downshift (for engine braking) during steady braking maneuvers.

TOW/HAULSwitch

The "TOW/HAUL Indicator Light" will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores normal operation. Normal operation is always the default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is

desired, the switch must be pushed each time the engine is started.

WARNING!

Donotusethe"TOW/HAUL"featurewhendriving inicyorslipperyconditions.Theincreasedengine brakingcancausetherearwheelstoslide,andthe vehicletoswingaroundwiththepossiblelossof vehiclecontrol,whichmaycauseanaccidentpossiblyresultinginpersonalinjuryordeath.

TorqueConverterClutch

A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.

NOTE:

- The torque converter clutch will not engage, until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5km ) of driving]. Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.

- If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission. This condition is normal and will not

496 STARTING AND OPERATING

cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter will refill within five seconds after starting the engine.

Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a manually shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted transfer case. Refer to the operating instructions for your transfer case, located in this section for further information.

Manually Shifted Transfer Case — If Equipped

The transfer case provides four mode positions:

• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2H)
• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4H)
  • Neutral (N)

• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4L)

For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position, see the information below:

2H

Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.

4H

Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

NEUTRAL(N)

Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat

towing behind another vehicle. Refer to "Recreational Towing" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

4L

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H position for normal street and highway conditions such as dry, hard surfaced roads.

When additional traction is required, the 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear drive-shafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by simply moving the gear selector to the desired positions once the appropriate speed and gear requirements are met, refer to "Shifting Procedure – Manually Shifted Transfer Case" in this section for further information.

The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on dry, hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.

The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is in four-wheel drive and that the front and rear drive-shafts are locked together. This light will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L position. There is no light for the 2H or NEUTRAL positions on some models.

When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

498 STARTING AND OPERATING

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can cause damage to the drivetrain.

NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause damage to driveline components.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

NOTE: Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.

WARNING!

Youorotherscouldbeinjuredorkilledifyouleave thevehicleunattendedwiththetransfercaseinthe NEUTRALpositionwithoutfirstfullyengagingthe parkingbrake. ThetransfercaseNEUTRALposition disengagesboththefrontandreadriveshaftsfrom thepowertrainandwillallowthevehicletoroll, evenifthetransmissionisinPARK. Theparking brakeshouldalwaysbeappliedwhenthedriveris notinthevehicle.

ShiftingProcedure—ManuallyShiftedTransfer Case

2HTo4H

Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion, shifts can be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/

disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever.

2HOr4HTo4L

With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause in transfer case NEUTRAL.

NOTE:

- Pausing in transfer case NEUTRAL in vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may require shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while completing the shift. If difficulty occurs, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, hold foot on brake, and turn the engine OFF. Make shift to the desired mode.

- Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped, however difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).

- Do not attempt to shift into or from 4L while the transmission is in gear.

TransferCasePositionIndicatorLight

The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that the front axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are driving.

500 STARTING AND OPERATING

Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Four-Position Switch) — If Equipped

The electronic shift transfer case is operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is located on the instrument panel.

TransferCaseSwitch(Four-Position)

This electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode positions:

• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)
  • Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
  • Neutral (NEUTRAL)

For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position, see the information below:

2WD

Rear Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.

4WDLOCK

Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and

STARTING AND OPERATING 501

rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

4WDLOW

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

NEUTRAL(N)

Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal street and highway conditions on dry, hard surfaced roads.

When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.

Refer to "Shifting Procedure" in this section for specific shifting instructions.

The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.

502 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

TransferCasePositionIndicatorLights

The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and 4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection. When you select a different transfer case position, the indicator lights will do the following:

IfAllOfTheFollowingShiftConditionsAreMet:

1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

IfOneOrMoreOfTheFollowingShiftConditionsAre NotMet:

1. The indicator light for the current position will remain ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash.
3. The transfer case willnotshift.

NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn the control switch back to the current position, wait five seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements, refer to the "Shifting Procedure" for your transfer case, located in this section.

The "SVC 4WD Warning Light" monitors the electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it

means that the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required.

WARNING!

Alwaysengagetheparkingbrakewhenpowering downthevehicleifthe"SVC4WDWarningLight"is illuminated. Notengagingtheparkingbrakemay allowthevehicletoroll,whichmaycausepersonal injury.

NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause damage to driveline components.

When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

WARNING!

Youorotherscouldbeinjuredorkilledifyouleave thevehicleunattendedwiththetransfercaseinthe NEUTRALpositionwithoutfirstfullyengagingthe parkingbrake. ThetransfercaseNEUTRALposition disengagesboththefrontandreadriveshaftsfrom thepowertrainandwillallowthevehicletoroll, evenifthetransmissionisinPARK. Theparking brakeshouldalwaysbeappliedwhenthedriveris notinthevehicle.

504 STARTING AND OPERATING

ShiftingProcedure

NOTE:

• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case will not shift. The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met. To retry a shift: return the control switch back to the original position, make certain all shift requirements have been met, wait five seconds and try the shift again.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met, the current position indicator light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift. When the shift is complete, the position indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

2WDTo4WDLOCK

Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position. Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine either running or off. This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.

NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts between 2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected position indicator light will flash and the original position indicator light will remain ON. At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.

2WDOr4WDLOCKTo4WDLOW

NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.

Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. You can use either of the following procedures:

PreferredProcedure

1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

AlternateProcedure

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

NOTE:

- If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift, then the desired position indicator light will flash continuously while the original position indicator light is ON, until all requirements have been met.

506 STARTING AND OPERATING

- The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON position, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Five-Position Switch) — If Equipped

This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is located on the instrument panel.

TransferCaseSwitch(Five-Position)

This electronically shifted transfer case provides five mode positions:

• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
  • Four-Wheel Drive Automatic High Range (4WD AUTO)

• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)

• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)

For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position, see the information below:

2WD

Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.

4WDAUTO

Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range sends power to the front wheels. The four – wheel drive system will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions.

4WDLOCK

Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

4WDLOW

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

NEUTRAL(N)

Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

508 STARTING AND OPERATING

This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) or four-wheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.

For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO mode can be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but the vehicle's power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD mode.

When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.

Refer to "Shifting Procedure" in this section for specific shifting instructions.

The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.

NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only. Refer to "Recreational Towing" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

TransferCasePositionIndicatorLights

The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD, 4LOW, and 4WD AUTO) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection. When you select a different transfer case position, the indicator lights will do the following:

IfAllOfTheFollowingShiftConditionsAreMet:

1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

IfOneOrMoreOfTheFollowingShiftConditionsAre NotMet:

1. The indicator light for the current position will remain ON.

2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash.

3. The transfer case willnotshift.

NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn the control switch back to the current position, wait five seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements, refer to the "Shifting Procedure" for your transfer case, located in this section.

The "SVC 4WD Warning Light" monitors the electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required.

WARNING!

Alwaysengagetheparkingbrakewhenpowering downthevehicleifthe"SVC4WDWarningLight"is illuminated. Notengagingtheparkingbrakemay allowthevehicletorollwhichmaycausepersonal injuryordeath.

NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to driveline components.

When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

WARNING!

Youorotherscouldbeinjuredorkilledifyouleave thevehicleunattendedwiththetransfercaseinthe NEUTRALpositionwithoutfirstfullyengagingthe parkingbrake.ThetransfercaseNEUTRALposition disengagesboththefrontandreadriveshaftsfrom thepowertrainandwillallowthevehicletoroll, evenifthetransmissionisinPARK.Theparking brakeshouldalwaysbeappliedwhenthedriveris notinthevehicle.

ShiftingProcedure

NOTE:

• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case will not shift. The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met. To retry a shift: return the control switch back to the original position, make certain all shift requirements have been met, wait five seconds and try the shift again.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met, the current position indicator light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.

When the shift is complete, the position indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

2WDTo4WDAUTOOr4WDLOCK

Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position. Shifts between 2WD and 4WD AUTO and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine either running or OFF. This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.

512 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts between 2WD and 4WD AUTO/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected position indicator light will flash and the original position indicator light will remain ON. At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.

2WDOr4WDAUTOOr4WDLOCKTo4WDLOW

NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.

Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of the following procedures:

PreferredProcedure

1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

AlternateProcedure

1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

NOTE:

• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is in process, the desired position indicator light will flash continuously while the original position indicator light is ON, until all requirements have been met.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON position, then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

Four-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Eight Speed Transmission Only) — If Equipped

This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is located on the instrument panel.

TransferCaseSwitch(Four-Position)—EightSpeed TransmissionOnly

514 STARTING AND OPERATING

This electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode positions:

• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)
• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)

For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position, see the information below:

2WD

Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.

4WDLOCK

Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

4WDLOW

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

NEUTRAL(N)

Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal

street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.

When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by pushing the desired position on the 4WD control switch.

Refer to "Shifting Procedure" in this section for specific shifting instructions.

The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.

NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is pushed by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only. Refer to "Recreational Towing" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

TransferCasePositionIndicatorLights

The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and 4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection. When you select a different transfer case position, the indicator lights will do the following:

IfAllOfTheFollowingShiftConditionsAreMet:

1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.

516 STARTING AND OPERATING

1. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

IfOneOrMoreOfTheFollowingShiftConditionsAre NotMet:

1. The indicator light for the current position will remain ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash.
3. The transfer case willnotshift.

NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met. To retry the selection, push the current position, wait five seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements, refer to the "Shifting Procedure" for your transfer case, located in this section.

The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required.

WARNING!

Alwaysengagetheparkingbrakewhenpowering downthevehicleifthe"SVC4WDWarningLight"is illuminated. Notengagingtheparkingbrakemay allowthevehicletorollwhichmaycausepersonal injuryordeath.

NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to driveline components.

When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD

or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

WARNING!

Youorotherscouldbeinjuredorkilledifyouleave thevehicleunattendedwiththetransfercaseinthe NEUTRALpositionwithoutfirstfullyengagingthe parkingbrake.ThetransfercaseNEUTRALposition

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

disengagesboththefrontandredriveshaftsfrom thepowertrainandwillallowthevehicletoroll, evenifthetransmissionisinPARK.Theparking brakeshouldalwaysbeappliedwhenthedriveris notinthevehicle.

ShiftingProcedure

NOTE:

• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case will not shift. The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met, the current position indicator

518 STARTING AND OPERATING

light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift. When the shift is complete, the position indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

2WDTo4WDLOCK

Push the desired position on the 4WD control switch to shift the transfercase. Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after selecting the desired position on the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition must be in the ON position with the engine either running or off. This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.

NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts between 2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected position indicator light will flash and the original position indicator light will remain ON. At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.

2WDOr4WDLOCKTo4WDLOW

NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.

Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of the following procedures:

PreferredProcedure

1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, push the desired position on the transfer case control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

AlternateProcedure

1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.

2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

3. Push the desired position on the transfer case control switch.

4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

NOTE:

- If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is in process, the desired position indicator light will flash continuously while the original position indicator light is ON, until all requirements have been met.

- The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON position, then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

520 STARTING AND OPERATING

Five-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Eight Speed Transmission Only) — If Equipped

This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is located on the instrument panel.

TransferCaseSwitch(Five-Position)—EightSpeed TransmissionOnly

This electronically shifted transfer case provides five mode positions:

• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
• Four-Wheel Drive Automatic High Range (4WD AUTO)
  • Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)
  • Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
  • Neutral (NEUTRAL)

For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position, see the information below:

2WD

Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.

4WDAUTO

Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range sends power to the front wheels. The four-wheel drive system will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions.

4WDLOCK

Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

4WDLOW

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

NEUTRAL(N)

Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) or four-wheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.

For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO mode can be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but the vehicle's power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle

522 STARTING AND OPERATING

senses a loss of traction. Because the front axle is engaged, this mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD mode.

When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished pushing the desired position on the 4WD Control Switch.

Refer to "Shifting Procedure" in this section for specific shifting instructions.

The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.

NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is pushed by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only. Refer to "Recreational Towing" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

TransferCasePositionIndicatorLights

The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD, 4LOW, and 4WD AUTO) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection. When you select a different transfer case position, the indicator lights will do the following:

IfAllOfTheFollowingShiftConditionsAreMet:

1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.

2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.

3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

IfOneOrMoreOfTheFollowingShiftConditionsAre NotMet:

1. The indicator light for the current position will remain ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash.
3. The transfer case willnotshift.

NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met. To retry the selection, push the current position, wait five seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements, refer to the "Shifting Procedure" for your transfer case, located in this section.

The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required.

WARNING!

Alwaysengagetheparkingbrakewhenpowering downthevehicleifthe"SVC4WDWarningLight"is illuminated. Notengagingtheparkingbrakemay allowthevehicletorollwhichmaycausepersonal injuryordeath.

NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to driveline components.

524 STARTING AND OPERATING

When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

WARNING!

Youorotherscouldbeinjuredorkilledifyouleave thevehicleunattendedwiththetransfercaseinthe

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

NEUTRALpositionwithoutfirstfullyengagingthe parkingbrake. ThetransfercaseNEUTRALposition disengagesboththefrontandreadriveshaftsfrom thepowertrainandwillallowthevehicletoroll, evenifthetransmissionisinPARK. Theparking brakeshouldalwaysbeappliedwhenthedriveris notinthevehicle.

ShiftingProcedure

NOTE:

- If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case will not shift. The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met.

STARTING AND OPERATING 525

- If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met, the current position indicator light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift. When the shift is complete, the position indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

2WDTo4WDAUTOOr4WDLOCK

Push the desired position on the 4WD Control Switch to shift the transfer case. Shifts between 2WD and 4WD AUTO and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after selecting the desired position on the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition switch must be in the ON position

with the engine either running or OFF. This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.

NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts between 2WD and 4WD AUTO/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected position indicator light will flash and the original position indicator light will remain ON. At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.

2WDOr4WDAUTOOr4WDLOCKTo4WDLOW

NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.

526 STARTING AND OPERATING

Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of the following procedures:

PreferredProcedure

1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, push the desired position on the transfer case control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

AlternateProcedure

1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.

2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

3. Push the desired position on the transfer case control switch.

4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

NOTE:

• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is in process, the desired position indicator light will flash continuously while the original position indicator light is ON, until all requirements have been met.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON position, then the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

STARTING AND OPERATING 527

AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (1500 MODELS) — IF EQUIPPED

Description

The air suspension system provides full time load leveling capability along with the benefit of being able to adjust vehicle height by the push of a button.

AirSuspensionSwitch

1 — Up Button
2 — Down Button
3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator (Customer selectable)
4 — Normal Ride Height Indicator (Customer selectable)
5 — Off-Road 1 Indicator (Customer selectable)
6 — Off-Road 2 Indicator (Customer selectable)

528 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h).

• NormalRideHeight(NRH)– This is the standard position of the suspension and is meant for normal driving.
• Off-Road1(OR1)(Raisesthevehicleapproximately 1in[26mm])– This position should be the primary position for all off-road driving until Off Road 2 (OR2) is needed. A smoother and more comfortable ride will result. To enter OR1, push the "Up" button once from the NRH position while the vehicle speed is below 35 mph (56 km/h). When in the OR1 position, if the vehicle speed remains between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle

will be automatically lowered to NRH. Off-Road 1 may not be available due to vehicle payload, an EVIC/DID message will be displayed when this occurs. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

- Off-Road2(OR2)(Raisesthevehicleapproximately 2in[51mm])– This position is intended for off-roading use only where maximum ground clearance is required. To enter OR2, push the “Up” button twice from the NRH position or once from the OR1 position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR2, if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to OR1. Off-Road 2 may not be available due to vehicle payload, an EVIC/DID message will be displayed

when this occurs. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

• If the vehicle is in OFFROAD1 or OFFROAD2 setting, be aware of your surroundings, you may not have the clearance required for certain areas and vehicle damage may occur.
• AeroMode(Lowersthevehicleapproximately.6in [15mm])– This position provides improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle

speed remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and 35 mph (56 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph (48 km/h).

NOTE: Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through vehicle settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) when equipped with Uconnect 3.0, or your Uconnect® Radio when equipped with UConnect® 5.0, 8.4A, or 8.4AN. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

- Entry/ExitMode(Lowersthevehicleapproximately2in [51mm]) – This position lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the "Down" button

once from the NRH while the vehicle speed is below 33 mph (53 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to lower. If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60 seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the Entry/Exit change will be cancelled. To return to Normal Height Mode, push the "Up" button once while in Entry/Exit or drive the vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h). Entry/Exit mode may not be available due to vehicle payload, an EVIC/DID message will be displayed when this occurs. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

NOTE:Entry/Exit mode may be achieved using your key fob for easier entry/loading. Refer to “A Word About Your Keys” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

- When in ENTRY/EXIT setting, be aware of your surroundings, you may not have the clearance required for certain areas and vehicle damage may occur.

The system requires that the ignition be in ON/RUN position or the engine running for all user requested changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors, must be closed. If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle is lowering the change will not be completed until the open door(s) is closed.

This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into on-coming traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first and then the front. When lowering the vehicle, the front will move down first and then the rear.

After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the air suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a proper appearance.

To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be done through the radio. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

WARNING!

Theairsuspensionsystemusesahighpressure volumeofairtooperatethesystem.Toavoidpersonalinjuryordamagetothesystem,seeyour authorizeddealerforservice.

Air Suspension Modes

The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect the system in unique situations:

Tire/JackMode

To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect®

532 STARTING AND OPERATING

Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" if equipped with a touch screen radio for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.

TransportMode

To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension system has a feature which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable the automatic load leveling system. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" or "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" if equipped with a touch screen radio for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.

WheelAlignmentMode

Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" or "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" if equipped with a touch screen radio for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.

ProtectionMode

In order to “protect” the air suspension system, the vehicle will enter Protection Mode when load leveling cannot be achieved. Some driving may be required to clear the protection mode telltale in the EVIC/DID. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel" or "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" if equipped with a touch screen radio for further information.

NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be done through the radio. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) Display Messages

When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will appear in the EVIC/DID display. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error has been detected.

Operation

AirSuspensionSwitch

1 — Up Button
2 — Down Button
3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator (Customer selectable)
4 — Normal Ride Height Indicator (Customer selectable)
5 — Off-Road 1 Indicator (Customer selectable)
6 — Off-Road 2 Indicator (Customer selectable)

534 STARTING AND OPERATING

The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator lamps will show a position which the system is working to achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are flashing, the highest flashing indicator lamp is the position the system is working to achieve. When lowering, if multiple indicators are flashing, the lowest solid indicator lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.

Pushing the "UP" button once will move the suspension one position higher from the current position, assuming all conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine running, speed below threshold, etc). The "UP" button can be pushed multiple times, each push will raise the requested level by one position up to a maximum position of OR2 or the highest position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc).

Pushing the "DOWN" button once will move the suspension one position lower from the current level, assuming all conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine running, doors closed, speed below threshold, etc). The "DOWN" button can be pushed multiple times, each push will lower the requested level by one position down to a minimum of Entry/Exit Mode or the lowest position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)

Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lamps and EVIC/DID messages will operate the same for automatic changes and user requested changes.

• Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 3, 4, 5 and 6 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2.

• Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 3, 4 and 5 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in OR1.

• Normal Ride Height (NRH)/Aero Mode – Indicator lamps 3 and 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in this position.

• Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in Entry Exit Mode. Entry/Exit mode can be requested up to 33 mph (53 km/h). If vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph (24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will flash and indicator lamp 3 will remain solid until Entry/Exit Mode is achieved at which point indicator lamp 4 will turn off.
• Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illuminated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.
• Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 3 and 6 will be illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.

- Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 3 and 4 will be illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.

AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (2500/3500 MODELS) — IF EQUIPPED

Description

The air suspension system is a rear leveling ride height system. The main purpose of this system is to maintain the truck's rear ride height level.

536 STARTING AND OPERATING

RearLevelingRideHeightSwitch

NormalRideHeight(NRH)– This is the standard position of the suspension and is meant for normal driving.

TrailerMode(Lowersthevehicleapproximately1in (25mm)—This position will lower the rear suspension and provide load leveling for all loading conditions including towing a trailer. After the “ALT TRAILER HEIGHT” button has been pushed, it will blink continuously until the trailer height has been achieved.

The system requires that the ignition be in ON/RUN position or the engine running with zero vehicle speed for all user requested changes.

After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the air suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure a proper appearance.

NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be done through the radio. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

WARNING!

Theairsuspensionsystemusesahighpressure volumeofairtooperatethesystem.Toavoidpersonalinjuryordamagetothesystem,seeyour authorizeddealerforservice.

Air Suspension Modes

The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect the system in unique situations:

Tire/JackMode

To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling

to be disabled. This mode is intended to be used with engine running. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" or "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" if equipped with a touch screen radio for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.

TransportMode

To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension system has a feature which will put the vehicle below Normal Ride Height (NRH) and disable the automatic load leveling system. This mode is intended to be used with engine running. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" or "Uconnect®

Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" if equipped with a touch screen radio for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.

WheelAlignmentMode

Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" or "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" if equipped with a touch screen radio for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine running.

ProtectionMode

In order to “protect” the air suspension system, the vehicle will enter Protection Mode when load leveling cannot be achieved. Some driving may be required to clear the protection mode telltale in the EVIC/DID. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” if equipped with a touch screen radio for further information.

NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be done through the radio. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) Display Messages

When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will appear in the EVIC/DID display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error has been detected.

Operation

Pushing the Trailer Mode button once, while at Normal Ride Height (NRH) will lower the vehicle to trailer level.

NOTE: The LED will continuously blink until vehicle trailer level that been achieved.

Pushing the Trailer Mode again will raise the vehicle to Normal Ride Height (NRH).

NOTE: The LED will continuously blink until Normal Ride Height (NRH) has been achieved.

• Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illuminated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.
• Tire/Jack Mode – No indicator lamps will be illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.
• Wheel Alignment Mode – No indicator lamps will be illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle.

This vehicle is equipped with electronically locking front and rear differentials. These differentials, when engaged, mechanically lock together the axle shafts forcing the wheels to spin at an equal rate. This allows the vehicle to

540 STARTING AND OPERATING

maintain its momentum and prevents it from becoming stuck. The locking front and rear differentials should only be engaged during low-speed, extreme off-road situations where one wheel is likely to not be in contact with the ground. It is not recommended to drive the vehicle with the differentials locked on pavement due to the reduced ability to turn and speed limitations.

CAUTION!

• Donotlockthefrontorrearaxleonhardsurfaced roads. The ability to osteer the vehicle is reduced and damage to the drivetrain may occur when the axles are locked on hardsurfaced roads.
• Donottrytolocktherearaxleifthevehicleis stuckandthetiresarespinning.Youcandamage drivetraincomponents.Locktherearaxlebefore attemptingssituationsornavigatingterrain,which couldpossiblycausethevehicletobecomestuck.

The locking axles are controlled by the axle locker switch.

The switch has three positions, AXLE UNLOCK, REAR LOCK, and FRONT/REAR LOCK. Under normal driving conditions, the switch should be left in the AXLE UNLOCK position. In the AXLE UNLOCK position, the front and rear axles are unlocked. In the REAR LOCK position, the rear axle is locked. In the FRONT/REAR LOCK position, the front and rear axles are locked.

NOTE: Even when the axles are in the AXLE UNLOCK position, the limited slip differential in the rear axle still provides torque biasing capability for moderate low traction environments.

During the command to lock the axle, the indicator light will flash until the axle is locked. After the lock command has been successfully executed, the light will remain on solid.

To lock the rear axle, place the vehicle in 4LO. Refer to "Four Wheel Drive Operation" in "Starting And Operating" for further information. Move the axle locker switch position to REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The RR indicator light will remain on when the rear axle is locked.

NOTE: Left to right wheel speed difference may be necessary to allow the axle to fully lock. If the indicator light is flashing after placing the switch in the REAR LOCK or FRONT/REAR LOCK position, drive the vehicle in a turn or on loose gravel to expedite the locking action.

WARNING!

Donotusethelockedaxlepositionfornormal driving.Alockedfrontaxleisintendedforoff-road drivingonly.Lockingthefrontaxleduringon-road

WARNING!(Continued)

drivingwillreducethesteeringability.Thiscould causeacollisionandyoumaybeseriouslyinjured.

To lock the front axle; move the axle locker switch to FRONT/REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The indicator light will be solid when the front axle is locked.

NOTE: The rear axle must be locked before the front axle will lock.

To unlock the front axle; move the axle locker switch to REAR LOCK. The FRONT/REAR LOCK indicator light will go out when the axle is unlocked.

(Continued)

542 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: The axle lockers could be torque locked due to side to side loads on the axle. Driving slowly while turning the steering wheel from a left hand turn to a right hand turn or driving in REVERSE for a short distance may be required to release the torque lock and unlock the axles.

To unlock the rear axle; move the axle locker switch to AXLE UNLOCK. The REAR LOCK indicator light will go out when the rear axle is unlocked.

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater front suspension travel in off-road situations.

Due to the use of taller springs, this vehicle has an increased ride height of approximately 1.9 in (48.3 mm) in the front and 1.5 in (38.1 mm) in the rear. A major advantage to increasing ride height is the positive effect it has on approach/departure and break over angles.

This system is controlled by the electronic control sway bar switch located on the instrument panel.

1 — On Road
2 — Off Road

STARTING AND OPERATING 543

The switch has two positions; On-Road and Off-Road. The system is normally in the On-Road mode, indicated by a solid green light. The stabilizer/sway bar should remain in the On-Road mode during normal driving conditions.

WARNING!

Donotdisconnectthestabilizerbaranddriveon hardsurfacedroadsoratspeedsabove18mph (29km/h),youmaylosecontrolofthevehicle,which couldresultinseriousinjuryordeath.Thefront stabilizerbarenhancesvehiclestabilityandisnecessaryformaintainingcontrolofthevehicle.The systemmonitorsvehiclespeedandwillattemptto reconnectthestabilizerbaratspeedsover18mph (29km/h).Thisisindicatedbyaflashingoffroad lightandsolidonroadlight.Oncevehiclespeedis reducedbelow14mph(22km/h),thesystemwill attempttoreturntotheOff-Roadmode.

To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4HI or 4LO as shown in "Four Wheel Drive Operation" and press the right hand Off Road stabilizer/sway bar button to obtain the Off-Road position. The amber indicator light will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been fully disconnected.

NOTE: The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due to left and right suspension height differences. This condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/reconnect, the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned. This alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side.

To return to the On-Road mode; press the left hand On Road stabilizer/sway bar button.

544 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

Ifthestabilizer/swaybarwillnotreturntoOn-Road mode,vehiclestabilityisgreatlyreduced.Donot attempttodrivethevehicleover18mph(29km/h). Drivingfasterthan18mph(29km/h)maycauseloss ofcontrolofthevehicle,whichcouldresultin seriousinjuryordeath.Contactyourlocalservice centerforassistance.

Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle Characteristics

Your vehicle has excellent on and off-road capabilities. These off-road capabilities will allow you to explore those wilderness trails where few travel, providing a source of exciting and satisfying recreation. Before you venture out, you should contact your local governmental

agency to determine the designated off-road vehicle (ORV) trails or recreation areas. You should always tread lightly and only use established roads, trails or ORV recreational areas. The National Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management or local Department of Natural Resources are a wealth of information and usually have maps with marked trails.

SkidPlatesAndUnderbodyProtection

Steel skid plates protect the major driveline components of the truck including the fuel tank, transfer case and steering damper. In addition, this vehicle is equipped with boxed cross members and fore/aft rails. This additional protection allows the vehicle to be utilized in severe off-road situations that would be considered impassable by a normal truck.

RampTravelIndex(RTI)

The ramp travel index is the distance, in inches, that you can drive your vehicle with one wheel on a 20-degree ramp without lifting any other wheel off the ground. This distance up the ramp divided by the wheelbase of the vehicle and multiplied by 1,000 is the RTI. This vehicle has an RTI of 510, which means you can articulate one front wheel 26 inches (66 cm) in the air while the other three wheels remain in contact with the ground.

WaterFordingCharacteristics

Water fording characteristic is the vehicle's ability to cross a body of still water, where the powertrain and drivetrain are safe from water ingestion. This vehicle has high water fording characteristics with the ability to cross a pool of water, without stopping, 24 inches (60 cm) deep at a maximum speed of 10 mph (16 km/h) and a pool of water 30 inches (76 cm) deep at a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h), both with an entrance ramp angle of 1.3 degrees.

CAUTION!

Thedoorsillheightis25inches.Watermayintrude intotheinteriorofthevehicleatgreaterdepths.

Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation

Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous use of the brake and throttle (two footed driving).

When climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects, using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique is also used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline.

TheBasicsOfOff-RoadDriving

You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-road. You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding. There are many types of surface conditions: hard packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,

546 STARTING AND OPERATING

mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle's steering, handling and traction. Controlling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases there are no road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe and what isn't. When on a trail you should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over.

CAUTION!

Neverparkyourvehicleoverdrygrassorother combustiblematerials.Theheatfromyourvehicle exhaustsystemcouldcauseafire.

WARNING!

Alwayswearyourseatbeltandfirmlytiedown cargo. Unsecuredcargocanbecomeprojectilesinan off-roadsituation.

WhenToUseLowRange

When driving off-road, shift into 4L (Low Range) for additional traction or to improve handling and control on slippery or difficult terrain. Due to the lower gearing, low range will allow the engine to operate in a higher power range. This will allow you to idle over obstacles and down hills, with improved control and less effort. Also, use 4L (Low Range) in rain, ice, snow, mud, sand, to get heavy loads rolling, improve traction, or whenever 4H (High Range) traction will not do the job.

Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand

There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less responsive to steering, acceleration and braking inputs. Therefore you should accelerate slowly, leave greater stopping distances and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a slow constant steady pace. The key is to maintain the vehicle's momentum.

- Snow– In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4L (Low Range) if necessary. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than a 14 turn quickly back and forth, while still applying throttle. This will allow the tires to get a fresh "bite" and help maintain your momentum.

CAUTION!

Onicyorslipperyroads, donotdownshiftathigh engineRPMsorvehiclespeedsbecauseenginebrakingmaycauseskiddingandlossofcontrol.

- Mud– Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires and is very difficult to get through. You should use 4L (Low Range) with a gear low enough to maintain your momentum without shifting. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than a 14 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction. Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck. They are normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice before entering any mud hole, get out and determine how deep it is, if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck.

548 STARTING AND OPERATING

- Sand– Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pressure. When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail maintain your vehicle's momentum and do not stop. The key to driving in soft sand using the appropriate tire pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle's momentum. If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire surface area. Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and handling, while driving on the soft sand, but you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way to air the tires back up prior to reducing the pressure.

CAUTION!

Reduced tire pressures may cause unseating and total loss of air pressure. Toreducether is of tire unseating, while a reduced tire pressure, reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.

Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High Points)

While driving off road, you will encounter many types of terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different types of obstacles. Before proceeding review the path ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong. Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it makes contact with the object. Apply the

throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the object.

WARNING!

Crossingobstaclescancauseabruptsteeringsystem loadingwhichcouldcauseyoutoloosecontrolof yourvehicle.

UsingASpotter

There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or determine the correct path. Determining the correct path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting many obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and guide you through.

CrossingLargeRocks

When approaching large rocks, choose a path which ensures you drive over the largest with your tires. This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires.

CAUTION!

• Neverattempttostraddlearockthatislarge enoughtostrikeyouraxlesorundercarriage.
• Neverattempttodriveoverarockwhichislarge enoughtocontactthedoorsills.

CrossingARavine,Gully,Ditch,WashoutOrRut

When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large rut, the angled approach is the key to maintaining your

550 STARTING AND OPERATING

vehicle's mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45-degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle independently. You need to use caution when crossing large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created. You should now be able to drive out following the trench you just created at a 45-degree angle.

WARNING!

Thereisanincreasedriskofrolloverwhencrossing anobstacle, atanyangle, withsteepsides.

CrossingLogs

To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the log. While climbing the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your tires. Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.

CAUTION!

Donotattempttocrossalogwithagreaterdiameter thantherunninggroundclearanceorthevehiclewill becomehighcentered.

GettingHighCentered

If you get hung up or high centered on an object, get out of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung up on, where it is contacting the underbody and

STARTING AND OPERATING 551

what is the best direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high point when you let the vehicle down. You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object.

CAUTION!

Winchingorrockingthevehicleoffhardobjects increasestheriskofunderbodydamage.

Hill Climbing

Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good understanding of your abilities and your vehicle's limitations. Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep to climb and should not be attempted. You should always feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You should always climb hills straight up and down. Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle.

- BeforeClimbingASteepHill– As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness. Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and down? What is on top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything looks good and you feel confident, then change transmission into a lower gear, shift the transfer case into 4L (Low) and proceed with caution. You should use first gear and 4L (Low Range) for very steep hills.

- DrivingUpHill– Once you have determined your ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and

552 STARTING AND OPERATING

apply more power as you start up the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade, the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control. If the front end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground. As you approach the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more than a 14 turn quickly back and forth. This will provide a fresh "bite" into the surface and will usually provide enough traction to complete the climb. If you do not make it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes.

WARNING!

Neverattempttoclimbahillatanangleorturn aroundonasteepgrade. Drivingacrossanincline increasestheriskofarollover, which may result in severe injury or death.

- Driving Down Hill – Before driving down a steep hill you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow controlled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends too fast? If you feel confident in your ability to proceed then make sure you are in 4L (Low Range) with the transmission in first gear (manually select first gear on automatic transmissions) and proceed with caution. Allow engine braking to control the

descent and apply your brakes if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.

WARNING!

DonotdescendasteepgradeinNEUTRAL.Use vehiclebrakesinconjunctionwithenginebraking. Descendingagradetoofastcouldcauseyoutolose controlandbeseriouslyinjuredorkilled.

- DrivingAcrossAnIncline– If at all possible avoid driving across an incline. If it is necessary, know your vehicle's abilities. Driving across an incline places more weight on the down hill wheels, which increases the possibilities of a down hill slide or rollover. Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable soils. If possible transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly up or down.

WARNING!

Drivingacrossaninclineincreasetheriskofa rollover,whichmayresultinsevereinjury.

- IfYouStallOrBeginToLoseHeadway– If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine and transmission to help regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.

WARNING!

If the engineestallsoryouloseheadwayor cannot make it to the top of a fast ephill or grade, never attempt to turnaround. Todos may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle, which may result in severe injury. Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE. Never backdown a hill in NEU-TRAL using only the vehicle brakes. Never drive diagonally across a hill, always drivestraight up or down.

Driving Through Water

Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water. Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be attempted when necessary, in a safe responsible manner. You should only drive through areas which are designated and approved. You should tread lightly and

avoid damage to the environment. You should know your vehicle's abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong. You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it. Determine if it has ingested water first. The key to any crossing is low and slow. You want to use first gear in 4L (Low Range) and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed (3-5 mph [5–8 km/h] maximum) and light throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate through the crossing. After crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle differentials, you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion.

CAUTION!

Wateringestionintotheaxles,transmission,transfer case,engineorvehicleinteriorcanoccurifyoudrive

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

toofastorthroughtoodeepofwater.Watercancause permanentdamagetoengine,drivelineorother vehiclecomponentsandyourbrakeswillbeless effectiveoncewetand/ormuddy.

- BeforeYouCrossAnyTypeOfWater– As you approach any type of water you need to determine if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick. You need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current and bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy waters, check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the water depth, current and bottom conditions. On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in,

effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle. Be sure to consider this when determining the depth and the ability to safely cross.

- CrossingPuddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other Standing Water– Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters. These water types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate water depth, approach angle, and bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery. If you are able to determine you can safely cross, than proceed using the low and slow method.

CAUTION!

Muddywaterscanreducethecoolingsystemeffectivenessbydepositingdebrisontotheradiator.

• CrossingDitches,Streams,ShallowRiversOrOther FlowingWater– Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow water. Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow water, a high current can still wash the dirt out from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy. There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths greater than the vehicle's running ground clearance. You should never attempt to cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle's running ground clearance. Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle downstream out of control if the water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of the vehicle's body. Before you proceed determine the speed of the current, the water's depth, approach angle, bottom condition and if there are any obstacles, then cross at an angle

heading slightly upstream using the low and slow technique.

WARNING!

Neverdrivethroughfastmovingdeepwater.Itcan pushyourvehicledownstream,sweepingitoutof control.Thiscouldputyouandyourpassengersat riskofinjuryordrowning.

Airing Down For Off-Road Driving

Running lower tire pressure off-road can improve your ride comfort and vehicle traction. Reducing the tire air pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly, improving its surface area for better flotation and ability to mold or form to the ground contour. Different terrain, tires, and vehicles require different tire pressure. Hard surfaces like rock and heavier vehicles require higher pressures than

softer surfaces such as sand and lighter vehicles. You will need to experiment to determine what is right for your situation. It is easier and faster to let air out than it is to replace it so, start high and lower it as required. Remember you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on road or at highway conditions. Be sure you have a way to return the tires to their normal on road air pressure.

CAUTION!

Reduced tire pressure increase estheriskoftired damage and may cause unreseating with total loss of air pressure. Toreducetheriskoftireunseating, while at areduced tire pressure, drive at slower speeds and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.

Vehicle Recovery

If you drive off-road, you may encounter a situation where you will need to recover your vehicle. Vehicle recovery should always be given consideration before attempting a questionable obstacle. You should never go off-road driving without the ability to recover your vehicle from a situation. Having another vehicle with you usually works best for most situations. The first thing to do is assess the situation. Why are you stuck? Are you hung up on something? Would it be easier to go forward or to go backward? Can you still move the vehicle? Is there an anchor point to winch to? Are you alone or do you have another vehicle to help? Is there high risk of vehicle damage during the recovery process? Answering these questions will help you determine the best method of recovery. If you can still move the vehicle slightly and the only issue is slick ground, then rock cycling your vehicle would be the first choice. If you have ample room, an additional vehicle and there is low risk of

558 STARTING AND OPERATING

vehicle impingement on the surroundings, then using a tow strap to the vehicle tow hooks would be fast and easy. If the vehicle is severely hung up or in a situation where great care needs to be taken during the recovery, then nothing can do the job better than a winch. If you are severely hung up on something you should jack the vehicle up and stack something under the wheels to allow the vehicle to roll off the object without causing further damage. This should be tried before attempting any recovery method.

CAUTION!

Pullingthevehicleoffanobstacle, withoutfirst clearingtheobject, mayresultinadditionalunderbodydamage.

- RockCyclingYourVehicle– Rock cycling your vehicle is one of the easiest, fastest and most commonly used methods. This simply involves shifting your vehicle from DRIVE to REVERSE, while applying throttle after each shift. During this process, for additional traction, try turning your steering wheel quickly left and right no more than a 14 turn. If you are stuck in mud, sand, or snow try spinning your tires during this process to clean the debris from the tread and improve the traction. You want to create a rocking motion with the vehicle. This helps build vehicle momentum, which hopefully gets you out. Remember to ease off and on the accelerator before and after the shift. If after a few rock cycles your vehicle is not free, stop and try another method of recovery. Continuous rock cycling will only cause unnecessary damage to your vehicle and the environment.

CAUTION!

Damagecanoccurwhenspinningyourtiresatan excessivehighspeed.Donotspinyourtiresfaster thananindicated30mph(48km/h).

- UsingTheTowHooksWithATowStrap– Tow straps are a quick and easy way to recover your vehicle from minor situations if you have a secondary vehicle which is not stuck. The tow hooks on your vehicle are designed to take the abusive force generated during vehicle recovery. Do not use the bumper or any other vehicle component as an attachment point. Using tow straps requires coordination between the two drivers. Good communication and line of sight are required for a safe recovery. First connect the tow strap to the correct attachment points on both vehicles. There should be a least 20 to 30 feet (6 to 9 meters) between the vehicles to allow for a safe recovery. If necessary join two tow straps together using a 1 12 inch hard

wood dowel. This will keep the straps from becoming knotted and is safer than using a clevis pin if the strap breaks. Next have the tow vehicle backup, leaving two to three feet worth of slack in the strap. Then the tow vehicle, using light throttle, should accelerate tightening the strap providing the pulling force needed to free the vehicle. The vehicle being recovered should assist in the recovery, at the time of the snap, by slowly spinning the tires in the same direction as the pulling vehicle. After the vehicle becomes free, the driver of the previously stuck vehicle should signal they are free and should hit their brakes stopping both vehicles. The driver of the pulling vehicle should let off the throttle without using the brakes, once signaled by the other driver. This sequence is important to avoid having the recovered vehicle hit the pulling vehicle.

WARNING!

Neverusetowstrapswithendhooksorlinktwo strapswithaclevispin.Theseheavymetalobjects couldbecomeprojectilesifastrapbreaks,which couldcausesevereinjury.Neverleavemorethanttwo orthreefeetofslackinthestrap.Moreslackthanthis greatlyincreasetheriskofinjuryandvehicledam- age.Alwayskeepeveryoneatleast30feetawayfrom astrappingorwinchingsituation.

- Winching(ReferTo"WinchOperation"ForAdditionalInformation)- Winching is most commonly used in the following situations: there is no support vehicle available, a high controlled force is required to recover the vehicle, there is a high risk of environmental or vehicle damage, or where nothing else seems to work. A winch can deliver a high pulling force with a great deal of control. It allows you to walk the vehicle

out of the situation in a slow controlled manner. This control works well for avoiding further vehicle damage. Once you decide it is time to use the winch look for a good anchor point. It needs to be strong enough to hold more than the vehicle's weight and provide a direction of pull as straight as possible. Use block and tackle if necessary to improve the angle of pull or increase the winch's pulling force. If the anchor point is a tree use a strap around its base and hook the cable to the strap. If it is another vehicle, then place that vehicle in PARK and block the front tires. If you cannot find an anchor point within reach try using your spare tire by burying it. Once you have determined an anchor point hook up the cable, ensuring there are a least five wraps of cable left on the drum, and place a floor mat or something else over the strung out cable. Placing something over the strung out cable helps keep the cable on the ground if it breaks. Next, place the vehicle in first gear and apply a very light throttle

as you power the winch in. Be careful not to allow slack in the cable as you recover the vehicle. Do not try to guide the cable into the drum. If it starts to bunch up on one end, let it. You can re-spool the cable afterwards. Never use a winch cable as a tow strap and always stand back while winching.

WARNING!

Winhcablesareunderhightensionwheninuseand canbecomeaprojectileiftheyfail.Neverstandover orstraddlethewinchcable.Neverjerkor overload thewinchcable.Neverstandinfrontofthevehicle whilewinching.Failuretofollowtheseinstructions canresultinseriousorfatalinjury.

After Driving Off-Road

Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it.

• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required.

• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual.

• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.

• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.

WARNING!

Abrasivematerialinanypartofthebrakesmaycause excessivewearorunpredictablebraking.Youmight nothavefullbrakingpowerwhenyouneeditto preventacollision.Ifyouhavebeenoperatingyour vehicleindirtyconditions,getyourbrakeschecked andcleanedasnecessary.

- If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation.

LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL

The limited-slip differential provides additional traction on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when there is a difference between the traction characteristics of the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit performs similarly to a conventional differential. On slippery surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better traction.

The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator

will supply maximum traction. When starting with only one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight momentary application of the parking brake may be necessary to gain maximum traction.

WARNING!

Onvehiclesequippedwithalimited-slipdifferential neverruntheenginewithonerearwheeloffthe groundsincethevehiclemaydrivethroughtherear wheelremainingontheground.Youcouldlose controlofthevehicle.

Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a turn.

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

Acceleration

Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving) wheels.

WARNING!

Rapidacceleration on slipperysurfaces is dangerous. Unequaltraction can cause sudden pulling of therear wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerates slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, looses and, etc.).

564 STARTING AND OPERATING

Traction

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:

• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy.
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
• Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.

Flowing/Rising Water

WARNING!

Donotdriveonoracrossaroadorpathwherewater isflowingand/orrising(asinstormrun-off).Flowingwatercanwearawaytheroadorpath'ssurface andcauseyourvehicletosinkintodeeperwater. Furthermore,flowingand/orrisingwatercancarry

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

yourvehicleawayswiftly.Failuretofollowthis warningmayresultininjuriesthatareseriousor fataltoyou,yourpassengers,andothersaroundyou.

Shallow Standing Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions and Warnings before doing so.

WARNING!

• Drivingthroughstandingwaterlimitsyourvehicle'stractioncapabilities.Donotexceed5mph (8km/h)whendrivingthroughstandingwater.
• Drivingthroughstandingwaterlimitsyourvehicle'sbrakingcapabilities,whichincreasesstopping

WARNING!(Continued)

distances.Therefore,afterdrivingthroughstandingwater,driveslowlyandlightlypressonthe brakepedalseveraltimestodrythebrakes.

- Failuretofollowthesewarningsmayresultin injuriesthatareseriousorfataltoyou,yourpassengers,andothersaroundyou.

CAUTION!

• Alwayscheckthedepthofthestandingwater beforedrivingthroughit.Neverdrivethrough standingwaterthatisdeeperthanthebottomof thetirerimsmountedonthevehicle.
• Determinetheconditionoftheroadorthepath thatisunderwaterandifthereareanyobstaclesin thewaybeforedrivingthroughthestandingwater.

(Continued)

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Donotexceed5mph(8km/h)whendriving throughstandingwater.Thiswillminimizewave effects.
• Drivingthroughstandingwatermaycausedamage toyourvehicle'sdrivetraincomponents.Always inspectyourvehicle'sfluids(i.e.,engineoil,transmission,axle,etc.)forsignsofcontamination(i.e., fluidthatismilkyorfoamyinappearance)after drivingthroughstandingwater.Donotcontinueto operatethevehicleifanyfluidappearscontaminated,asthismayresultinfurtherdamage.Such damageisnotcoveredbytheNewVehicleLimited Warranty.
• Gettingwaterinsideyourvehicle'senginecan causeittolockupandstallout,andcauseserious internaldamagetotheengine.Suchdamageisnot coveredbytheNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS

Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep hills or driving diagonally across a hill or slope. If natural obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill, choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible. Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and cautiously.

If you must back down a hill, back straight down using REVERSE gear. Never back down in NEUTRAL or diagonally across the hill.

When driving over sand, mud, and other soft terrain, shift to low gear and drive steadily. Apply the accelerator slowly to avoid spinning the wheels.

Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of driving.

After Driving Off-Road

Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is

always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it.

• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.

- After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.

WARNING!

Abrasivematerialinanypartofthebrakesmaycause excessivewearorunpredictablebraking.Youmight nothavefullbrakingpowerwhenyouneeditto preventacollision.Ifyouhavebeenoperatingyour vehicleindirtyconditions,getyourbrakeschecked andcleanedasnecessary.

- If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation.

568 STARTING AND OPERATING

Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle recovery winch. This winch uses the electrical power from the vehicle charging system to power a motor that winds wire rope into the winch drum via planetary gear reduction. By nature, a winch is capable of generating very high forces and should be used with care. Do not operate the winch without reading and understanding the complete winch owner's manual.

TensioningTheWireRope

The winch rope must be properly tensioned before use. Follow the instructions below to tension the rope:

1. Un-spool the wire rope leaving five wraps of rope on the winch drum.

2. Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point.

CAUTION!

Becertaintheanchorwillwithstandtheloadrequiredtotensionthewirerope.

1. Apply at least 500 lbs (227 kg) of tension to the rope while winding the rope. Always use care to ensure the rope does not pile up on one side of the drum and is neatly wound onto the drum.

CAUTION!

Wireropemustspoolonthewinchdruminthe directionindicatedonthedrumrotationdecalonthe winch.

LowVoltageInterrupt

Your winch is equipped with a device that will interrupt winch function if the vehicle charging system voltage drops to a low level. The winch will not power-in or out for 30 seconds if this device is tripped. If the interrupt is tripped, the vehicle should be operated at high idle for a few minutes to allow the vehicle charging system to recover before continuing to winch.

WinchMotorThermalProtection

Your winch is equipped with a thermal protection device in the motor. If the winch is operated for an excessive duration, the device may interrupt motor function to protect the winch motor. During this time the winch will power-out but will not power-in. Allow the winch motor to cool for a few minutes before continuing to winch. The winch will resume normal function once the motor cools.

570 STARTING AND OPERATING

Understanding The Features Of Your Winch

054000966

WinchComponents

STARTING AND OPERATING 571

1. Motor: The winch motor is powered by the vehicle charging system and features a thermal protection switch that automatically stops motor function in the power-in direction if the motor gets too hot.
2. RemoteSocket: The remote socket allows the remote control to be attached to the control pack to allow the winch to function.
3. WinchDrumWithIntegralBrake:The winch drum allows the wire rope to be stored on the winch and transmits force to the wire rope. The winch is equipped with an integral brake that will stop rotation of the winch drum if the winch motor is stopped.
4. 3-Stage Planetary Gear Set: Provides balance between speed and pulling power.

5. WireRope: The wire rope allows the winch to be connected to an anchor to provide a pulling force.

6. Clutch Lever: The clutch lever allows the winch drum to be disconnected from the winch motor to allow the wire rope to be pulled from the winch by hand.

7. RemoteControl: The remote control provides the interface between the winch operator and the winch. The remote control provides the ability to power the winch in, out, and stop the winch. To operate the winch, the toggle switch is pressed down to power the winch in and up to power the winch out. The winch will stop if the switch is left in the neutral (center) position.

CAUTION!

If not installed, the hook strap must be placed on the hook.

Fairlead: The fairlead acts as a guide for the wire rope and minimizes damage to the rope.

572 STARTING AND OPERATING

Winch Accessories

The following accessories are necessary to attach the winch to anchors, change direction of pull, and for safe winching.

Gloves: Wire rope, through use, will develop "barbs" which can slice skin. It is extremely important to wear protective gloves while operating the winch or handling the wire rope. Avoid loose fitting clothes or anything that could become entangled in the wire rope and other moving parts.

Snatch/BlockPulley:Used properly, the multi-purpose snatch block allows you to (1) increase the winch's pulling power; and (2) change your pulling direction without

damaging the wire rope. Proper use of the snatch block is covered in "Before You Pull."

Clevis/D-Shackles: The D-Shackle is a safe means of connecting the looped ends of cables, straps and snatch blocks. The shackle's pin is threaded to allow easy removal.

TreeTrunkProtector: Typically made of tough, high-quality nylon, it provides the operator an attachment point for the winch rope to a wide variety of anchor points and objects, as well as protect living trees.

Operating Your Winch

WARNING!

Failuretoobserveanyofthesewarningsregarding properwinchusagemayresultinsevereinjury.

• Alwaysusesuppliedhookstraptoholdthehook whenspoolingwireropeinorout.
• Neveruseasahoist.
• Neverusetomovepersons.
• Neverexceedwinchorwireroperatedcapacity.
• Alwayswearheavyleathergloveswhenhandling thewirerope.
• Nevertouchwireropeorhookwhileintensionor underload.
• Neverengageordisengageclutchifwinchisunder load, wireropeisintension, or wireropedrumis moving.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Alwaysstandclearofwireropeandloadandkeep othersawayduringwinching.
• Alwayskeephandsandclothingclearofthewire rope,hookandfairleadopeningduringoperation andwhenspooling.
• Neverwrapwireropebackontoitself.Alwaysuse achokerchain,wirechokerropeortreetrunk protectorontheanchor.
• Neverattacharecoverystraptothewinchhookto increasethelengthofapull.
• Neverattempttotowavehiclewiththerecovery strapattacheddirectlytothewinchhook.
• Never use "bungee" straps that develop tremendous and potentially dangerous amountsofforcewhen stretched.

(Continued)

(Continued)

574 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!(Continued)

• Always disconnecttheremotecontrol when not in use.
• Neverwinchwhentherearelessthanfivewrapsof wireropearoundthewinchdrum.
• Alwayspassremotecontrolthroughawindowto avoidpinchingleadindoor,whenusingremote insideavehicle.
• Neverleavetheremotecontrolpluggedintothe winchwhilefreespooling,riggingorsittingidle.

GeneralInformation

Practice using your winch before you get stuck. Some key points to remember when using your winch are:

• Always take your time to assess the situation and plan your pull carefully.
  • Always take your time when using a winch.

• Use the right equipment for the situation.

• Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the wire rope to slip through your hands when handling the rope.
• Only the operator should handle the wire rope and remote control.
• Think safety at all times.

VehicleRecoveryUsingTheWinch

CAUTION!

- AlwaysKnowYourWinch: Takethetimetofully readandunderstandtheincludedInstallationand OperationsGuide, and BasicGuidetoWinching Techniques, inordertounderstandyourwinchand thewinchingoperation.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 575

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Alwaysinspectwinchinstallationandwirerope conditionbeforeoperatingthewinch.Frayed, kinkedordamagedwireropemustbereplaced immediately. Looseordamagedwinchinstallation mustbecorrectedimmediately.
• Alwaysbesureanyelementwhichcaninterfere withsafewinchingoperationsisremovedpriorto initiatingwinching.
  • Always keep remote control lead clear of the drum, wirerope and rigging.
• Inspectforcracks, pinches, frayedwires, or loose connections. Replace if damaged.

• BecarefulnottopulltheWinchCableCollar throughtherollers.WatchandlistentoWinchfor propersnugness.

• Inspect the winch, winch mount, and wire rope for damage. Do not use the winch if the mount is loose or rope shows excessive wear or damage.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a coiled wire being inserted into a cylindrical component (no text or symbols)

WinchRope

1. Put on gloves.

576 STARTING AND OPERATING

1. Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling of the winch drum, rotate the clutch lever on the winch to disengage. Freespooling conserves battery power.

Hand pressing a button on a car interior, with a white arrow pointing to the button (no text or symbols visible)

FreeSpool

1. Free the winch hook and attach the hook strap. Free the winch hook from its anchor point. Attach the hook strap to the hook (if not attached).

Illustration of a person using a tool to lift a car's side panel (no text or symbols visible)

HookStrap

1. Pull the wire to the anchor point. Pull out enough wire rope to reach your anchor point. Be sure to keep a certain amount of tension on the wire as it can become twisted and over-wrapped when slackened, leading to wire rope damage. To prevent losing the end, hold the hook strap while you work.

STARTING AND OPERATING 577

Illustration of a person spraying a car with a hose (no text or symbols)

0539048559

Illustration of a person using a rope to lift pine branches from a tree (no text or symbols)

054000975

PullingWireRopeTreeTrunkProtector

1. Secure to the anchor point. Once you have established your anchor point, secure the tree-trunk protector or choker-chain around the object.

CAUTION!

Alwaysbecertaintheanchoryouselectwillwithstandtheload.

578 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Howtochooseananchorpoint: A secure anchor is critical to winching operations. An anchor must be strong enough to hold while winching. Natural anchors include trees, stumps and rocks. Hook the cable as low as possible. If no natural anchors are available when recovering another vehicle, your vehicle becomes the anchor point. In this case, be sure to put the transmission in NEUTRAL, apply the hand brake and block its wheels to prevent your vehicle from moving. Ideally, you'll want an anchor point that will enable you to pull straight in the direction the vehicle will move. This allows the wire rope to wind tightly and evenly onto the spooling drum. An anchor point as far away as possible will provide the winch with its greatest pulling power.

1. Attach the Clevis/D-shackle and Tree Trunk Protector. Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap or chain and through the hook loop, being careful not to over tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).

Illustration of two hands tying a rope knot using a hook (no text or symbols)

054000976

Clevis/D-Shackles

1. Lock the clutch. Lock the winch drum by rotating the clutch lever on the winch to engage.

NOTE: Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or disengaged.

STARTING AND OPERATING 579

1. Connect the remote control to the winch control box, located behind the front bumper. Be careful not to let the remote control cord dangle in front of the winch. If you choose to control the winch from inside your vehicle, always pass the remote through a window to avoid pinching the cord in the door. Always disconnect the remote control when not in use.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a linkage mechanism with a black arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols present)

WinchBoxRemoteControlConnector

1. Put wire rope under tension. Using the remote control switch, slowly wind the wire rope until no slack remains. Once the wire rope is under tension, stand well clear of it and never step over it.

580 STARTING AND OPERATING

Illustration of a person using a fuel pump to clean a Toyota pickup truck (no text or symbols visible)

Close-up of a coiled cable or wire between two cylindrical metal sheets (no text or symbols visible)

PullingWireRopeUnderTensionWireNeatlyWoundAroundTheSpoolingDrum

1. Check your anchor. Make sure all connections are secured and free of debris before continuing with the winching procedure.

2. Check wire rope. The wire rope should be neatly wound around the spooling drum. Improper winding can cause damage to the wire rope.

In certain situations you may decide to throw a heavy blanket or similar object over the wire rope. A heavy blanket can absorb energy should the wire rope break. Place it on the wire rope midway between the winch and the anchor point. Do this before the wire rope is put under tension. Do not approach or move the blanket once

tension is applied. Do not allow it to get pulled into the fairlead. If it is necessary to move or remove the blanket, slack the tension on the wire rope first.

1. Establish "no people" zones: Make your intentions clear. Be sure that everyone in the immediate vicinity surrounding the winching operation is completely aware of your intentions before you pull. Declare wherethespectatorsshouldnotstand-never behindorinfrontofthevehicleandnevernearthe wireropeorsnatchblock.Yoursituationmayhave other"nopeople"zones.

STARTING AND OPERATING 581

Simple mechanical diagram showing two connected components with a central shaft (no text or symbols)

054000981

NoPeopleZones

1. Begin winching. With the winching vehicles engine on and light tension already on the wire rope, begin winching slowly and steadily. Be sure that the wire rope is winding evenly and tightly around the spooling drum. For additional assistance, the winched vehicle can be slowly driven while being pulled by

582 STARTING AND OPERATING

the winch. Continue pulling until the vehicle is on stable ground. If you are able to drive the vehicle, the winching operation is complete.

Illustration of a man driving a car, viewed from the side window (no text or symbols visible)

UsingTheRemoteControl

NOTE:

- Avoid overheating the winch motor. For extended winching, stop at reasonable intervals to allow the winch motor to cool down.

- Whattolookforunderload:The wire rope must always spool onto the drum as indicated by the drum rotation decal on the winch. As you power-in, make sure the wire rope winds evenly and tightly on the drum. This prevents the outer wire wraps from drawing into the inner wraps, binding and damaging the wire rope. Avoid shock loads by using the control switch intermittently to take up wire rope slack. Shock loads can momentarily far exceed the winch and wire rope ratings. During side pulls the wire rope tends to stack up at one end of the drum. This stack can become large enough to cause serious damage to the winch. So, line up pulls as straight ahead as possible and stop winching if the wire rope comes close to the tie rods or mounting plate. To fix

STARTING AND OPERATING 583

an uneven stack, spool out that section of the rope and reposition it to the opposite end of the drum, which will free up space for continued winching.

1. Secure vehicle. Once recovery of the vehicle is complete, be sure to secure the vehicle's brakes and shift the transmission to PARK. Release tension in the wire rope.
2. Disconnect the wire rope, and disconnect from the anchor.
3. Rewind the wire rope. The person handling the wire rope should walk the rope in and not let it slide through the hand, control the winch at all times.

Illustration of a person using a fuel pump to clean a white SUV (no text or symbols visible)

RewindingTheWireRope

WARNING!

Topreventseriousinjury,NEVERputyourfingers insidethehookareaasyouarepowering-in.

584 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:Howtospoolundernoload:Arrange the remote control lead so it cannot be caught in the winch. Arrange the wire rope so it will not kink or tangle when spooled. Be sure any wire rope already on the spooling drum is wound tightly and evenly layered. Tighten and straighten the layer if necessary. Keep the wire rope under light tension and spool the wire rope back and onto the winch drum in even layers. Stop frequently to tighten and straighten the layers as necessary. Repeat this process until the winch hook is the same distance as the full length of the remote control from the winch. Pinch the hook between your thumb and forefinger and attach the hook strap. Hold the hook strap between the thumb and forefinger to keep tension on the wire rope. Walk the wire rope towards the fairlead, carefully spooling in the remaining wire rope. By pulsing the remote control switch.

1. Store the hook on the most outboard loop of the tow hook.

Front view of a white Mercedes-Benz SUV with a black arrow pointing to the grille and plug, no visible text or symbols on the vehicle itself.

HookInStoredPosition

1. Disconnect the remote control. Disconnect the remote control cord from the control box and store in a clean and dry place. Winching operations are now complete. Put the cap on the solenoid plug-in.

NOTE: Always store the remote control in a protected, clean, dry area.

Rigging Techniques

Various winching situations will require application of other winching techniques. These could range from too little distance to achieve maximum pull using straight line rigging, simply increasing pulling power, or maintaining a straight-line pulling situation. You will have to assess what technique is correct for your situation. Think "safety" at all times.

HowToChangeThePullingDirection

Top-down diagram of a car with two cars connected by a pulley, no text or symbols present

054000984

ChangePullingDirections

All winching operations should have a straight line from the winch to the object being pulled. This minimizes the wire rope collecting on one side of the drum affecting pulling efficiency and damaging wire rope. A snatch

586 STARTING AND OPERATING

block, secured to a point directly in front of the vehicle will enable you to change your pulling direction while still allowing the wire rope to be at 90^ to wind properly onto the spooling drum.

IncreasingPullingPower

In some cases, you may find yourself needing more pulling power. The use of snatch blocks increases mechanical advantage and that increases your pulling power.

DoubleLine

Illustration of a pickup truck connected to a plug, showing wiring and fuel discharge (no text or symbols)

0539048569

WireRopeRouting

Because pulling power decreases with the number of layers of wire rope on the winch drum, you can use a snatch block to double line out more wire rope. This decreases the number of layers of wire rope on the drum,

and increases pulling power. Start by feeding out enough wire rope to free the winch hook. Attach the hook to your vehicle's frame/tow hook and run the wire rope through a snatch block. Disengage the clutch and, using the snatch block, pull out enough wire to reach your anchor point. Do not attach the hook to the mounting kit. Secure to the anchor point with a tree trunk protector or choker chain. Attach the clevis/shackle. Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap/chain, being careful not to over tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).

POWER STEERING

Electric Power Steering — 1500 Models

The electric power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.

If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance.

If the Steering icon is displayed and the "POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP" message is displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, they indicate that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system. Once driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn off. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

588 STARTING AND OPERATING

If the Steering icon is displayed and the "SERVICE POWER STEERING – ASSIST OFF" message is displayed the EVIC/DID screen, they indicate the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

NOTE:

- Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers.

- If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for service.

Hydraulic Power Steering — 2500/3500 Models

The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost.

If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.

NOTE:

• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering

system. This noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the steering system.

CAUTION!

Prolongedoperationofthesteeringsystemattheend ofthesteeringwheeltravelwillincreasethesteering fluidtemperatureanditshouldbeavoidedwhen possible.Damagetothepowersteeringpumpmay occur.

PowerSteeringFluidCheck—2500/3500Models

Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourpowersteering systemasthechemicalscandamageyourpower steeringcomponents.Suchdamageisnotcoveredby theNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

WARNING!

Fluidlevelshouldbecheckedonalevelsurfaceand withtheengineofftopreventinjuryfrommoving partsandtoensureaccuratefluidlevelreading.Do notoverfill.Useonlymanufacturer'srecommended powersteeringfluid.

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

590 STARTING AND OPERATING

FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4L ENGINES ONLY — IF EQUIPPED

This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders during light load and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required.

NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full functionality after a battery disconnect.

PARKING BRAKE

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.

The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.

Interior view of a car's seat and dashboard area showing a parking pad with an arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols on the main components)

ParkingBrakeRelease

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON, the "Brake Warning Light" in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

NOTE:

• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the "Brake Warning Light" will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.

WARNING!

• NeverusethePARKpositionasasubstituteforthe parkingbrake.Alwaysapplytheparkingbrake fullywhenparkedtoguardagainstvehiclemovementandpossibleinjuryordamage.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoan unlocked vehicle.Leavingunattended childreninavehicleisdangerousforanumberof reasons.Achildorotherscouldbeseriouslyor fatally injured.
• DonotleavetheKeyFobinornethevehicle,or inalocationaccessibletochildren,anddonot leavevehicleequippedwithKeylessEnter-N-Go™intheACCorON/RUNmode.Achildcould operatepowerwindows,othercontrols,ormove thevehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Besuretheparkingbrakeisfullydisengaged beforedriving;failuretodosocanleadtobrake failureandacollision.
• Alwaysfullyapplytheparkingbrakewhenleavingyourvehicleoritmayrollandcausedamageor injury. Also, becertaintoleavethetransmissionin PARK. Failuretodosomaycausethevehicletoroll andcausedamageorinjury.

CAUTION!

If the Brake System Warning Lightremainson with the parkingbrakereleased, abrakesystemmalfunctionisindicated. Havethebrakesystemserviced by anauthorizeddealerimmediately.

BRAKE SYSTEM

If power assist is lost for any reason (for example, repeated brake applications with the engine off), the brakes will still function. However, you will experience a substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.

If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal braking capability, the remaining system will still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and activation of the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning Light” (if equipped) during brake use.

Hydraulic Brake Assist — 2500/3500 Models Only (Except Power Wagon)

The brake system power assist is provided by a hydro-boost unit which shares fluid with the power steering

system. You may experience some clicking or hissing noises from the hydro-boost system during hard braking conditions.

NOTE: Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be higher than normal until the power steering fluid reaches operating temperature.

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Trailer Sway Control (TSC) and Hill Decent Control (HDC [Power Wagon only]). All of the systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions, and are commonly referred to as ESC.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.

The system's pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation. This is normal.

The ABS conducts a low-speed selftest at about 10 mph (16 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is occurring, you may feel slight pedal movement. The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow. This is normal.

When you are in a severe braking condition involving use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a complete stop. This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system and is normal.

Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise. These occurrences are normal, and indicate that the system is functioning.

WARNING!

- Pumpingoftheanti-lockbrakeswilldiminish theireffectivenessandmayleadtoacollision. Pumpingmakethestoppingdistancelonger.Just pressfirmlyonyourbrakepedalwhenyouneedto slowdownorstop.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent thenaturallawsof physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABScannotpreventcollisions, including those resulting from excessivespeedinturns, following another vehicle to closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

ABSWarningLight

The ABS includes an amber warning light. When the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The system reverts to standard, non-anti-lock brakes.

Traction Control System (TCS)

The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s), and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the "Partial Off" mode. Refer to "Electronic Stability Control (ESC)" in this section of this manual. This brake pressure modulation transfers drive torque from slipping to non-slipping wheels to provide optimal forward traction.

Brake Assist System (BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle's braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The BAS detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. The system applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency braking conditions. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of BAS, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired.

Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

• The BAS cannot prevent then natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speedinturns, following another vehicle to closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

The HSA system is designed to assist the driver in launching a vehicle on an incline. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver inputs for a short

duration once the driver takes his foot off of the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short duration, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the incline. The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied.

During operation, HSA will activate the brake control system and a clicking noise may occur. If your foot is on the brake pedal during operation you may feel a slight pedal movement. The clicking and pedal movement is normal and both will stop when HSA becomes inactive.

HSAACTivationCriteria

The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate:

• Vehicle must be stopped
• Vehicle must be on an approximate 7% or greater incline

- Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).

WARNING!

Theremaybesituationsonminorhillswithaloaded vehicleorwhilepullingatrailerwherethesystem willnotactivateandslightrollingmayoccur,which couldcauseacollisionwithanothervehicleorobject. Alwaysrememberthedriverisresponsibleforbrakingthevehicle.

The system will only work if the intended direction of the vehicle and vehicle gear match. For example, if the intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE and the activation criteria are met, HSA will activate.

The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears, and will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEU-TRAL.

TowingAndHaulingWithHSA

The HSA system does not know if your vehicle is loaded or towing a trailer unless the TOW/HAUL switch, located on the center stack, is selected. When activated, the "TOW/HAUL Indicator Light" will illuminate in the instrument cluster. Refer to "Automatic Transmission" in "Starting And Operating" for further information. In order to accommodate the extra weight entailed under towing and hauling conditions and to increase driver comfort while launching on a hill, the system recognizes when the TOW/HAUL switch is activated and compensates by releasing brake pressure at a slower rate while throttle is applied in order to prevent the vehicle from rolling down the hill.

WARNING!

• If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brakes switch. If so, when the brake pad is released, ther may not been enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid rolling down the inclinewhileresuming acceleration, manually activateth trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prioritoreleasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
• HSAisnotaparkingbrake.Ifyoustopthevehicle onahillwithoutputtingthetransmissioninPARK orusingtheparkingbrake,itwillrolldownthe inclineandcouldcollidewithanothervehicle,

WARNING!(Continued)

objectorperson, and causes serious or fatal injury. Always remembertouset the parking brakewhile parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.

HSAOff

HSA is a Customer Programmable Feature in the EVIC/DID. If you wish to turn off the HSA feature, refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

The ESC system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist

in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.

•Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
- Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

WARNING!

ElectronicStabilityControl(ESC) cannot prevent the naturallawsofphysicsfromactingonthevehicle, norcanitincreasethetractionaffordedbyprevailing roadconditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessivespeedin turns, driving on very slipper surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control duetoin appropriate driver input for the conditions. Only as safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

600 STARTING AND OPERATING

AllTwo-WheelDriveVehiclesAndFour-Wheel DriveVehiclesIn2WD,4WDAUTO,Or4WD LOCKModesCanChooseTheFollowingESC OperatingModes:

ESCON

This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 2WD/4WD AUTO/4WD LOCK modes and in 2WD vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4WD LOW or Neutral, back to 4WD LOCK or 4WD AUTO, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for almost all driving situations. ESC should only be turned to "ESC Partial Off" or "ESC Full Off" for specific reasons as noted below.

ESCPartialOff

This mode is entered by momentarily pushing the "ESC Partial Off" switch. When in "Partial Off" mode, the TCS portion of ESC, except for the “limited slip” feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the "ESC Off Indicator Light" will be illuminated. All other stability features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than TCS would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the "ESC Off" switch. This will restore the normal "ESC On" mode of operation.

NOTE: To improve the vehicle's traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the "ESC Partial Off" mode by pushing the "ESC Off" switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the "ESC Partial Off" mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the "ESC Off" switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING!

• Whenin"ESCPartialOff"mode,theTCSfunctionalityofESC,(exceptforthelimitedslipfeature describedintheTCSsection),hasbeendisabled andthe"ESCOffIndicatorLight"willbeilluminated.Whenin"ESCPartialOff"mode,theengine powerreductionfeatureofTCSisdisabled,and theenhancedvehiclestabilityofferedbytheESC systemisreduced.
• TrailerSwayControl(TSC)isdisabledwhenthe ESCsystemisinthe"ESCPartialOff"mode.

AllFour-WheelDriveVehiclesIn4WDAUTOAnd 4WDLOCKModesCanAlsoChooseThe FollowingESCOperatingMode.ThisIsTheOnly SelectableESCOperatingModein4WDLOW:

ESCFullOff

This mode is intended for off-road use when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions. This mode is entered by pushing and holding the "ESC Off" switch for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running. After five seconds, the "ESC Off Indicator Light" will illuminate. Push and release the trip odometer button located on the instrument cluster to clear this message.

NOTE: The "ESC OFF" message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed into the PARK position from any other position and then moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if the message was previously cleared.

In this mode, ESC and TCS except for the "limited slip" feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At 40 mph (64 km/h) the system returns to "ESC Partial Off" mode, described above. When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph (56 km/h) the ESC system reverts back to "ESC Full Off". ESC is off at low vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with off-road driving but ESC function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h). The "ESC Off Indicator Light" will always be illuminated when ESC is in "ESC Partial Off" and "ESC Full Off". To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the "ESC Off" switch. This will restore the normal "ESC On" mode of operation.

"ESC Full Off" is the only operating mode for ESC in 4WD LOW. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4WD LOCK or NEUTRAL, to 4WD LOW, the ESC system will be in this mode.

WARNING!

Inthe"ESCFullOff"mode,theenginetorquereductionandstabilityfeaturesaredisabled.Therefore,theenhancedvehiclestabilityofferedbyESCis unavailable.Inanemergencyevasivemaneuverthe ESCsystemwillnotengagetoassistinmaintaining stability."ESCFullOff"modeisintendedforoff-highwayoroff-roaduseonly.

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light

The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position. It should go out with the engine running. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

NOTE:

• The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" and the "ESC OFF Indicator Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously. Except for when the vehicle is started while in 4WD Low Range.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

The "ESC OFF Indicator Light" indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in "ESC Partial Off" or "ESC Full Off".

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)

The TSC system uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required to activate. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the “ESC Partial Off” or “ESC Full Off” modes.

TSC is only active in the default “ESC On” mode. TSC can be disabled by pushing the “ESC Off” switch and entering “ESC Partial Off” mode. It is not active in the “ESC Partial Off” or “ESC Full Off” modes. Refer to the ESC portion of this section for an explanation of the different ESC operating modes.

WARNING!

IfTSCactivateswhiledriving,slowthevehicle down,stopathenearestsafelocation,andadjustthe trailerloadtoeliminatetrailersway.

Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped

HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills, during various driving situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.

HDChasthreestates:

1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed).

EnablingHDC

HDC is enabled by pressing the HDC switch, but the following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:

• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 Km/h).
• Parking brake is released.
• Driver door is closed.

ActivatingHDC

Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude (greater than approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the Electronic range switches located on steering column shifter. The following summarizes the HDC set speed:

GearApproximateHDCSet	Speed
P No set speed. HDC may	be enabled but will not activate
R 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
1st	0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd	1.2 mph (2 km/h)

606 STARTING AND OPERATING

GearApproximateHDCSet	Speed
3rd 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
9th 5.6 mph (9 km/h)

NOTE: During HDC the ERS +/- shifter input is used for HDC target speed selection but will not affect the gear chosen by the transmission. During HDC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving conditions.

DriverOverride:

The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or brake application at anytime.

DeactivatingHDC

HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the following conditions occur:

• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).

- Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude (less than approximately 8% ), is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.

- Vehicle is shifted to park.

DisablingHDC

HDC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the following conditions occur:

• The driver presses the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
- Driver door opens.
- The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
- The vehicle is drive greater than 40 mph (64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).

Feedbacktothedriver:

The instrument cluster has a HDC icon and a HDC switch which has an LED which offers feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.

• While HDC is Enabled or Active the gear position typically associated with ERS manual mode will indicate target set speed not the top gear limit which is typical of ERS manual mode.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This is the normal operating condition for HDC.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when the driver presses the HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.

608 STARTING AND OPERATING

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when HDC deactivates due to excess speed.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have cooled sufficiently.

WARNING!

HDCisonlyintendedtoassistthedriverincontrollingvehiclespeedwhendescendinghills. Thedriver mustremainattentivetothedrivingconditionsand isresponsibleformaintainingasafevehiclespeed.

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings

054903773

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards 4 — Maximum Load Code (TIN)

2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure

3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and

Temperature Grades

NOTE:

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter "P" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters "LT" that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter "T" or "S" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

610 STARTING AND OPERATING

TireSizingChart

EXAMPLE:

ExampleSizeDesignation:P215/65R15XL95H,215/65R1596H,LT235/85R16C,T145/80D18103M,31x10.5R15LT

P= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or"....blank..." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, orLT= Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, orT o r S = Temporary spare tire or31= Overall diameter in inches (in)

215,235,145= Section width in millimeters (mm)

65,85,80= Aspect ratio in percent (%)– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or10.5= Section width in inches (in)

EXAMPLE:

R= Construction code- "R"means radial construction, or- "D"means diagonal or bias construction

15,16,18= Rim diameter in inches (in)

ServiceDescription:

95= Load Index- A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H= Speed Symbol- A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions- The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

612 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:

LoadIdentification:

Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:

• XL=Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL=Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

MaximumLoad– Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure - Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOTMAL9ABCD0301

DOT= Department of Transportation- This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA= Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9= Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD= Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03= Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)- 03 means the 3rd week

01= Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)- 01 means the year 2001- Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Terminology And Definitions

TermDefinition
B-PillarThe vehicle B-Pillar	is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
ColdTireInflationPressureCold tire in	flation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
MaximumInflationPressureThe maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
RecommendedColdTireInflation Pressure	Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
TirePlacardA label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle's loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

STARTING AND OPERATING 615

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

TireAndLoadingInformationPlacardLocation

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door.

Close-up of a car door handle with a black arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols visible)

ExampleTirePlacardLocation(Door)

Interior view of a car showing seat, door, and latch mechanism (no text or symbols)

ExampleTirePlacardLocation(B-Pillar)

616 STARTING AND OPERATING

TireAndLoadingInformationPlacard

TireAndLoadingInformationPlacard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the "Vehicle Loading" section of this manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to "Vehicle Loading" in this manual.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

StepsForDeterminingCorrectLoadLimit

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg" on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.

618 STARTING AND OPERATING

1. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) - 750 lbs (340 kg) = 650 lbs [295 kg]).
2. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

NOTE:

• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

B11add11

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause it re failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Usetires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

•Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
- Tread Wear

- Ride Comfort

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperlyinflatedtiresaredangerousandcan causecollisions.
• Under-inflationincreasestireflexingandcanresultinoverheatingandtirefailure.
  • Over-inflationreducesatire'sabilitytocushion shock.Objectsontheroadandchuckholescan causedamagethatresultintirefailure.
  • Overinflatedorunder-inflatedtirescanaffective-vehiclehandlingandcanfailsuddenly,resulting in lossofvehiclecontrol.
• Unequaltirepressurescancausesteeringproblems.Youcouldclosecontrolofyourvehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Unequaltirepressuresfromonesideofthevehicle totheothercancausethevehicletodrifttothe rightorleft.
• Alwaysdrivewitheachtireinflatedtotherecommendedcoldtireinflationpressure.

Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.

NOTE:

• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.

FuelEconomy

Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.

TreadWear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.

RideComfortAndVehicleStability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.

622 STARTING AND OPERATING

At least once a month:

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.

CAUTION!

Afterinspectingoradjustingthetirepressure,alwaysreinstallthevalvestemcap.Thiswillprevent moistureanddirtfromenteringthevalvestem, whichcoulddamagethevalvestem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not

been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12^ F ( 7^ C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68^ F ( 20^ C) and the outside temperature = 32^ F ( 0^ C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12^ F ( 7^ C) for this outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

Highspeeddrivingwithyourvehicleundermaximumloadisdangerous.Theaddedstrainonyour tirescouldcausethemtofail.Youcouldhavea seriouscollision.Donotdrivevehicleloadedtothe maximumcapacityatcontinuousspeedsabove 75mph(120km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combiningradialplytireswithothertypesoftires onyourvehiclewillcauseyourvehicletohandle poorly.Theinstabilitycouldcauseacollision.Alwaysuseradialplytiresinsetsoffour.Never combinethemwithothertypesoftires.

624 STARTING AND OPERATING

TireRepair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:

• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a 14 of an inch (6 mm).

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).

Tire Types

AllSeasonTires—IfEquipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

SummerOrThreeSeasonTires—IfEquipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40^ F ( 5^ C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.

Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

WARNING!

DonotuseSummertiresinsnow/iceconditions.You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving to fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control.

SnowTires

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a "mountain/snowflake" symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.

Spare Tires — If Equipped

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to "Tire Service Kit" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, donottake your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compactor limited - usetemporary spare installed. Damageto the vehicle may result.

SpareTireMatchingOriginalEquippedTireAndWheel—IfEquipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original

equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.

CompactSpareTire—IfEquipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver's side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter "T" or "S" preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!

Compactsparesarefortemporaryemergencyuse only.Withthesespares,donotdrivemorethan 50mph(80km/h).Temporaryusespareshavelimited treadlife.Whenthetreadisworntothetreadwear indicators,thetemporaryusesparetireneedstobe replaced.Besuretofollowthewarnings,which applytoyourspare.Failureretodosocouldresultin sparetirefailureandlossofvehiclecontrol.

FullSizeSpare—IfEquipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

Limited-UseSpare—IfEquipped

The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as

your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

Limited-usesparesareforemergencyuseonly.Installationofthislimited-usesparetireaffectsvehicle handling.Withthistire,donotdrivemorethanthe speedlistedonthelimit-usesparewheel.Keep inflatedtothecoldtireinflationpressureslistedon yourTireandLoadingInformationPlacardlocated onthedriver'ssideB-Pillarortherearedgeofthe driver'ssidedoor.Replace(orrepair)theoriginal equipmenttireatthefirstopportunityandreinstallit onyourvehicle.Failureretodosocouldresultinloss ofvehiclecontrol.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.

Refer to "Freeing A Stuck Vehicle" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.

WARNING!

Fastspinningtirescanbedangerous. Forcesgenerated by excessive wheels speed may cause tired damage or failure. Atire could explode and injuresome one. Donot spiny our vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) form more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and donot let any on near aspinning wheel, nomatter what the speed.

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

Two views of a car tire showing tread pattern and texture (no text or symbols)

055007576

1 — Worn Tire

2—New Tire

630 STARTING AND OPERATING

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:

• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.

- Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.

WARNING!

Tiresandthesparetireshouldbereplacedaftersix years,regardlessoftheremainingtread.Failureto followthiswarningcanresultinsuddentirefailure. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveacollisionresulting inseriousinjuryordeath.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on "Tread Wear Indicator". Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the "Tire Safety Information" section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously

affect your vehicle's handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel's specifications match those of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

- Donotuseatire, wheelsizeorratingotherthan thatspecifiedforyourvehicle. Some combinations of unapprovedtiresandwheelsmaychangesuspensiondimensionsandperformancecharacteristics, resultinginchangestosteering, handling, and

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

brakingofyourvehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stressstosteering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheels sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.

• Neveruseatirewithasmallerloadindexor capacity,otherthanwhatwasoriginallyequipped onyourvehicle.Usingatirewithasmallerload indexcouldresultintireoverloadingandfailure. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveacollision.
• Failuretoequipyourvehiclewithtireshaving adequatespeedcapabilitycanresultinsuddentire failureandlossofvehiclecontrol.

CAUTION!

Replacingoriginaltireswithtiresofadifferentsizemay resultinfalsespeedometerandodometerreadings.

SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION — IF EQUIPPED

A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passengers [150 lbs (68 kg) each] plus 200 lbs (91 kg) of cargo. Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle will be found on the face of the driver's door.

TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage.

- Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer.

Please follow the table below for proper tire size, chain type, and axle recommendations:

VehicleAxleRecommendationsTireSizesChainClass
1500 Models Rear Only P265/70R17 S Class
2500 Models Rear Only LT245/70R17E		LT265/70R18ELT275/70R18E	U Class
2500 Power WagonModels	Rear Only LT285/70R17D U Class
3500 (Single Rear Wheel)Models	Rear Only LT265/70R18ELT275/70R18E		U Class
3500 (Dual Rear Wheel)Models	Front/Rear LT235/80R17E U Class

WARNING!

Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could close control and have a collision.

CAUTION!

To avoid damagetoyour vehicleortires, observethe following precautions:

- Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and others suspension components, it is important that only traction devices being good condition are used. Brokendevices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged part of the device before further use.

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Installdeviceastightlyaspossibleandthenre-tightenafterdrivingabout 1 12 mile(0.8km).

- Donotexceed30mph(48km/h).

- Drivecautiously and avoid severe returns and large bumps, especially with loaded vehicle.

- Donotdriveforaprolongedperiodondrypavement.

- Observethetractiondevicemanufacturer's instructionsonthemethodofinstallation,operating speed,andconditionsforuse.Alwaysusethe suggestedoperatingspeedofthedevicemanufac-turer'sifitislessthan30mph(48km/h).

- Donotusetractiondevicesonacompactsparetire.

STARTING AND OPERATING 635

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

The suggested rotation method is the "forward cross" shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed.

graph TD
    A["Component 1"] --> B["Component 2"]
    C["Component 1"] --> D["Component 2"]
    B --> C
    D --> A
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    note bottom of A: TireRotation
    note bottom of D: 055703771

636 STARTING AND OPERATING

Directional Tires — If Equipped

For the R/T package with 22" tires and wheels, the rotational direction of the tire must be taken into consideration when rotating the tires. The recommended rotation pattern for directional tires is shown below.

Dual Rear Wheels — If Equipped

The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set. To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge across all four tires. The straight edge should touch all the tires.

graph LR
    A["Top Channel"] <--> B["Left Channel"]
    C["Bottom Channel"] <--> D["Right Channel"]
    E["Small Vehicle Icon"] --> A
    E --> C
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#bbf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#bfb,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ffb,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#fff,stroke:#333

TireRotationTireRotation

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS):

• The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses unique sensors in the inner rear wheels to help identify them from the outer rear wheels, because of this, the inner and outer wheel locations can't be switched.
• After a tire rotation is completed, as shown below, the system can auto learn the locations of each sensor ID. Auto learning/localization occurs when the vehicle ignition status is changed from Off to On and speeds of greater than 5 mph (8km/h) are obtained and remain over 5 mph (8km/h) for at about a 15 minute period. You may need to drive for 20 minutes to account slower speeds and stops.
• If the tires are rotated incorrectly, The Auto localization of the TPIS sensors will fail to locate correctly resulting

in incorrect locations for the pressure values displayed in the Instrument Cluster.

CAUTION!

3500DualRearTiresmayonlyhaveoneapproved directionofrotation.Thisistoaccommodatetheasymmetricaldesign(treadpattern)oftheOn/Off-Roadtire andtheuseofOutlineWhiteLetter(OWL)tires.

- Whenreplacingaflat,thesparetiremayhavetobe remountedontherim,orinstalledatadifferent location,tomaintainthecorrectplacementofthe tireonthewheelrelativetothetire/wheelposition onthetruck.Forexample,ifthespareisusedto replaceanouterreartireitwillhavetobere-mountedontherimsothatthewwheelisdished inward.Thatwaythetreaddesignofasymmetrical tiresandthewhitewritingoftheOWLtireswill maintainproperposition.

638 STARTING AND OPERATING

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to "Tires – General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle's tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need

to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.

CAUTION!

• TheTPMShasbeenoptimizedfortheoriginal equipmenttiresandwheels.TPMSpressureshave beenestablishedforthetiresizeequippedonyour vehicle.Undesirablesystemoperationorsensor damagemayresultwhenusingreplacementequipmentthatisnotofthesamesize,type,and/orstyle.
  Aftermarketwheelscancausesensordamage. UsingaftermarkettiresealantsmaycausetheTire PressureMonitoringSystem(TPMS)sensortobecomeinoperable.Afterusinganaftermarkettire sealantitisrecommendedthatyoutakeyour vehicletoanauthorizeddealershiptohaveyour sensorfunctionchecked.
• Afterinspectingoradjustingthetirepressurealwaysreinstallthevalvestemcap.Thiswillprevent moistureanddirtfromenteringthevalvestem, whichcoulddamagetheTPMSsensor.

640 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light."

- Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.

Premium System

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver module
• Four TPM sensors

STARTING AND OPERATING 641

• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)
• TPM Telltale Light

The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires. A spare with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" to illuminate or the chime to sound while it is stored in the spare tire location.

TirePressureMonitoringLowPressureWarnings

The "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the EVIC/DID will display a "LOW TIRE" message and a graphic showing

the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values in a different color. An "Inflate to XX" message will also be displayed.

EXAMPLE ONLY

055900259

"LOWTIREPRESSURE"Message

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those in a different color in the EVIC/DID graphic) to the

642 STARTING AND OPERATING

vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the graphic display in the EVIC/DID will return to it's original color, and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15mph (24km / h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

ServiceTPMSWarning

If a system fault is detected, the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC/DID will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received.

EXAMPLE ONLY

055900260

TirePressureMonitorDisplay

If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will no longer flash, and the "SERVICE TPM

SYSTEM"message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:

• Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.
• Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals.
• Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
  • Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

VehiclesWithMatchingFullSizeSpare

• The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
• If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will turn ON. In addition, the EVIC/DID will display a "LOW TIRE" message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value in a different color. An "Inflate to XX" message will also be displayed.
• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the pressure value will be updated and return to its original color, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires.

644 STARTING AND OPERATING

VehiclesWithNonMatchingFullSizeSpareOrCompactSpare

• The non matching full size spare or compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the non matching full size spare or compact spare tire.
• If you install the non matching full size spare or compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the TPM Telltale Light and a "LOW TIRE" message will remain ON and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the EVIC/DID will still display a flashing pressure value or a pressure value in a different color.
• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15mph (24km / h) , the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC/DID will display a "SERVICE TPM

SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC/DID will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the non matching full size spare or compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC/DID will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The

vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) 3500 Series Trucks

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS).

The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to transmit tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.

STARTING AND OPERATING

The TPIS consists of the following components:

• Receiver module
• Four TPM sensors (Single Rear Wheel (SRW) applications)
• Six TPM sensors (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) applications)
• Pressure display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)

The TPIS system will display all four (Single Rear Wheel (SRW) applications) or six (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) applications) tire pressure values in the EVIC/DID display.

If a system fault is detected, the EVIC/DID will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received.

646 STARTING AND OPERATING

If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:

• Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.
• Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals.
• Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
  • Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

3.6L Engine

This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use of higher octane premium gasoline will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high engine speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. Engine damage resulting

from operating with a heavy spark knock may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

5.7L/6.4L Engines

This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufac-

turer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline (Over 89 octane) is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such

648 STARTING AND OPERATING

as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.

Over 40 auto manufacturer's world wide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications, if they are available.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol.

CAUTION!

DONOTusegasolinecontainingMethanolorgasolinecontainingmorethan10%Ethanol.Useofthese blendsmayresultinstartinganddrivabilityproblems,damagecriticalfuelsystemcomponents,cause emissionstoexceedtheapplicablestandard,and/or causethe"MalfunctionIndicatorLight"toilluminate.Pleaseobservepumplabelsastheyshould clearlycommunicateifafuelcontainsgreaterthan 10%ethanol.

Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II "Malfunction Indicator Light" on.

• Poor engine performance.

• Poor cold start and cold drivability.

• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.

MMT In Gasoline

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.

Materials Added To Fuel

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When available the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Followtheseguidelinestomaintainyourvehicle's performance:

• The useofleadedgasolineisprohibitedbyFederal law.Usingleadedgasolinecanimpairengineperformanceanddamagetheemissionscontrolsystem.
• Anout-of-tuneengineorcertainfuelorignition malfunctionscancausethecatalyticconverterto overheat. If you notice apungentburningodor or somelightsmoke, you'renginem maybe out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediateservice. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Theuseoffueladditives, which are now being sold as octaneenhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuelsystem damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuel or additives is not theresponsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbonmonoxide(CO)inexhaustgasesisdeadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:

• Donotinhaleexhaustgases. They contain carbon monoxide, acolorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as agarage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engineer running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running form more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guardagainstcarbonmonoxidewithpropermaintenance.Havetheexhaustsysteminspected every

(Continued)

652 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!(Continued)

timethevehicleisraised.Haveanyabnormal conditionsrepairedpromptly.Untilrepaired,drive withallsidewindowsfullyopen.

FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED

E-85 General Information

The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol(E-85)or UnleadedGasolineOnly and a yellow fuel cap. Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and non-Flexible Fuel powered vehicles.

CAUTION!

OnlyvehicleswiththeE-85fuelfillerdoorlabelcan operateonE-85.

Ethanol Fuel (E-85)

E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

WARNING!

Ethanolvaporsareextremelyflammableandcould causeseriouspersonalinjury.Neverhaveanysmokingmaterialslitorproductsthatcancausesparkinor nearthevehiclewhenremovingthefuelfillertube cap(gascap)orfillingthetank.DonotuseE-85asa cleaningagentandneveruseitnearanopenflame.

Fuel Requirements

Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these fuels. For best results, avoid refueling pattern alternating between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.

When switching fuel types:

• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
• You operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes.

Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up.

NOTE:

• When the ambient temperature is above 90^ (32°C), you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed.
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline additive, such as MOPAR® Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used.

Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles

FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included in MOPAR® engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting FCA US Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended

654 STARTING AND OPERATING

that engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395 contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to FCA US LLC engines.

Starting

The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0^ F ( -18^ C). In the range of 0^ F ( -18^ C) to 32^ F ( 0^ C), an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations) until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.

NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the ambient temperature is less than 32^ F ( 0^ C).

Cruising Range

Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per liter and the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%, compared to gasoline operation.

Replacement Parts

All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol. Ethanol compatible service components are required.

CAUTION!

Replacingfuelsystemcomponentswithnon-ethanol compatiblecomponentscandamageyourvehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 655

Maintenance

CAUTION!

Donotuseethanolmixturegreaterthan85%inyour vehicle.Itwillcausedifficultyincoldstartingand mayaffectdrivability.

ADDING FUEL

The fuel filler cap (gas cap) is located behind the fuel filler door, on the left side of the vehicle. Open the fuel door and remove the fuel cap by turning it counterclockwise.

FuelFillerCap

NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.

CAUTION!

• Damagetothefuelsystemoremissionscontrol systemcouldresultfromusinganimproperfuel tankfillertubecap.
• Apoorlyfittingfuelfillercapcouldletimpurities intothefuelsystem.
• Apoorlyfittingfuelfillercapmaycausethe "MalfunctionIndicatorLight(MIL)"toturnon.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, donot "top off" the fuel tank after filling. Whenthefuel nozzle "clicks" or shut soff, the fuel tank is full.

WARNING!

- Neverhaveanysmokingmaterialslitinornearthe vehiclewhenthegascapisremovedorthetankis beingfilled.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Neveraddfueltothevehiclewhentheengineis running.
• Afiremayresultifgasolineispumpedintoa portablecontainerthatisinsideofavehicle.You couldbeburned.Alwaysplacegascontainerson thegroundwhilefilling.

NOTE:

• When the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.

WARNING!

Staticelectricitycancauseanignitionofflammable liquid, vapororgasinanyvehicleortrailer. To reduceriskofseriousinjuryordeathwhenfilling containers:

• Alwaysplacecontaineronthegroundbeforefilling.
• Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container when you are filling it.
• Useonlyapprovedcontainersforflammableliquid.
• Donotleavecontainerunattendedwhilefilling.
• Astaticelectricchargecouldcauseasparkandfire hazard.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator will display in the EVIC/DID telltale display area. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the RIGHT button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.

658 STARTING AND OPERATING

VEHICLE LOADING

Certification Label

As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver's side door or pillar.

This label contains the month and year of manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN.

GrossVehicleWeightRating(GVWR)

The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.

Payload

The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.

GrossAxleWeightRating(GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.

Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.

TireSize

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.

RimSize

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed.

InflationPressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.

CurbWeight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added.

Loading

The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.

The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier

660 STARTING AND OPERATING

items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.

Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate.

CAUTION!

DonotloadyourvehicleanyheavierthantheGVWR orthemaximumfrontandrearGAWR.Ifyoudo, partsonyourvehiclecanbreak,oritcanchangethe wayyourvehiclehandles.Thiscouldcauseyouto losecontrol.Alsooverloadingcanshortenthelifeof yourvehicle.

TRAILER TOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.

To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

Common Towing Definitions

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:

GrossVehicleWeightRating(GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not

exceed the GVWR. Refer to "Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

GrossTrailerWeight(GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" condition.

The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.

WARNING!

Ifthegrosstrailerweightis5,000lbs(2267kg)or more,itismandatorytouseaweight-distributing hitchtoensurestablehandlingofyourvehicle.If

WARNING!(Continued)

youuseastandardweight-carryinghitch,youcould losecontrolofyourvehicleandcauseacollision.

GrossCombinationWeightRating(GCWR)

The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.

GrossAxleWeightRating(GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

(Continued)

WARNING!

It is important that you donot exceed them maximum frontorrear GAWR. Adangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident.

TongueWeight(TW)

The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight is 10% to 15% of the vehicle's GTW for a conventional hitch. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.

FrontalArea

The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.

TrailerSwayControl

The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.

If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC) recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.

Weight-CarryingHitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers.

Weight-DistributingHitch

A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control, thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with GAWR requirements.

WARNING!

• Animproperlyadjustedweightdistributinghitch systemmayreducehandling, stability and braking performance and could result in acollision.
• Weightdistributingsystemsmaynotbecompatiblewithsurgebrakecouplers.Consultwithyour hitchandtrailermanufacturerorareputableRecreationalVehicledealerforadditionalinformation.

664 STARTING AND OPERATING

Side view illustration of a pickup truck and a moving vehicle (no text or symbols)

0570049865

Side-view illustration of a pickup truck and a camouflaged vehicle (no text or symbols)

0570049866

WithoutWeight-DistributingHitch(Incorrect)WithWeight-DistributingHitch(Correct)

Side profile illustration of a pickup truck with a trailer (no text or symbols)

0570049867

ImproperAdjustmentOfWeight-DistributingHitch (Incorrect)

RecommendedDistributionHitchAdjustment

TowingWith1500AirSuspension

1. Set air suspension to normal ride height. No action is required if already in normal ride height.

NOTE: The vehicle must remain in the engine running position while attaching a trailer for proper leveling of the air suspension system.

1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the trailer (do not connect the trailer).

2. Under radio suspension settings, turn on jack mode. Jack mode will be canceled and procedure must be restarted if the vehicle is driven at speeds above 5mph (8kph).

3. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the fender to ground, this is height H1.

Side view illustration of a pickup truck with a downward arrow indicating speed (no text or symbols)

0570052238

MeasuringHeight(H)

1. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight distribution bars connected.

2. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the fender to ground, this is height H2.

3. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing bars so that the height of the front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/3+H1 (about 1/3 the difference between H2 and H1 above normal ride height [H1]).

4. The truck can now be driven. Jack mode will be canceled and vehicle will return to normal ride height when drive at speeds above 5mph (8kph).

MeasurementExample	Example1500Height (mm)
H1 925
H2 946
H2-H1 21
(H2-H1)/3 7
(H2-H1)/3 + H1 932

NOTE: For all towing conditions, we recommend towing with tow haul mode engaged.

AllOther1500(Non-AirSuspension)/2500/3500Trucks

1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
   NOTE: For Ram 2500/3500 trucks equipped with rear air suspension, normal ride height or alternate ride height can be used. The vehicle must remain in the engine running position while attaching a trailer for proper leveling of the air suspension system. It may not be possible to enter alternate ride height while lightly loaded.
2. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the fender to ground, this is height H1.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight distribution bars connected.

4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the fender to ground, this is height H2.

5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing bars so that the height of the front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1 above normal ride height [H1]).

MeasurementExample	Example2500/3500 Height(mm)
H1 1030
H2 1058
H2-H1 28
(H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044

NOTE: For all towing conditions, we recommend towing with tow haul mode engaged.

668 STARTING AND OPERATING

Fifth-WheelHitch

The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform with a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed. It connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel trailer with a coupling king pin.

GooseneckHitch

The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted over the rear axle in the truck bed.

Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight a given factory equipped trailer hitch type can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

TrailerHitchTypeandMaximumTrailerWeight
HitchTypeMax.TrailerWeight/Max.TongueWeight
Class III BumperHitch - 1500 Model	5,000 lbs (2,268 kg) / 500 lbs(226 kg)
Class IV - 1500Model	11,000 lbs (4,989 kg) / 1100lbs (498 kg)
Class V - 2500/3500Models	18,000 lbs (8,164 kg) / 1800lbs (816 kg)
Fifth Wheel - 2500Model	25,000 lbs (11,339 kg) / 5000lbs (2,267 kg)
Gooseneck - 2500Model	20,000 lbs (9,071 kg) /4000 lbs (1,814 kg)
Gooseneck Or Fifth Wheel - 3500 Model	32,000 lbs (14,545 kg) / 6000 lbs (2,721 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website addresses:

• ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
• ramtruck.ca(Canada)
• rambodybuilder.com

Trailer And Tongue Weight

Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions. Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch.

670 STARTING AND OPERATING

Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

• The tongue weight of the trailer
- The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle
• The weight of the driver and all passengers

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to "Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading Information Placard" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

Towing Requirements

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:

CAUTION!

- Donottowatraileratallduringthefirst500miles (805km)thenewvehicleisdriven.Theengine,axle orotherpartscouldbedamaged.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a traileristowed, donot drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and donot make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other part of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

WARNING!

Impropertowingcanleadtoacollision.Followthese guidelinestomakeyourtrailertowingassafeas possible:

- Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargothatis not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could close to your vehicle and have a collision.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Whenhaulingcargoortowingatrailer, donot overloadyourvehicleortrailer. Overloading can causealossofcontrol, poor performanceordam-agetobrakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassisstructureortires.

- Safetychainsmustalwaysbeusedbetweenyour vehicleandtrailer.Alwaysconnectthechainsto thehookretainersofthevehiclehitch.Crossthe chainsunderthetrailertongueandallowenough slackforturningcorners.

- Vehicleswithtrailersshouldnotbeparkedona grade.Whenparking,applytheparkingbrakeon thetowvehicle.Putthetowvehicletransmissionin PARK.Forfour-wheeldrivevehicles,makesure thetransfercaseisnotinNEUTRAL.Always,blockor"chock"thetrailerwheels.

(Continued)

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• GCWRmustnotbeexceeded.
- Totalweightmustbedistributedbetweenthetow vehicleandthetrailersuchthatthefollowingfour ratingsarenotexceeded:
1.GVWR
2.GTW
3.GAWR
4. Tongueweighitratingforthetrailerhitchutilized.

TowingRequirements—Tires

- Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.

• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to "Tires – General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to "Tires – General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for the proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.

TowingRequirements—TrailerBrakes

WARNING!

• Donotconnecttrailerbrakestoyourvehicle's hydraulicbrakelines.Itcanoverloadyourbrake systemandcauseittofail.Youmightnohave brakeswhenyouneedthemandcouldhavean accident.
• Towinganytrailerwillincreaseyourstopping distance.Whentowingyoushouldallowforadditionalspacebetweenyourvehicleandthevehicleinfrontofyou.Failurertodosocouldresultinan accident.

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighsmorethan 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to this could lead to accelerated brakeling wear, higher brake pedaleffort, and longer stopping distances.

• Do notinterconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.

674 STARTING AND OPERATING

- Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 1,653 lbs (750 kg).

Integrated Trailer Brake Module—If Equipped

Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) for Electric and Electric Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes.

NOTE: This module has been designed and verified with electric trailer brakes and new electric over hydraulic systems. Some previous EOH systems may not be compatible with ITBM.

IntegratedTrailerBrakeModule(ITBM)

1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever

The user interface consists of the following:

ManualBrakeControlLever

Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to activate power to the trailer's electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle's brakes. If the manual brake control lever is activated while the brake is also applied, the greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.

The trailer and the vehicle's brake lamps will come on when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are applied.

TrailerBrakeStatusIndicatorLight

This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status.

If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is turned on, pressing the GAIN adjustment button or

sliding the manual brake control lever will display the GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the "Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light" will not be displayed.

If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the "Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light" will flash.

GAINAdjustmentButtons(+/-)

Pressing these buttons will adjust the brake control power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. The GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).

GAIN

The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control for the specific towing condition and should be changed as towing conditions change. Changes to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and weather.

676 STARTING AND OPERATING

AdjustingGAIN

NOTE: This should only be performed in a traffic free environment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).

1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition, functioning normally and properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to the trailer manufacturer's instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged in, the trailer connected message should appear in the EVIC/DID (if the connection is not recognized by the ITBM, braking functions will not be available), the GAIN setting will illuminate and the correct type of trailer must be selected from the EVIC/DID options.

4. Press the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel until "TRAILER TOW" appears on the screen.

5. Press the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter "TRAILER TOW".

6. Press the UP or DOWN buttons until Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen.
7. Press the RIGHT arrow and then press the UP or DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen.
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry, level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual brake control lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the GAIN setting.

Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier

trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.

	LightElectricHeavyElectricLightEOHHeavyEOH
Type of Trailer Brakes	Electric Trailer Brakes	Electric Trailer Brakes	Electric over Hydraulic Trailer Brakes	Electric over Hydraulic Trailer Brakes
Load *Under 10,000 lbs	*Above 10,000 lbs *Under 10,000 lbs *Above 10,000 lbs

* The suggested selection depends and may change depending on the customer preferences for braking performance. Condition of the trailer brakes, driving and road state may also affect the selection.

DisplayMessages

The trailer brake control interacts with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Display messages, along with a single

chime, will be displayed when a malfunction is determined in the trailer connection, trailer brake control, or on the trailer. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center" or "Driver Information Display" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

CAUTION!

Connectingatrailerthatisnotcompatiblewiththe ITBMsystemmayresultinreducedorcompleteloss oftrailerbraking.Theremaybeaincreaseinstoppingdistanceortrailerinstabilitywhichcouldresult indamagetoyourvehicle,trailer,orotherproperty.

WARNING!

Connectingatrailerthatisnotcompatiblewiththe ITBMsystemmayresultinreducedorcompleteloss oftrailerbraking.Theremaybeaincreaseinstoppingdistanceortrailerinstabilitywhichcouldresult inpersonalinjury.

NOTE:

• An aftermarket controller may be available for use with trailers with air or electric-over-hydraulic trailer brake systems. To determine the type of brakes on your trailer and the availability of controllers, check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer.
• Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may cause damage to the electrical system and electronic modules of the vehicle. See your authorized dealer if an aftermarket module is to be installed.

TowingRequirements—TrailerLightsAndWiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.

NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness.

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations.

graph TD
    A["6"] --> B(( ))
    C["5"] --> D(( ))
    E["4"] --> F(( ))
    G["3"] --> H(( ))
    B --> I["1"]
    D --> I
    F --> I
    H --> J["2"]

057003766
Four-PinConnector

1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn

graph TD
    A["7"] --> B[" "]
    C["1"] --> D[" "]
    E["2"] --> F[" "]
    G["3"] --> H[" "]
    I["4"] --> J[" "]
    K["5"] --> L[" "]
    M["6"] --> N[" "]
    O[" "] --> P[" "]
    Q[" "] --> R[" "]

057003765

Seven-PinConnector

1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes

Towing Tips

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy traffic.

AutomaticTransmission

The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL mode or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control).

NOTE: Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower gear range (using the ERS shift control) while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide better engine braking.

When towing a loaded trailer up steep grades at low speeds (20 mph [32 km/h] or below), holding your vehicle in first gear (using the ERS shift control) can help to avoid transmission overheating.

If you regularly tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation, then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) as specified for "police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing." Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.

NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing (6-speed automatic only).

Tow/HaulMode

To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control) on more severe grades.

ElectronicSpeedControl—IfEquipped

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.

CoolingSystem

To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:

CityDriving

When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.

HighwayDriving

Reduce speed.

682 STARTING AND OPERATING

AirConditioning

Turn off temporarily.

AirSuspensionSystem

To aid in attaching/detaching the trailer from the vehicle, the air suspension system can be used. Refer to "Air Suspension System" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

NOTE: The vehicle must remain in the engine running position while attaching a trailer for proper leveling of the air suspension system.

SNOWPLOW

1500 Models Only

NOTE: Do not use this model vehicle for snowplow applications.

WARNING!

Snowplowsandotheraftermarketequipments should not be added to the frontend of your vehicle. The airbagcrash sensors may be affected by the change in the frontend structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

Using this vehicle for snow plow applications can cause damage to the vehicle.

WARNING!

Attachingasnowplowtothisvehiclecouldadversely affectperformanceoftheairbagsysteminacollision.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

Donotexpectthattheairbagwillperformasdescribedearlierinthismanual.

2500/3500 Models Only

Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory installed option. These packages include components necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow.

NOTE: Before installation of a snowplow it is highly recommended that the owner/installer obtain and follow the recommendations contained within the current Body Builders Guide. See your authorized dealer, installer or snowplow manufacturer for this information. There are unique electrical systems that must be connected to properly assure operator safety and prevent overloading vehicle systems.

WARNING!

Attachingasnowplowtothisvehiclecouldadversely affectperformanceoftheairbagsysteminacollision. Donotexpectthattheairbagwillperformasdescribedearlierinthismanual.

CAUTION!

The "LampOut" indicator could illuminate if exterior lamps are not properly installed.

BeforePlowing

• Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid level.
• Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tightness.

684 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear. The cutting edge should be 14 to 12 in (6 cm to 1.2 cm) above ground in snow plowing position.
• Check that snowplow lighting is connected and functioning properly.

SnowplowPrepPackageModelAvailability

ForInformationaboutsnowplowapplicationsvisit www.ramtrucks.comorrefertothecurrentBodyBuildersGuide.

1. The maximum number of occupants in the truck should not exceed two.
2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear GAWR should never be exceeded.
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of options or passengers, etc.

The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow system, all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers, options, and cargo, must not exceed either the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR) ratings. These weights are specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label on the driver's side door opening.

NOTE: Detach the snowplow when transporting passengers.

Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifications at the factory without consideration for the weight of the plow. Front end toe-in should be checked and reset if necessary at the beginning and end of the snowplow season. This will help prevent uneven tire wear.

The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is parked.

Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equipment following the recommendations provided by the specific snowplow manufacturer.

OverTheRoadOperationWithSnowplow Attached

The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures. Therefore, when transporting the plow, angle the blade completely and position it as low as road or surface conditions permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The operator should always maintain a safe stopping distance and allow adequate passing clearance.

OperatingTips

Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph (32 km/h) should be maximum operating speed. The operator should be familiar with the area and surface to be cleaned. Reduce speed and use extreme caution when plowing unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility.

GeneralMaintenance

Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the plow manufacturer's instructions.

Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery terminals clean and free of corrosion.

When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and drivetrain damage, the following precautions should be observed.

• Operate with transfer case in 4L when plowing small or congested areas where speeds are not likely to exceed 15 mph (24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in 4H.
• Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use 4L range when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended periods of time to avoid transmission overheating.
• Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has returned to idle and wheels have stopped. Make a practice of stepping on the brake pedal while shifting the transmission.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

TowingConditionWheelsOFFTheGround		Two-WheelDriveModels	Four-WheelDriveModels
Flat Tow NONE N	OTAL-	LOWED	SeeInstructions•Automatic transmission in PARK•Manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL)•Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)•Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow Front N	OTAL-	LOWED	NOTALLOWED
	Rear OK NOTALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK	OK

NOTE:

• When recreationally towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
• Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be placed in Transport mode before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to "Air Suspension – If Equipped" for more information. If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.

Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models

DONOTflattowthisvehicle.Damagethedrivetrain willresult.

Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:

1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.

NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.

1. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place automatic transmission in PARK, manual transmission in gear (not in NEUTRAL).

688 STARTING AND OPERATING

1. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the Key Fob.
3. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.

CAUTION!

• Towingwiththerearwheelsonthegroundwill causeseveretransmissiondamage.Damagefrom impropertowingisnotcoveredundertheNew VehicleLimitedWarranty.
• Donotdisconnectthedriveshaftbecausefluidmay leakfromthetransmission,causingdamageto internalparts.

Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models

NOTE: Both the manual shift and electronic shift transfer cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) for recreational towing. Automatic transmissions must be shifted into PARK for recreational towing. Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recreational towing. Refer to the following for the proper transfer case NEUTRAL (N) shifting procedure for your vehicle.

CAUTION!

• DONOTdollytowany4WDvehicle.Towingwith onlyonesetofwheelsontheground(frontorrear) willcauseseveretransmissionand/ortransfercase damage.TowwithallfourwheelseitherONthe ground,orOFFtheground(usingavehicletrailer).

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Towonlyintheforwarddirection. Towing this vehiclebackwardscancauseseveredamagetothe transfercase.
• AutomatictransmissionsmustbeplacedinPARK forrecreationaltowing.
• Manualtransmissionsmustbeplacedingear(not inNeutral)forrecreationaltowing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure outlined under "Shifting Into NEUTRAL(N)" to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle inviolation of the aboverequirements can cause severetransmission and/or transfercased damage. Damage from impropertowing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Donotdisconnectthereardriveshaftbecausefluid willleakfromthetransfercase,causingdamageto internalparts.
• Donotuseabumper-mountedclamp-ontowbar onyourvehicle.Thebumperfacebarwillbe damaged.

ShiftingIntoNEUTRAL(N)

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing.

WARNING!

Youorotherscouldbeinjuredorkilledifyouleave thevehicleunattendedwiththetransfercaseinthe NEUTRAL(N)positionwithoutfirstfullyengaging

(Continued)

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

theparkingbrake. ThetransfercaseNEUTRAL(N) positiondisengagesboththefrontandredrive-shaftsfromthepowertrainandwillallowthevehicle toroll, evenifthetransmissionisinPARK. The parkingbrakeshouldalwaysbeappliedwhenthe driverisnotinthevehicle.

CAUTION!

Itisnecessarytofollowthesestepstobecertainthat thetransfercaseisfullyinNEUTRAL(N)before recreationaltowingtopreventdamagetointernal parts.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine running. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.

NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.

1. Press and hold the brake pedal.

2. Depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.

3. With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL (N).

4. With electronic shift transfer case, press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button. Some models have a small, recessed "N" button (at the center of the transfer case switches) that must be pushed using a ballpoint pen or similar object. Other models have a rectangular NEUTRAL switch, below the rotary transfer case control knob. The NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will blink while the shift is in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.

STARTING AND OPERATING 691

1. Release the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
3. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions) for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
4. Repeat steps 6 and 7 with automatic transmission in DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear.
5. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly apply the parking brake. Turn OFF the engine. For vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until the engine shuts off.

6. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual transmission in gear (NOT in Neutral). On 8-speed transmissions the shifter will automatically select PARK when the engine is turned off.

7. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then cycle the key or the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ button to the RUN position and back to the OFF position. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.

8. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar.
9. Release the parking brake.

NOTE: With electronic shift transfer case:

- Steps 2 through 4 are requirements that must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements are not met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.

• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
• If the vehicle is equipped with air suspension, the engine should be started and left running for a minimum of 60 seconds (with all the doors closed) at least once every 24 hours. This process allows the air suspension to adjust the vehicle's ride height to compensate for temperature effects.

ShiftingOutOfNEUTRAL(N)

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

3. Press and hold the brake pedal.

4. Start the engine. Shift the transmission into NEU-TRAL. Depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.

5. With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer case lever to the desired position.

6. With electronic shift transfer case with rotary selector switch, press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button until the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off. After the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the selector switch.

STARTING AND OPERATING 693

- With electronic shift transfer case with pushbutton selector switch, press and hold the switch for the desired transfer case position, until the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off and the desired position indicator light turns on.

NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL (N), turning the engine OFF is not required, but may be helpful to avoid gear clash. With the 8-speed automatic transmission, the engine must remain running, since turning the engine OFF will shift the transmission to PARK (and the transmission must be in NEUTRAL for the transfer case to shift out of NEUTRAL).

1. Turn the engine OFF. Shift automatic transmission into PARK. On 8-speed transmissions the shifter will automatically select PARK when the engine is turned off.

2. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on a manual transmission).

3. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
4. Start the engine.
5. Press and hold the brake pedal.
6. Release the parking brake.
7. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions), and check that the vehicle operates normally.

694 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: With electronic shift transfer case:

- Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be met before pressing the button to shift out of NEUTRAL (N), and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements are not met before pressing the button or are no longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the button is released.

• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

■HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .....697

■IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS....697

■WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS....698

□Torque Specifications....699

■JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING....701

□Jacking And Tire Changing 1500 Series Trucks .701

□Jacking And Tire Changing 2500 And 3500 Series Trucks....721

■HOISTING....742

■JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES....743

□Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

□Jump-Starting Procedure....745

■FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE....748

■EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . .749

■SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE — 6-SPEED TRANSMISSION....750

□Column Shifter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

□ Center Console Shifter — If Equipped . . . . . . .751

696 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

■MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED TRANSMISSION....752

■TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE....754

□Two-Wheel Drive Models....756

□Four-Wheel Drive Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the upper switch bank just below the radio.

Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-

tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.

• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed while maintaining the motion of the vehicle with the brakes.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a

698 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.

CAUTION!

Drivingwithahotcoolingsystemcoulddamage yourvehicle.IfthetemperaturegaugereadsHOT (H),pulloverandstopthevehicle.Idlethevehicle withtheairconditionerturnedoffuntilthepointer dropsbackintothenormalrange.Ifthepointer remainsonHOT(H),andyouhearcontinuous chimes,turntheengineoffimmediatelyandcallfor service.

WARNING!

Youorotherscanbebadlyburnedbyhotengine coolant(antifreeze)orsteamfromyourradiator.If youseeorhearsteamcomingfromunderthehood, donotopenthehooduntiltheradiatorhashadtime tocool.Nevertrytoopenacoolingsystempressure capwhentheradiatororcoolantbottleishot.

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench.

Torque Specifications

LugNut/Bolt Torque	LugNut/ Bolt Type	**Lug Nut/Bolt Size	LugNut/ Bolt Socket Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m)	Cone M14 x 1.50		22 mm
140 Ft-Lbs (190 N·m)	Flanged

**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.

NOTE: Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted. The lug nuts are a two-piece assembly. When the tires are being rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts and add two drops of oil at the interface between the lug nut/bolt and the washer.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a downward force applied to a component (no text or symbols present)

060505399

Do not oil wheel studs.

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

700 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Close-up of a car tire with a white arrow pointing to the wheel rim (no text or symbols)

0605005441

graph TD
    1 --> 2
    2 --> 3
    3 --> 4

graph TD
    1 --> 2
    2 --> 3
    3 --> 1
    4 --> 2
    4 --> 5
    5 --> 3

0605006372

WheelMountingSurface4And5LugNuts/BoltsTorquePattern

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice.

After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel.

WARNING!

To avoid the riskofforcing the vehicle off the jack, donottight enthe lugnuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

Jacking And Tire Changing 1500 Series Trucks

WARNING!

• Donotattempttochangeatireonthesideofthe vehicleclosetomovingtraffic.Pullfarenoughoff theroadtoavoidthedangerofbeinghitwhen operatingthejackorchangingthewheel.
• Beingunderajacked-upvehicleisdangerous. The vehiclecouldslipoffthejackandfallonyou. You couldbecrushed. Neverputanypartofyourbody underavehiclethatisonajack. If you needed to get underaraised vehicle, take it to aservice center where it can be raised on alift.
• Neverstartorruntheenginewhilethevehicleis onajack.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- Thejackisdesignedtobeusedasatoolfor changingtiresonly.Thejackshouldnotbeusedto liftthevehicleforservicepurposes.Thevehicle shouldbejackedonafirmlevelsurfaceonly. Avoidiceorslipperyareas.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspension system, there is a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled to assist with changing a tire.

If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be activated through the Uconnect® system. Refer to "Uconnect® Settings" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be activated through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

702 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

(EVIC)" or "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

JackLocation

The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passenger seat.

RemovalOfJackAndTools(1500Series)

To access the jack and jack tools you must remove the plastic access cover, located on the side of the front passengers seat. To remove the cover, pull the front part of the cover (closest to the front of the seat) toward you to release a locking tab. Once the front of the cover is loose, slide the cover toward the front of the seat until it is free from the seat frame.

Interior view of a car showing the seatbelt and side panel with a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

JackAccessCover

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 703

Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then slide the assembly out from under the seat.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard with a white arrow pointing to the lower side (no text or symbols visible)

JackAndTools(1500Series)

Release the tool bag straps from the jack and remove tools from bag.

Mechanical device with attached cable and housing (no visible text or symbols)

060573848

JackAndToolBag

704 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

There are 2 ways to assemble the tools:

AssembledForSpareTireLowering/Raising

0605048416

AssembledForSpareTireLowering/Raising

1 — Extension 1 3 — Extension 3
2 — Extension 2 4 — Wheel Wrench

CAUTION!

• Thewheelwrenchcanonlybeattachedtoextension3.
• Whenattachingthetooltothewinchmechanism besurethelargeflaredendopeningonextension1 ispositionedcorrectlyoverthewinchmechanism adjustingnut.
• Damagetothewheelwrench, extensions and winchmechanismmayoccurfromimpropertool assembly.

AssembledForJackOperation

0605048417

AssembledForJackOperation

1 — Extension With Jack Hook 4 — Extension 4
2 — Extension 2 5 — Wheel Wrench
3 — Extension 3

WARNING!

Afterusingthejackandtools,alwaysreinstallthem intheoriginalcarrierandlocation.Whiledriving youmayexperienceabruptstopping,rapidaccelerationorsharpturns.Aloosejack,tools,bracketor otherobjectsinthevehiclemaymovearoundwith force,resultinginseriousinjury.

706 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

RemovingTheSpareTire

1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the truck. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism tube.

Side view of a car's rear bumper with a tool and arrow indicating a component (no text or symbols)

InsertingTheJackExtensionTubeIntoTheAccessHole

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 707

1. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.

Mechanic using a tool to adjust or install a car component (no visible text or symbols)

RotatingTheWheelWrenchHandle

1. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain access to the spare tire retainer.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a car wheel mounted on a vehicle chassis with attached suspension components (no text or symbols)

PullingTheSpareTireOut

708 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

1. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the cable.

Illustration of hands cleaning a car tire with a cable (no text or symbols)

GainingAccessToTheRetainer

1. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.

Close-up of a hand adjusting a car tire wheel, no visible text or symbols

PullingTheRetainerThroughTheCenterOfTheWheel NOTE:The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.

Preparations

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

WARNING!

Donotattempttochangeatireonthesideofthe vehicleclosetomovingtraffic,pullfarenoughoff theroadtoavoidthedangerofbeinghitwhen operatingthejackorchangingthewheel.

1. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever into PARK. On four-wheel drive vehicles, shift the transfer case to the 4L position.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.

Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.

JackInstructions(1500Series)

WARNING!

Carefully follow the set of receiving warning to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

- Alwaysparkonafirm, levelsurfaceasfarfrom the edgeoftheroadwayaspossiblebeforeraisingthe vehicle.

(Continued)

710 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!(Continued)

• TurnontheHazardWarningflasher.
- Blockthewheeldiagonallyoppositethewheelto beraised.
- Settheparkingbrakefirmlyandsetanautomatic transmissioninPARK;amanualtransmissionin REVERSE.
- Neverstartorruntheenginewiththevehicleona jack.
- Donotletanyonesitinthevehiclewhenitisona jack.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Donotgetunderthevehiclewhenitisonajack.If youneedtogetunderaraisedvehicle,takeittoa servicecenterwhereitcanberaisedonalift.
• Onlyusethejackinthepositionsindicatedandfor liftingthisvehicleduringatirechange.
• If working on nor near a roadway, be extremely careful of motortraffic.
• Toassurethatsparetires,flatorinflated,are securelystowed,sparesmustbestowedwiththe valvestemfacingtheground.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

Donotattempttoraisethevehiclebyjackingon locationsotherthanthoseindicatedintheJacking Instructionsforthisvehicle.

1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.

060600714

JackWarningLabel

712 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

1. Placement of the jack:

4x2SeriesTrucksFrontJackingLocation

There is a jack location indicator on the rear portion of the lower control arm.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a pipe connection with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

4X2FrontJackingLocationIndicator

When changing a front wheel, place the scissor jack under the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown below.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a bracket and wheel assembly (no text or symbols)

4X2FrontJackingLocation

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 713

4x4SeriesTrucksFrontJackingLocation

There is a jack location indicator on the rear portion of the lower control arm.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing car suspension system with no visible text or symbols

4X4FrontJackingLocationIndicator

When changing a front wheel, place the scissor jack under the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown below.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing car suspension system with springs and brackets (no text or symbols)

4X4FrontJackingLocation

4x2and4x4RearJackingLocation

Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel wrench. The tube extension may be used but is not required.

714 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks, when changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube. Place the jack under the axle between the wheel and the shock bracket with the drive tubes extending to the rear.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a vehicle's lower body and suspension components (no text or symbols)

RearJackingLocation

Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.

CAUTION!

Before raising the wheel off the ground, makes sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required.

1. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise the vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.

WARNING!

Raisingthevehiclehigherthannecessarycanmake thevehicleunstableandcauseacollision.Itcould slipoffthejackandhurtsomeoneanearit.Raisethe vehicleonlyenoughtoremovethetire.

1. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 715

end of the wheel nuts toward the wheel. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.

1. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug nut torque refer to "Torque Specifications" in this section. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by you authorized dealer or service station.

WARNING!

Aloosetireorjackthrownforwardinacollisionor hardstopcouldinjuresomeoneinthevehicle.Alwaysstowthejackpartsandtheextratireandwheel intheplacesprovided.

1. Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap damage.
2. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial (thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.
3. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.

NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.

716 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

ToStowTheFlatOrSpare

NOTE: Vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels cannot be stored under the vehicle because the wheel retainer will not fit through the wheel pilot hole. Secure the flat tire in the bed of the truck. Havetheflattire repairedorreplacedimmediately.

WARNING!

Aloosetirethrownforwardinacollisionorhard stopcouldinjuretheoccupantsinthevehicle.Have thedeflated(flat)tirerepairedorreplacedimmediately.

1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing the ground and toward the rear of the vehicle for convenience in checking the spare tire inflation. Slide the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel.

Close-up of a hand holding a car tire with a lever, no visible text or symbols

ReinstallingTheRetainer

1. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and position it properly across the wheel opening.

Illustration of hands installing or adjusting a tire component (no text or symbols visible)

PushingTheRetainerThroughTheCenterOfThe WheelAndPositioningIt

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 717

1. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism tube.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a car wheel mounted on a vehicle chassis with attached suspension components (no text or symbols)

WheelWrenchAndJackExtensionTubeAssembledAndInPosition

718 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

1. Rotate the wheel wrench handle clockwise until the wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle. Continue to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip, or click three or four times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the tire several times to ensure it is firmly in place.

Person adjusting a car interior with tools (no visible text or symbols)

RotatingTheWheelWrenchHandle

NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.

ReinstallingTheJackAndTools(1500Series)

1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure the lug wrench is under the jack near the jack turn-screw.

Mechanical device with attached cable and housing (no visible text or symbols)

060573848

JackAndToolBag

1. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack.

3D illustration of a mechanical tool with crimping and attached components (no text or symbols)

060601443

JackAndToolsTied

1. Place the jack and tools in the storage position holding the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the jack and tools under the seat so that the bottom slot engages into the fastener on the floor.

720 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Close-up of a car's dashboard and engine compartment with a black arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard controls with an arrow pointing to a vehicle (no text or symbols visible)

JackHoldDownFastenerJackAndTools(1500Series)

NOTE: Ensure that the jack slides into the front hold down location.

1. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan. Reinstall the plastic cover.

WARNING!

Afterusingthejackandtools,alwaysreinstallthem intheoriginalcarrierandlocation.Whiledriving

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

youmayexperienceabruptstopping,rapidaccelerationorsharpturns.Aloosejack,tools,bracketor otherobjectsinthevehiclemaymovearoundwith force,resultinginseriousinjury.

Jacking And Tire Changing 2500 And 3500 Series Trucks

WARNING!

• Donotattempttochangeatireonthesideofthe vehicleclosetomovingtraffic.Pullfarenoughoff theroadtoavoidthedangerofbeinghitwhen operatingthejackorchangingthewheel.
• Beingunderajacked-upvehicleisdangerous. The vehiclecouldslipoffthejackandfallonyou. You

WARNING!(Continued)

couldbecrushed. Neverputanypartofyourbody underavehiclethatisonajack. If you needed to get underaraised vehicle, take it to as service center where it can be raised on alift.

• Neverstartorruntheenginewhilethevehicleis onajack.
• Thejackisdesignedtobeusedasatoolfor changingtiresonly.Thejackshouldnotbeusedto liftthevehicleforservicepurposes.Thevehicle shouldbejackedonafirmlevelsurfaceonly. Avoidiceorslipperyareas.

JackLocation

The jack and jack tools are stored under the front passenger seat.

(Continued)

722 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

RemovalOfJackAndTools(2500,3500Series)

To access the jack and jack tools you must remove the plastic access cover, located on the side of the front passengers seat. To remove the cover, pull the front part of the cover (closest to the front of the seat) toward you to release a locking tab. Once the front of the cover is loose, slide the cover toward the front of the seat until it is free from the seat frame.

Interior view of a car showing the seatbelt and side panel with a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

JackAccessCover

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 723

Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then slide the assembly out from under the seat.

Remove the jack and tools from the bracket assembly. Turn the jack-turn-screw counterclockwise to release jack from bracket assembly.

Mechanical component with a downward arrow indicating a change, mounted on a vehicle roof (no text or symbols visible)

3D mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components of a gun or projectile (no text or symbols)

WingBolt/JackAndTools(2500/3500Series)JackAndToolsBracketAssembly

724 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

There are 2 ways to assemble the tools:

AssembledForSpareTireLowering/Raising

0605048416

AssembledForSpareTireLowering/Raising

1 — Extension 1 3 — Extension 3
2 — Extension 2 4 — Wheel Wrench

CAUTION!

• Thewheelwrenchcanonlybeattachedtoextension3.
• Whenattachingthetooltothewinchmechanism besurethelargeflaredendopeningonextension1 ispositionedcorrectlyoverthewinchmechanism adjustingnut.
• Damagetothewheelwrench, extensions and winchmechanismmayoccurfromimpropertool assembly.

AssembledForJackOperation

0605048418

AssembledForJackOperation

1 — Extension With Jack Hook 4 — Extension 4
2 — Extension 2 5 — Wheel Wrench
3 — Extension 3

WARNING!

Afterusingthejackandtools,alwaysreinstallthem intheoriginalcarrierandlocation.Whiledriving youmayexperienceabruptstopping,rapidaccelerationorsharpturns.Aloosejack,tools,bracketor otherobjectsinthevehiclemaymovearoundwith force,resultinginseriousinjury.

RemovingTheSpareTire

1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the truck. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism tube.

726 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Side view of a car's rear bumper with a tool and bracket, showing no text or symbols on the vehicle itself.

InsertingTheJackExtensionTubeIntoTheAccessHole

1. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.

Mechanic using a tool to adjust the engine compartment of a car (no text or symbols visible)

RotatingTheWheelWrenchHandle

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 727

1. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain access to the spare tire retainer.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a car wheel mounted on a vehicle chassis with attached suspension components (no text or symbols)

PullingTheSpareTireOut

1. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the cable.

Illustration of hands installing or adjusting a car tire component (no text or symbols visible)

GainingAccessToTheRetainer

1. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.

728 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Close-up of a hand using a tool to adjust or install a car tire component (no visible text or symbols)

PullingTheRetainerThroughTheCenterOfTheWheel

NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.

Preparations

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

WARNING!

Donotattempttochangeatireonthesideofthe vehicleclosetomovingtraffic,pullfarenoughoff theroadtoavoidthedangerofbeinghitwhen operatingthejackorchangingthewheel.

1. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever into PARK. On four-wheel drive vehicles, shift the transfer case to the 4L position.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.

Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.

JackInstructions(2500,3500Series)

WARNING!

Carefully follow the set of receiving warning to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

- Alwaysparkonafirm, levelsurfaceasfarfromthe edgeoftheroadwayaspossiblebeforeraisingthe vehicle.

WARNING!(Continued)

• TurnontheHazardWarningflasher.
- Blockthewheeldiagonallyoppositethewheelto beraised.
- Settheparkingbrakefirmlyandsetanautomatic transmissioninPARK;amanualtransmissionin REVERSE.
- Neverstartorruntheenginewiththevehicleona jack.
- Donotletanyonesitinthevehiclewhenitisona jack.
- Donotgetunderthevehiclewhenitisonajack. If youneedtogetunderaraisedvehicle, takeittoa servicecenterwhereitcanberaisedonalift.
- Onlyusethejackinthepositionsindicatedandfor liftingthisvehicleduringatirechange.

(Continued)

(Continued)

730 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!(Continued)

• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motortraffic.
• Toassurethatsparetires,flatorinflated,are securelystowed,sparesmustbestowedwiththe valvestemfacingtheground.

060600714

JackWarningLabel

Mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components with a white arrow pointing to a specific part (no text or symbols present)

LugWrenchAdaptorShownInJackAndTools Assembly

CAUTION!

Donotattempttoraisethevehiclebyjackingon locationsotherthanthoseindicatedintheJacking Instructionsforthisvehicle.

1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. Changing a dually tire requires the lug wrench adapter.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with hub caps/wheel covers they must be removed before raising the vehicle off the ground. Refer to "Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped" in this section.

732 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Close-up of a car wheel rim with a black arrow pointing to the center bull (no text or symbols visible)

Top-down view of a car tire wheel with a lever and four brake pads (no text or symbols visible)

LugWrenchAdapterLugWrenchAdapterAndWrench

3. Placement of the jack:

FrontJackingLocation

When changing the front wheel, assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube. Place the jack under the axle as close to the tire as possible with the drive tubes extending to the front. Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.

Front view of a black Toyota T-9 car with two upward arrows indicating side-mounted or head-mounted components (no text or symbols present)

060609050
FrontJackingLocation

RearJackingLocation

When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube. Place the jack under the axle between the spring and the shock absorber with the drive tubes extending to the rear.

734 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Top-down view of a black 4X4 pickup truck showing front wheel, exhaust pipes, and tire tracks (no text or symbols on the vehicle itself)

RearJackingLocation

Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.

CAUTION!

Before raising the wheel off the ground, makes sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required.

NOTE: If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial (thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack.

1. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.

WARNING!

Raisingthevehiclehigherthannecessarycanmake thevehicleunstableandcauseacollision.Itcould slipoffthejackandhurtsomeonearit.Raisethe vehicleonlyenoughtoremovethetire.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 735

1. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. On single rear-wheel (SRW) trucks, install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the wheel nuts toward the wheel. On 3500 dual rear-wheel models (DRW) trucks, if the outer tire is being replaced then leave the inner wheel on the vehicle. If the inner wheel is being replaced remove the outer wheel and replace the inner wheel. The wheel nuts are a two-piece assembly with a flat face. Lightly tighten the wheel nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.

Close-up of a car tire with a black arrow pointing to the wheel rim (no text or symbols visible)

RearInnerWheelProperPlacement(DualRearWheel Equipped)

736 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Close-up of an aircraft landing gear assembly with visible tire and valve (no text or symbols)

DualRearWheelPlacement

1. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug nut torque refer to "Torque Specifications" in this section. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have

them checked with a torque wrench by you authorized dealer or service station.

WARNING!

Aloosetireorjackthrownforwardinacollisionor hardstopcouldinjuresomeoneinthevehicle.Alwaysstowthejackpartsandtheextratireandwheel intheplacesprovided.

1. Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap damage.
2. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.

NOTE: If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial (thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 737

1. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.

NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.

ToStowTheFlatOrSpare

NOTE: Havetheflattirerepairedorreplacedimmediately.

WARNING!

Aloosetirethrownforwardinacollisionorhard stopcouldinjuretheoccupantsinthevehicle.Have thedeflated(flat)tirerepairedorreplacedimmediately.

1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing the ground and toward the rear of the vehicle for convenience in checking the spare tire inflation. Slide the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel.

Close-up of a hand adjusting a car tire wheel rim, no visible text or symbols

ReinstallingTheRetainer

1. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and position it properly across the wheel opening.

738 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Illustration of hands cleaning a car tire with cable (no text or symbols)

PushingTheRetainerThroughTheCenterOfThe WheelAndPositioningIt

1. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism tube.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a car wheel mounted on a vehicle chassis with attached suspension components (no text or symbols)

WheelWrenchAndJackExtensionTubeAssembledAndInPosition

1. Rotate the wheel wrench handle clockwise until the wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle. Continue to rotate until you feel the winch

mechanism slip, or click three or four times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the tire several times to ensure it is firmly in place.

Person using a tool to adjust or install a car's seat panel (no text or symbols visible)

RotatingTheWheelWrenchHandle

NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.

ReinstallingTheJackAndTools(2500And3500 Series)

1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug.

2. Position the jack and tools into bracket assembly. Make sure the lug wrench is under the jack near the jack turn-screw. Snap tools into bracket assembly clips. Install the jack into bracket assembly and turn the jack-turn-screw clockwise until jack is snug into bracket assembly.

740 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

JackAndToolsBracketAssemblyJackHoldDownFastener

1. Place the jack and tool bracket assembly in the storage position holding the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the jack and tools under the seat so that the bottom slot engages into the fastener on the floor.

NOTE: Ensure that the jack and tool bracket assembly slides into the front hold down location.

1. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan. Reinstall the plastic cover.

Mechanical component with a black arrow pointing to a disassembly lock, no visible text or symbols

WingBolt/JackAndTools(2500/3500Series) HubCaps/WheelCovers—IfEquipped

The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle off the ground.

CAUTION!

Useextremec cautionwhenremovingthefrontand rearcentercaps.Damagecanoccurtothecentercap and/orthewheelifscrewdrivertypetoolsareused.A pullingmotion,notapryoffmotion,isrecommendedtoremovethecaps.

For single rear wheel (SRW) models, use the flat blade on the end of the lug wrench to pull the hub cap off. Insert the blade end into the pull off notch and carefully pull the hub cap off with a back and forth motion.

On 3500 models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you must first remove the hub caps. The jack handle driver has a hook at one end that will fit in the pull off notch of the rear hub caps. Position the hook and pull straight out on the ratchet firmly. The hub cap should pop off. The wheel skins can now be removed. For the front hub cap, use the

742 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

flat blade on the end of the lug wrench to pull the caps off. The wheel skin can now be removed.

CAUTION!

• Useapullingmotiontoremovethehubcap.Donot useatwistingmotionwhenremovingthehubcap, damagetothehubcap;finishmayoccur.
• Therearhubcapsonthedualrearwheelhastwo pulloffnotches.Makesurethatthehookofthe jackhandledriverislocatedsquarelyinthecap notchbeforeattemptingtopulloff.

You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pull off the wheel skins. Locate the hub cap pull notches (2 notches on each cap). Insert the flat tip completely and using a back and forth motion, loosen the wheel skin. Repeat this procedure around the tire until the skin pops off.

Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet. When replacing the hub caps, tilt the cap retainer over the lug nut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a rubber mallet. Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins are firmly seated around the wheel.

HOISTING

A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking locations. Refer to the graphics that show jacking locations. However, a floor jack or frame hoist must never be used on any other parts of the underbody.

CAUTION!

Neveruseafloorjackdirectlyunderthedifferential housingofaloadedtruckordamagetoyourvehicle mayresult.

JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.

CAUTION!

Donotuseaportablebatteryboosterpackorany otherboostersourcewithasystemvoltagegreater than12Voltsordamagetothebattery,startermotor, alternatororelectricalsystemmayoccur.

WARNING!

Donotattemptjump-startingifthebatteryisfrozen. Itcouldruptureorexplodeandcausepersonalinjury.

Preparations For Jump-Start

The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.

NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive post.

744 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Battery(GasModelShown)

1 — Positive Battery Post

2 — Fuses

Battery(DieselModelShown)

1 — Positive Battery Post

2 — Fuses

WARNING!

• Takecaretoavoidtheradiatorcoolingfanwheneverthehoodisraised.ItcanstartanytimetheignitionswitchisON.Youcanbeinjuredbymovingfanblades.
- Removeanymetaljewelrysuchasrings, watch bandsandbraceletsthatcouldmakeaninadvertent electricalcontact. Youcouldbeseriouslyinjured.
- Batteriescontainsulfuricacidthatcanburnyour skinoreyesandgeneratehydrogengaswhichis flammableandexplosive.Keepopenflamesor sparksawayfromthebattery.

1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

Donotallowvehiclestotoucheachotherasthis couldestablishagroundconnectionandpersonal injurycouldresult.

Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damaged due to battery explosion.

746 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in damageto the charging system of the booster vehicle orthedischarged vehicle.

ConnectingTheJumperCables

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
   NOTE: Donotjumpoffuses. Only jump directly off positive post.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)jumper cable to the positive (+)post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)jumper cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of

the discharged vehicle's engine) away from the battery and the fuel injection system.

WARNING!

Donotconnectthejumpercabletothenegative(-) postofthedischargedbattery. Theresultingelectricalsparkcouldcausethebatterytoexplodeand couldresultinpersonalinjury. Onlyusethespecific groundpoint, donotuseanyotherexposedmetal parts.

1. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.

CAUTION!

Donotconnectjumpercabletoanyofthefuseson thepositivebatteryterminal. Theresultingelectrical currentwillblowthefuse.

1. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:

DisconnectingTheJumperCables

1. Disconnect the negative (-)end of the jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the positive (+)end of the jumper cable from the positive (+)post of the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Accessoriespluggedintothevehiclepoweroutlets drawpowerfromthevehicle'sbattery,evenwhennot inuse(i.e.,cellularphones,etc.).Eventually,if pluggedinlongenoughwithoutengineoperation, thevehicle'sbatterywilldischargesufficiently to degradebatterylifeand/orpreventtheenginefrom starting.

748 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd gear and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently pushing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.

NOTE: For trucks equipped with 8-speed automatic transmission: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than two seconds, you must push the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.

CAUTION!

Racingtheengineorspinningthewheelsmayleadto transmissionoverheatingandfailure.AllowtheenginetoidlewiththetransmissioninNEUTRALforat leastoneminuteaftereveryfiverocking-motion cycles.Thiswillminimizeoverheatingandreduce theriskofclutchortransmissionfailureduring prolongedeffortstofreeastuckvehicle.

NOTE: Push the "ESC Off" switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control" in "Starting And Operating" for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the "ESC Off" switch again to restore "ESC On" mode.

CAUTION!

• When "rocking" astuckvehiclebyshiftingbetweenDRIVE/2ndgearandREVERSE, donotspin thewheelsfasterthan15mph(24km/h), ordrive-traindamagemayresult.
• Revvingtheengineorspinningthewheelstoofast mayleadtotransmissionoverheatingandfailure. Itcanalsodamagethetires.Donotspinthewheels above30mph(48km/h)whileingear(notransmissionshiftingoccurring).

WARNING!(Continued)

explode and injuresomeone. Donotspinyourvehicle'swheelsfasterthan30mph(48km/h)orfor longerthan30secondscontinuouslywithoutstoppingwhenyouarestuckanddonotletanyonenear aspinningwheel,nomatterwhatthespeed.

EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow hooks.

NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle.

WARNING!

Fastspinningtirescanbedangerous. Forcesgenerated by excessive wheels speeds may caused damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. Atire could

(Continued)

WARNING!

• Donotuseachainforfreeingastuckvehicle. Chainsmaybreak,causingseriousinjuryordeath.
• Standclearofvehicleswhenpullingwithtow hooks.Towstrapsmaybecomedisengaged,causingseriousinjury.

CAUTION!

Towhooksareforemergencyuseonlytorescuea vehiclestrandedoff-road.Donotusetowhooksfor towtruckhookuporhighwaytowing.Youcould damageyourvehicle.

If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can use one of the following procedures to temporarily move the shift lever:

Column Shifter — If Equipped

1. Turn the engine off.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position.
4. Push and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool, into the access port (ringed circle) on the bottom of the steering column and push and hold the override release lever up.

Interior view of a car showing dashboard, steering wheel, and seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

ShiftLeverOverrideAccessPort

1. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.

2. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.

Center Console Shifter — If Equipped

1. Turn the engine off.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the shift lever override access cover (located to the right of the shift lever).
4. Push and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access hole, and push and hold the override release lever down.

752 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Mechanical gear shift lever mechanism with control buttons and a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

ShiftLeverOverrideAccessCover

1. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
2. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
3. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.

MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED TRANSMISSION

WARNING!

Alwayssecureyourvehiclebyfullyapplyingthe parkingbrake, beforeactivatingtheManualPark Release. ActivatingtheManualParkReleasewill allowyourvehicletorollawayifitisnotsecuredby theparkingbrakeorbyproperconnectiontoatow vehicle. ActivatingtheManualParkReleaseonan unsecuredvehiclecouldleadtoseriousinjuryor deathforthoseinoraroundthevehicle.

In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), a Manual Park Release is available.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 753

Interior view of a vehicle showing a parking control panel with an arrow pointing to the front compartment (no text or symbols visible)

ManualParkReleasePullStrap

Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park Release:

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the Manual Park Release access cover, which is just above the parking brake release handle, below and to the left of the steering column.

3. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, push the Manual Park Release lever locking tab (just below the middle of the lever) to the right.

4. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever rearward, until it locks in place pointing towards the driver's seat. Release the locking tab and verify that the Manual Park Release lever is locked in the released position.

5. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle.

754 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

ToResetTheManualParkRelease:

1. Push the locking tab to the right, to unlock the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward to its original position, until the locking tab snaps into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull gently on the tether strap to confirm that the lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Re-install the access cover.

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.

NOTE: Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be placed in Transport mode, before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to "Air Suspension" in "Starting and Operating" for more information. If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.

Towing Condition	Wheels OFFthe Ground	2WDModels4WDModels
Flat Tow NONE Iftransmissionisoperable:Transmission in NEUTRAL30 mph (48 km/h)maxspeed15 miles (24 km)maxdistance(6-speed transmission)30 miles (48 km)maxdistance(8-speed transmission)			Seeinstructionsin“RecreationalTowing”under“StartingandOperating”Automatic Transmission in PARKManual Transmission in gear (NOT NEUTRAL)Transfer Case in NEUTRAL(N)Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow	Front NOTALLOWED
	Rear OK	NOTALLOWED
Flatbed ALLBESTMETHODBESTMETHOD

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer's instructions. Use of safety chains is

mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.

756 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC position.

If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to "Manual Park Release" or "Shift Lever Override" in this section for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing.

CAUTION!

• Donotuseslingtypeequipmentwhentowing. Vehicledamagemayoccur.
• Whensecuringthevehicletoaflatbedtruck,do notattachtofrontorrearsuspensioncomponents. Damagetoyourvehiclemayresultfromimproper towing.

Two-Wheel Drive Models

The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.

If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, this vehicle may be towed (with rear wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:

• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
- The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
- The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km) for 6-speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) for 8-speed transmission.

If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 15 miles (24 km) for 6-speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) for 8-speed transmission, tow with the rear wheels OFFthe ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or with the front wheels raised

and the rear wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position) with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle inviolation of the aboverequirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission damage. Damage from impropertowing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Four-Wheel Drive Models

The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFFthe ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.

If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer case is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the

forward direction, with ALLwheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK(for automatic transmissions) or in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL, for manual transmissions). Refer to "Recreational Towing" in "Starting And Operating" for further information and detailed instructions.

CAUTION!

• Frontorrearwheelliftsmustnotbeused. Internal damagetothetransmissionortransfercasewill occurifafrontorrearwheelliftisusedwhen towing.
• Towing this vehicle inviolation of the aboverequirements can cause severetransmission and/or transfercased damage. Damage from impropertowing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

■ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . .762
■ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L ..... .763
■ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L . . . . . . . . . . .764
■ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .765
□Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .....765
■EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS....766
■REPLACEMENT PARTS....767
■DEALER SERVICE....768
■MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES....768

□Engine Oil....769
□Engine Oil Filter....773
□Engine Air Cleaner Filter .....773
□Accessory Drive Belt Inspection....776
□Maintenance-Free Battery....778
□Air Conditioner Maintenance .....779
□Front Driveshaft Lubrication — 2500/3500 (Four-Wheel Drive Models Only) .....781
□Body Lubrication....781
□Windshield Wiper Blades .....782

760 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

□Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785

□Exhaust System....786

□Cooling System....788

□Brake System....796

☐Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level....798

□Transfer Case....799

□Automatic Transmission....799

□Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion....803

■FUSES....812

□Power Distribution Center....813

■VEHICLE STORAGE....822

■REPLACEMENT BULBS....822

■BULB REPLACEMENT....824

☐Base Quad / Premium Bi-Halogen: Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, Front Park And Turn — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824

□Fog Lamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826

□Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal And Backup Lamps....827

□Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) With Cargo Lamp .828

□Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped . . . .830

☐Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear Wheels) — If Equipped. .832

□Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) — If Equipped....833

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 761

■FLUID CAPACITIES....834

□Engine....836

■FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE

□Chassis....840

PARTS 836

762 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L

1 — Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Battery
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L

071405704

1 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (6-Speed Trans Only) 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (2500/3500 Models Only)
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
6 — Battery

764 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L

0745005289

1 — Coolant Pressure Bottle 6 — Battery
2 — Transmission Dipstick 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Washer Solvent
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Air Cleaner Filter

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• ProlongeddrivingwiththeMILoncouldcause furtherdamagetotheemissioncontrolsystem.It couldalsoaffectfueleconomyanddriveability. Thevehiclemustbeservicedbeforeanyemissions testscanbeperformed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running, severecatalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediately service is required.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator will display in the EVIC/DID telltale display

area. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center

766 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

(EVIC)" or "Driver Information Display (DID)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.

A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.

NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.

1. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.

2. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:

3. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is notready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.

4. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is notready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is nowready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

768 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

DEALER SERVICE

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!

Youcanbebadlyinjuredworkingonorarounda motorvehicle.Onlydoserviceworkforwhichyou havetheknowledgeandtheproperequipment.If youhaveanydoubtaboutyourabilitytoperforma

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

servicejob, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.

Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed "Maintenance Schedule", there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future.

CAUTION!

- Failuretoproperlymaintainyourvehicleorperformrepairsandservicewhennecessarycould resultinmorecostlyrepairs,damagetoother

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

componentsornegativelyimpactvehicleperformance.Immediatelyhavepotentialmalfunctions examinedbyanauthorizeddealerorqualified repaircenter.

- Yourvehiclehasbeenbuiltwithimprovedfluids thatprotecttheperformanceanddurabilityofyour vehicleandalsoallowextendedmaintenanceintervals.Donotusechemicalflushesinthesecomponentsasthechemicalscandamageyourengine, transmission,powersteeringorairconditioning. SuchdamageisnotcoveredbytheNewVehicle LimitedWarranty.Ifaflushisneededbecauseof componentmalfunction,useonlythespecified fluidfortheflushingprocedure.

Engine Oil

CheckingOilLevel

To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle's engine, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines.

770 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Overfillingorunderfillingthecrankcasewillcause oilaerationorlossofoilpressure.Thiscoulddamage yourengine.

ChangeEngineOil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.

NOTE:1500ModelsOnly

- Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months on 1500 trucks, whichever comes first.

2500-3500Models

- Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km) or twelve months on 2500 – 3500 trucks, whichever comes first.

EngineOilSelection

For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-6395.

AmericanPetroleumInstitute(API)EngineOil IdentificationSymbol

This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourengineoilasthe chemicalscandamageyourengine.Suchdamageis notcoveredbytheNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

EngineOilViscosity—3.6LEngines(1500Models Only)

MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA US Material Standard MS-6395 or equivalent Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA US Material Standard MS-6395 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.

772 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

EngineOilViscosity—5.7LEngine(1500/2500/3500 Models)

MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to "Engine Compartment" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

NOTE:

- Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

- For 2500/3500 trucks with a 5.7L engine operating under a gross combined weight rating of 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) or greater, SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures.

EngineOilViscosity—6.4LEngine

Use Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 engine or equivalent MOPAR oil meeting the FCA US Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” in this section.

SyntheticEngineOils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed.

DisposingOfUsedEngineOilAndOilFilters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.

Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change.

EngineOilFilterSelection

This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high

quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Theairinductionsystem(aircleaner,hoses,etc.)can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Donotremovetheairinduction system (air cleaner, hoses,etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Makes sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,etc.) removed. Failure to dosocan result in serious personal injury.

774 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

EngineAirCleanerFilterSelection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.

EngineAirCleanerFilterInspection and Replacement

Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris you should change your air cleaner filter.

EngineAirCleanerFilterRemoval

1. Release the spring clips from the air cleaner cover.

3.6L/5.7LAirCleanerFilterCover

1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Air Hose
3 — Spring Clips

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 775

6.4LAirCleanerFilterCover

1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Spring Clips

1. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter.

OpenAirCleanerFilterAssembly

1 — Air Cleaner Cover
2 — Air Cleaner Filter

776 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing assembly.

Close-up of a car engine compartment with visible structural lines and numbered components (no text or symbols)

AirCleanerFilter

1 — Air Cleaner Filter

2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface

EngineAirCleanerFilterInstallation

NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is present before replacing the air filter element.

1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner cover to the housing assembly.

Accessory Drive Belt Inspection

WARNING!

- Donotattempttoinspectanaccessorydrivebelt withvehiclerunning.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time regardless of ignition switch position. You could be injured by themoving fan blades.
• Youcanbebadlyinjuredworkingonorarounda motorvehicle.Onlydoserviceworkforwhichyou havetheknowledgeandtheproperequipment.If youhaveanydoubtaboutyourabilitytoperforma servicejob,takeyourvehicletoacompetentmechanic.

When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be

replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing internal components with a magnified inset highlighting a specific section (no text or symbols present)

AccessoryBelt(SerpentineBelt)

Conditions that would require replacement:

• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt body)
• Rib or belt wear
• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
• Belt slips
• "Groove jumping"(belt does not maintain correct position on pulley)
• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before new belt is installed)
• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)

Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected for damage and proper alignment.

Belt replacement on some models requires the use of special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.

Maintenance-Free Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

WARNING!

- Batteryfluidisacorrosiveacidsolutionandcan burnorevenblindyou.Donotallowbatteryfluid tocontactyoureyes,skin,orclothing.Donotlean overabatterywhenattachingclamps.Ifacid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediatelywithlargeamountsofwater.Referto

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

"Jump-StartingProcedures" in "WhatToDoIn Emergencies" for further information.

• Batterygasisflammableandexplosive.Keep flameorsparksawayfromthebattery.Donotuse aboosterbatteryoranyotherboostersourcewith anoutputgreaterthan12Volts.Donotallowcable clampstotoucheachother.
• Batteryposts,terminals,andrelatedaccessories containleadandleadcompounds.Washhands afterhandling.

CAUTION!

- Itisessentialwhenreplacingthecablesonthe batterythatthepositivecableisattachedtothe positivepostandthenegativecableisattachedto

CAUTION!(Continued)

thenegativepost.Batterypostsaremarkedpositive (+)andnegative(-)andareidentifiedonthe batterycase.Cableclampsshouldbetightonthe terminalpostsandfreeofcorrosion.

- Ifa "fastcharger" is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Donot use a "fastcharger" to provide starting voltage.

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.

(Continued)

WARNING!

• Useonlyrefrigerantsandcompressorlubricants approvedbythemanufacturerforyourairconditioningsystem.Someunapprovedrefrigerantsare flammableandcanexplode,injuringyou.Other unapprovedrefrigerantsorlubricantscancausethe systemtofail,requiringcostlyrepairs.Referto WarrantyInformationBook,locatedontheDVD, forfurtherwarrantyinformation.
• The airconditioningsystem contains refrigerant underhigh pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury, ordamageto the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring linestobedisconnected should bed one by an experienced technician.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourairconditioning systemasthechemicalscandamageyourairconditioningcomponents.Suchdamageisnotcoveredby theNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a—If Equipped

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO1234yf —If Equipped

HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.

Front Driveshaft Lubrication — 2500/3500 (Four-Wheel Drive Models Only)

Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil change. Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals. Use MOPAR® Type MS-6560 (lithium-based grease), or equivalent.

Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

782 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Windshield Wiper Blades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.

The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected periodically, not just when wiper performance problems are experienced. This inspection should include the following points:

• Wear Or Uneven Edges
• Foreign Material
• Hardening Or Cracking
• Deformation Or Fatigue

If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.

WiperBladeRemoval/Installation

CAUTION!

Donotallowthewiperarmtospringbackagainst theglasswithoutthewiperbladeinplaceortheglass maybedamaged.

1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.

WiperBladeWithReleaseTabInLockedPosition

1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab

784 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

1. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, press the release tab on the wiper blade and while holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.

WiperBladeWithReleaseTabInUnlockedPosition

1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab

1. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm.

WiperBladeRemovedFromWiperArm

1 — Wiper Blade
2 — WiperArm
3 — Release Tab

1. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 785

InstallingTheFrontWipers

1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the wiper arm.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in the wiper blade.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm, latch engagement will be accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.

Adding Washer Fluid

The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the

786 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help blade performance.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers.

WARNING!

Commerciallyavailablewindshieldwashersolvents areflammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washers solution.

After the engine has warmed up, operate the defroster for a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or

freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Windshield washer solution used with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.

Exhaust System

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the

exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!

• Exhaustgasescaninjureorkill. They contain carbonmonoxide(CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to "Safety Tips/ExhaustGas" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
• Ahotexhaustsystemcanstartafireifyoupark overmaterialsthatcanburn.Suchmaterialsmight begrassorleavescomingintocontactwithyour exhaustsystem.Donotparkoroperateyourvehicleinareaswhereyourehaustsystemcancontactanythingthatcanburn.

CAUTION!

• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and causes serious damage to the engine.
• Damagetothecatalyticconvertercanresultifyour vehicleisnotkeptinproperoperatingcondition. Intheeventofenginemalfunction,particularly involvingenginemisfireorotherapparentlossof performance,haveyourvehicleservicedpromptly. Continuedoperationofyourvehiclewithasevere malfunctioncouldcausetheconvertertooverheat, resultinginpossibledamagetothecverterand vehicle.

788 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

Cooling System

WARNING!

Youorotherscanbebadlyburnedbyhotengine coolant(antifreeze)orsteamfromyourradiator.If youseeorhearsteamcomingfromunderthehood, donotopenthehooduntiltheradiatorhashadtime

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

tocool.Nevertrytoopenacoolingsystempressure capwhentheradiatorishot.

EngineCoolantChecks

Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.

Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature (but not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. The radiator drain cock is located in the lower radiator tank. If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant expansion bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

CoolingSystem—DrainFlushAndRefill

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a

reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze).

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.

SelectionOfCoolant

Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

CAUTION!

• Mixingofenginecoolant(antifreeze)otherthan specifiedOrganicAdditiveTechnology(OAT)enginecoolant(antifreeze),mayresultinengine damageandmaydecreasecorrosionprotection.
  OrganicAdditiveTechnology(OAT)enginecool-antisdifferentandshouldnotbemixedwith

CAUTION!(Continued)

HybridOrganicAdditiveTechnology(HOAT)enginecoolant(antifreeze)orany"globallycompatible"coolant(antifreeze).Ifanon-OATengine coolant(antifreeze)isintroducedintothecooling systeminemergency,thecoolingsystemwill needtobedrained,flushed,andrefilledwithfresh OATcoolant(conformingtoMS.90032),byanauthorizeddealerassoonaspossible.

• Donotusewateraloneoralcohol-basedengine coolant(antifreeze)products.Donotuseadditional rustinhibitorsorantirustproducts,astheymaynot becompatiblewiththeradiatorenginecoolantand mayplugtheradiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

(Continued)

AddingCoolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.

Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

- We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.

• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70% ) if temperatures below -34^ (-37^) are anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.

Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.

792 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.

CoolingSystemPressureCap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that the engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!

• Donotopenhotenginecoolingsystem. Neveradd enginecoolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Donotloosenorremovethecaptocool anoverheated engine. Heat causes pressure to buildup in the coolingsystem. Topreventscalding or injury, donotremovethe pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Donotuseapressurecapotherthantheone specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or enginedamagemayresult.

DisposalOfUsedEngineCoolant

Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.

CheckingCoolantLevel—3.6Land5.7LEngines

With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant should be between the ADD and SAFE range on the dipstick.

To check the coolant level:

1. Open the coolant reservoir.

Close-up of a mechanical component with two bolts and a separate housing, no visible text or symbols

OpeningTheCoolantReservoir

1. Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the reservoir neck.

794 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Close-up of a hand using a tool to adjust or install a mechanical component (no visible text or symbols)

CoolantReservoirDipstick

1. Check the coolant level on the dipstick.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant

of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

CheckingCoolantLevel—6.4LEngine

The level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant bottle should be between the "MIN" and "MAX" range on the bottle when the engine is cold.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant

bottle need only be checked once a month. When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

PointsToRemember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

- Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.

• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.

796 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

- Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

Brake System

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Ridingthebrakescanleadtobrakefailureand possiblyacollision.Drivingwithyourfootrestingor ridingonthebrakepedalcanresultinabnormally

WARNING!(Continued)

highbraketemperatures,excessiveliningwear,and possiblebrakedamage.Youwouldnothaveyourfull brakingcapacityinanemergency.

BrakeFluidLevelCheck

The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked when performing under the hood service or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure.

The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic reservoir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a "MAX" dot and an "MIN" dot. The fluid level must be kept within these two dots. Do not add fluid above the MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap.

(Continued)

With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check should be conducted.

Use only the manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

WARNING!

- Useonlymanufacturer's recommended brakefluid. Referto "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brakes system and or impair its performance. The property of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.

WARNING!(Continued)

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid thathas been in at least closed container. Keep them master cylinder reservoir arc secure data all times. Brake fluid a open container absorbsmoisture from the air resulting in lower boiling point. This may cause it to oil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.
  • Overfilling thebrakefluidreservoircanresultin spillingbrakefluidonhotengineparts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damagepaintedandvinylsurfaces, careshouldbe takentoavoiditscontactwiththesesurfaces.
• Donotallowpetroleumbasedfluidtocontaminate thebrakefluid.Brakesealcomponentscouldbe damaged,causingpartialorcompletebrake failure. Thiscouldresultinacollision.

(Continued)

798 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level

For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information. This inspection should be made with the vehicle in a level position.

For 1500 Model axles, the fluid level should be even with the bottom of the fill hole (within 1/4 in (6.4 mm) of edge of hole) for the FDU215 HD front axle and C235FE rear axle.

For all 2500/3500 Model axles, the fluid level should be 1/4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on the 9.25 in front and 3/4 in ± 1/4 in (19 mm ± 6.4 mm) on 10.5 in rear axles. The 11.5 in rear axle level should be 1/4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole.

DrainAndRefill

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

LubricantSelection

Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will result in corrosion and possible failure of differential components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be encountered in some off-highway types of service, will require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.

Limited-SlipDifferentials

1500 Model rear axles equipped with a Limited Slip Differential require that 5 oz. (148 ml) MOPAR® Limited Slip Additive be added to the gear lubricant. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information. The MOPAR®

Limited Slip Additive should be added to the gear lubricant whenever a fluid change is made to an axle equipped with a Limited Slip Differential.

2500/3500 Model axles DONOTREQUIREany limited slip oil additive (friction modifiers).

NOTE: When refilling an axle with a Limited Slip Differential, (which requires a Limited Slip Additive), the Limited Slip Additive should be added before the gear lubricant is added to insure proper additive fill.

Transfer Case

DrainAndRefill

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.

LubricantSelection

Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

FluidLevelCheck

This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position.

Automatic Transmission

SelectionOfLubricant

It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer's specified transmission fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.

CAUTION!

Usingatransmissionfluidotherthanthemanufac-turer'srecommendedfluidmaycausedeterioration intransmissionshiftqualityand/or torqueconverter shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and filterchanges. Referto "Fluids, Lubricants, and GenuineParts" in this section for fluids specifications.

SpecialAdditives

The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourtransmissionas thechemicalscandamageyourtransmissioncomponents.SuchdamageisnotcoveredbytheNew VehicleLimitedWarranty.

FluidLevelCheck—Eight-SpeedTransmission

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools.

If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.

CAUTION!

Ifatransmissionfluidleakoccurs,visityourauthorizeddealerimmediately.Severetransmissiondamagemayoccur.Yourauthorizeddealerhastheproper toolstoadjustthefluidlevelaccurately.

FluidLevelCheck—Six-SpeedTransmission

It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission is at normal operating temperature (170-180°F / 77-82°C). This normally occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km) of driving. At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips. You can read the transmission sump temperature in the EVIC/DID screen (refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center [EVIC]” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” for further information).

Use the following procedure to check the transmission fluid level properly:

1. Monitor the transmission temperature using the EVIC/DID screen, and operate the vehicle as required to reach the normal operating temperature. If the transmission is not functioning properly, or the vehicle cannot be driven, see the NOTE and CAUTION below about checking the fluid level at colder temperatures.
2. Park the vehicle on level ground.
3. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60 seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of this procedure.
4. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake pedal.

802 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear position (allowing time for the transmission to fully engage in each position), ending with the transmission in PARK.
2. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated.
3. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick. Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if the actual level is at or above the hole. The fluid level should be between the "HOT" (upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating temperature. If the fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level. Donotoverfill. Use ONLY the specified fluid (see "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" for fluid specifications). After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait a

minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.

NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature, the fluid level should be between the two "COLD" (lower) holes on the dipstick with the fluid at 60-70°F / 16-21°C. Only use the COLD region of the dipstick as a rough reference when setting the fluid level after a transmission service or fluid change. Re-check the fluid level, and adjust as required, once the transmission reaches normal operating temperature.

CAUTION!

If the fluid temperature is below 50^ F ( 10^ C) it may not register on the dipstick. Donot add fluid until the temperature is elevated on oughto produce an accuratereading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, to warm the fluid.

1. Reinsert the dipstick. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.

NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube.

FluidAndFilterChanges—Eight-Speed Transmission

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle.

Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.

FluidAndFilterChanges

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

In addition, change the fluid and filters if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.

Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion

ProtectionOfBodyAndPaintFromCorrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme

804 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-body protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.

WhatCausesCorrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
  • Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

CAUTION!

• Donotuseabrasiveorstrongcleaningmaterials suchassteelwoolorscouringpowderthatwill scratchmetalandpaintedsurfaces.
• Useofpowerwashersexceeding1,200psi(8274 kPa)canresultindamageorremovalofpaintand decals.

SpecialCare

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 805

806 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WheelAndWheelTrimCare

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.

Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel's protective coating that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.

NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel surface.

CAUTION!

Avoidproductsorautomaticcarwashesthatuse acidicsolutionsorstrongalkalineadditivesorharsh brushes. Theseproductsandautomaticcarwashes maydamagethewheel'sprotectivefinish.Such damageisnotcoveredbytheNewVehicleLimited Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleanerorequivalentisrecommended.

When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently

damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CAUTION!

Donotusescouringpads,steelwool,abristlebrush, metalpolishesorovencleaner. Theseproductsmay damagethewheel'sprotectivefinish.Suchdamageis notcoveredbytheNewVehicleLimitedWarranty. Onlycarwashsoap,MOPARWheelCleaneror equivalentisrecommended.

NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.

DarkVaporOrBlackSatinChromeWheels

CAUTION!

If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chromewheels DONOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILDSOAP AND WATER WITH ASOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.

StainRepelFabricCleaningProcedure—If Equipped

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:

- Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel.

808 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products.

InteriorCare

Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting.

Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.

MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.

WARNING!

Donotusevolatilesolventsforcleaningpurposes. Manyarepotentiallyflammable,andifusedin closedareastheymaycauserespiratoryharm.

CAUTION!

DonotuseAlcoholandAlcohol-basedand/orKeton basedcleaningproductstocleanleatherseats, as damagetheseatmayresult.

CleaningHeadlights

Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 809

GlassSurfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.

CleaningPlasticInstrumentClusterLenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

810 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.

SeatBeltMaintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.

WARNING!

Afrayedortornbeltcouldripapartinacollisionand leaveyouwithnoprotection.Inspectthebeltsystem periodically,checkingforcuts,frays,orlooseparts. Damagedpartsmustbereplacedimmediately.Do notdisassembleormodifythesystem.Seatbelt assembliesmustbereplacedafteracollisionifthey havebeendamaged(i.e.,bentretractor,tornwebbing,etc.).

Tri-FoldSoftTonneauCoverCare

For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold Tonneau cover, use MOPAR® Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and MOPAR® Leather and Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.

Spray-OnBedliner-IfEquipped

During ownership, the shine and luster of the Spray-On Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road dirt, heavy-duty

hauling and hard water stains. Weathering and UV exposure will lead to fading, dulling, and loss of gloss over time.

To help maintain the appearance of your Spray-On Bedliner, the manufacturer recommends you periodically rinse all loose dirt from your truck bed and clean your truck at least twice per year using the MOPAR® Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner available at your local authorized dealer.

ToHelpMaintainTheAppearanceOfYourSpray-On Bedliner, FollowTheStepsBelow:

1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove any loose dirt and debris.
2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water with a soft cloth or brush.

3. Rinse bedliner with water.

4. Once dry, apply a small amount of MOPAR® Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel or sponge and wipe over the entire surface of the truck bedliner.

WARNING!

Do not use silicon-based protection products to clean your bedliner. Silicon-based products can become slippery and may result in personal injury.

Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to many different types of chemicals (including gasoline, oil, hydraulic fluids) for short periods of time. If a spill occurs on your Spray-On Bedliner, rinse the truck out as soon as possible to avoid permanent damage.

RepairingTheSpray-OnBedliner

While extremely tough, it is possible to damage a Spray-On Bedliner. One common condition is when

812 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

loading a heavy pallet and dragging that pallet across the floor of the bed. If a nail or sharp point is exposed under the weight of the pallet a scratch or tear is possible. While not covered by your new vehicle warranty, a cosmetic fix to cover the metal exposed by the scratch is required. To repair a tear or gouge, follow the directions provided in the MOPAR® Quick Repair Kit.

FUSES

WARNING!

- When replacing ablownfuse, always use an appropriatereplacement fuse with the same amprating as the original fuse. Never replace fuse with another fuse of higher amprating. Never

WARNING!(Continued)

replaceablownfusewithmetalwiresoranyother material. Failuretouseproperfusesmayresultin seriouspersonalinjury,fireand/orpropertydamage.

- Beforereplacingafuse, makesurethattheignition isoffandthatalltheotherservicesareswitchedoff and/ordisengaged.

- Ifthereplacedfuseblowsagain,contactanauthorizeddealer.

- Ifageneralprotectionfuseforsafetysystems(air bagsystem,brakingsystem),powerunitsystems (enginesystem,gearboxsystem)orsteeringsystem blows,contactanauthorizeddealer.

(Continued)

Power Distribution Center

The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.

Interior view of a vehicle engine compartment with a black arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

PowerDistributionCenterLocation

CavityCartridgeFuseMicroFuseDescription
F01 80 Amp Black Rad Fan Control Module – If equipped
F03 60 Amp Yellow Rad Fan – If Equipped
F05 40 Amp Green		Compressor for Air Suspension – If Equipped
F06 40 Amp Green Antilock Brakes/Electronic Stability ControlPump
F07 40 Amp Green Starter Solenoid
F08 20 Amp Blue (1500 LD/Cummins Diesel)			Emissions Diesel – If Equipped
F09 40 Amp Green (Special Services Vehicle & Cummins Diesel)30 Amp Pink (1500 LD Diesel)			Diesel Fuel Heater – If Equipped
F10 40 Amp Green Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2
F10 50 Amp Red Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2 – If			Equipped with Stop/Start
F11 30 Amp Pink		Integrated Trailer Brake Module – If Equipped
F12 40 Amp Green		Body Controller #3 / Interior Lights
F13 40 Amp Green			Blower Motor
F14 40 Amp Green Body Controller #4 / Power Locks
F16 30 Amp Pink Smart Bar – If Equipped
F19 20 Amp Blue (1500 LD Diesel)30 Amp Pink (Cummins Diesel)			SCR – If Equipped
F20 30 Amp Pink Passenger Door Module
F21 30 Amp Pink Drive Train Control Module
F22 20 Amp Blue30 Amp Pink (Cummins Diesel)			Engine Control Module
F23 30 Amp Pink Body Controller #1
F24 30 Amp Pink Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp Pink Front Wiper
F26 30 Amp Pink		Antilock Brakes/Stability Control Module/Valves
F28 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Backup Lights – If Equipped
F29 20 Amp Blue Trailer Tow Parking Lights – If Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink Trailer Tow Receptacle
F31 30 Amp Pink (1500 LD Diesel)			Urea Heater Control – If Equipped
F32 30 Amp Pink Drive Train Control Module – If Equipped
F33 20 Amp Blue Special Services Vehicle Only
F34 30 Amp Pink Vehicle System Interface Module #2 – If			Equipped
F35 30 Amp Pink Sunroof – If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink Rear Defroster– If Equipped
F37 30 Amp Pink		Cummins Diesel Fuel Heater #2 If Equipped
F38	30 Amp Pink		Power Inverter 115V AC– If Equipped
F39 30 Amp Pink		Vehicle System Interface Module #1– If Equipped
F41 10 Amp Red Active Grill Shutter — If Equipped
F42 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F44 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F46 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor
F49 10 Amp Red Instrument Panel Cluster
F50 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module – If Equipped
F51 10 Amp Red Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition
F52		5 Amp Tan	Battery Sensor
F53 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights
F54 20 Amp Yellow	Adjustable Pedals
F56		15 Amp Blue	Additional Diesel Content – If Equipped
F57 20 Amp Yellow	Transmission
F58 20 Amp Yellow	Spare Fuse
F59 10 Amp Red SCR Relay – If Equipped
F60		15 Amp Blue	Underhood Lamp
F61 10 Amp Red (1500 LD		Diesel & Cummins Diesel)	PM Sensor – If Equipped
F62 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning		Clutch
F63 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils		(Gas), Urea Heater (Cummins Diesel)
F64 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors / Powertrain
F65 10 Amp Red USB interface
F66 10 Amp Red Sunroof / Passenger Window Switches / Rain Sensor
F67 10 Amp Red CD / DVD / Bluetooth Hands-free			Module – If Equipped
F69		15 Amp Blue	Mod SCR 12V (Cummins Diesel) – If Equipped
F70		30 Amp Green	Fuel Pump Motor
F71 25 Amp Clear		Amplifier
F72 10 Amp Red Voltage Stabilizer Modules – If Equipped
F73 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Transfer Pump (HD Only) – If Equipped
F74 20 Amp Yellow (Gas Engine & 1500 LD Diesel)10 Amp Red (Cummins Diesel Engine)			Brake Vacuum Pump Gas/Diesel – If Equipped
F75 10 Amp Red Coolant Temperature Valve Actuator
F76 10 Amp Red Antilock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
F77 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Disconnect Module
F78 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module / Electric Power Steering
F79		15 Amp Blue	Clearance Lights
F80 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener / Compass
F81 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights
F82 10 Amp Red Steering Column		Control Module/ Cruise Control
F84 15 Amp Blue Switch Bank/Instrument Cluster
F85 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 10 Amp Red Air Suspension-If Equipped / Trailer Tow / Steering Column Control Module
F88 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster
F90/F91 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Rear seats) Customer Selectable
F93 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F94 10 Amp Red Shifter / Transfer Case Module
F95 10 Amp Red Rear Camera / Park Assist
F96 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch
F97		25 Amp Clear Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel - If Equipped
F98 25 Amp Clear Front Heated Seats – If Equipped
F99 10 Amp Red Climate Control
F100 10 Amp Red Upfitters – If Equipped
F101 15 Amp Blue Electrochromatic Mirror / Smart High Beams –If Equipped
F104 20 Amp Yellow Power		Outlets (Instrument Panel /Center Console)

CAUTION!

- When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positionedandfullylatched.Failuretodo somay allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.

CAUTION! (Continued)

- When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in an dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

(Continued)

822 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

VEHICLE STORAGE

If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we recommend that you take the following steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:

• Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
• Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

REPLACEMENT BULBS

All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base.

Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.

Interior Bulbs

	BulbNumber
Overhead Console Lamps	TS 212-9
Dome Lamp 7679
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.

Exterior Bulbs

	BulbNumber
Base Quad Headlamp – Low Beam	H11LL
Base Quad Headlamp – High Beam	9005LL
Front Turn Signal Lamp(Base Quad Headlamp)	3157NA

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 823

	BulbNumber
Premium Bi Halogen Projector Headlamp - Low Beam	HIR2LL
Premium Bi Halogen Projector Headlamp - High Beam	9005LL
Front Turn Signal Lamp (Premium Headlamp)	LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Fog Lamp (Horizontal shape)	9145
Fog Lamp (Vertical shape)	9006
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)	921K
Rear Cargo Lamp 921

	BulbNumber
LED Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)/Cargo Lamp	LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Cab Roof Marker Lamps 194	NA
Base Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp	3157K
Premium Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp	LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Premium Backup Lamp 7440	/W21W
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker Lamp	194
Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels)	194
Backup Lamp 921
Rear License Plate Lamp 194

824 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

BULB REPLACEMENT

NOTE:Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process.

Base Quad / Premium Bi-Halogen: Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, Front Park And Turn — If Equipped

1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the six plastic push-in fasteners that secure the upper radiator seal to the grille support and both fender ledges.

4. Remove the two plastic push-in rivets that secure the upper radiator seal to the radiator.

5. Remove the upper radiator seal from the vehicle.

6. Remove the two headlamp assembly attachment screws.

Close-up of a mechanical component with two arrows pointing to a highlighted section, no visible text or symbols.

HeadlampAssemblyAttachmentScrewLocations

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 825

1. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover over the access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield. Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained through this access hole.
2. Reach through the access hole of the wheel house splash shield and lift the slide lock upward far enough to disengage it from the lock post on the back of the front lamp unit housing.

Mechanical component diagram showing a piston and clamping mechanism with bidirectional arrow (no text or symbols)

SlideLock

1. Remove the headlamp assembly. Grasp the outboard edge of the lamp and pull it straight forward to disengage the ball stud from the plastic grommet.
2. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the bulb socket.

826 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Replace bulb(s) as necessary.

CAUTION!

• Donotcontaminatethebulbglassbytouchingit withyourfingersorbyallowingittocontactother oilysurfaces.Shortenedbulblifewillresult.
• Alwaysusethecorrectbulbsizeandtypefor replacement.Anincorrectbulbsizeortypemay overheatandcausedamagetothelamp,thebulb socket,orthelampwiring.

NOTE: There are access covers over both headlamp bulb access holes in the quad front lamp unit housing (if equipped). These covers MUST be reinstalled after the bulb has been replaced.

Fog Lamps — If Equipped

1. Reach under and behind the front bumper to access the back of the front fog lamp housing.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector from the fog lamp bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise 14 turn to unlock the bulb from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.

CAUTION!

Donotcontaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oil surfaces. Shortened bul blifewill result.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 827

Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal And Backup Lamps

1. Remove the two screws that pass through the bed sheetmetal.

Close-up of a car door panel with two arrows pointing to the lock and a cable (no text or symbols visible)

TailLampScrewLocations

1. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the outboard side of the lamp housing from the two plastic snap post retainers in the outer box side panel.

Close-up of a car door panel with an arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

PullingOutTheTailLamp

1. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the bulb socket.

828 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise 1/4 turn to unlock it from the housing.

2. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.

CAUTION!

Donotcontaminatethebulbglassbytouchingit withyourfingersorbyallowingittocontactother oilysurfaces.Shortenedbulblifewillresult.

1. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and housing.

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) With Cargo Lamp

1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to the body as shown.

Hand using a tool to adjust or install a car interior panel, with arrows indicating the process (no text or symbols visible)

CHMSLMountingScrewLocations

1. Separate the connector holding the housing and wiring harness to the body.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 829

Medical procedure image showing hands connecting a cable to a car's side panel with an arrow indicating the cable attachment point (no text or symbols present)

CHMSLConnectorLocation

1. Turn the desired bulb socket 14 turn and remove the socket and bulb from housing.

2. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.

Close-up of hands using a tool to adjust or install a mechanical component (no visible text or symbols)

CHMSLBulbAndSocket

830 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Donotcontaminatethebulbglassbytouchingit withyourfingersorbyallowingittocontactother oilysurfaces.Shortenedbulblifewillresult.

•Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
• Inside Bulb: Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp

1. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and housing.

Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped

1. Remove the two screws from the top of the lamp.

Illustration of a hand holding a pipette over a surface with two droplets (no text or symbols)

RemovingRearScrewFromClearanceLamp

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 831

1. Rotate the bulb socket 14 turn and pull it from the lamp assembly.

Illustration of a hand using a tool to apply a medical or diagnostic procedure to a device inside a rounded rectangular container (no text or symbols visible)

RemovingBulbSocketFromClearanceLamp

1. Pull the bulb straight from it's socket and replace.

Illustration of a hand holding a wrench and a small object, no text or symbols present

RemovingTheBulbFromTheBulbSocket

832 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear Wheels) — If Equipped

1. Loosen the two screws and the housing to gain access to the bulb sockets.

Close-up of a car's rear bumper with two arrows pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

ScrewLocations

1. Turn the socket 14 turn counterclockwise to access the bulb.
2. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
3. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and housing.

Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) — If Equipped

Side view of a car's front wheel and side bumper, showing two black arrows pointing to the rear wheel (no text or symbols present)

SideMarkerLampLocations

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 833

1. Push rearward on the side marker lamp assembly.
2. Pull the entire assembly from the fender.
3. Turn the socket 14 turn counterclockwise and remove from assembly to access the bulb.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from socket.
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and housing.

834 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUID CAPACITIES

	U.S.Metric
Fuel(Approximate)
1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 98 Liters
1500 Regular Cab Longbed/Crew Quad Cab Models (Optional) 32 Gallons 121 Liters
2500/3500 Shortbed Models 31 Gallons 117 Liters
2500/3500 Longbed Models 32 Gallons 121 Liters
EngineOilWithFilter
3.6L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engines (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
5.7L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 5W-30, API Certified), for 2500/3500 trucks operating under a gross combined weight rating greater than 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg).	7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
6.4L Engines (We recommend you use SAE 0W-40 engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.)	7 Quarts 6.6 Liters

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 835

	U.S.Metric
CoolingSystem
3.6L Engine (We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)	13.7 Quarts 13 Liters
5.7L Engine – 1500 Models (We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)	18.3 Quarts 17.3 Liters
5.7L Engine – 2500/3500 Models (We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)	18.3 Quarts 17.3 Liters
6.4 Liter Engine – 2500/3500 Models (We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)	16.6 Quarts 15.7 Liters

836 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

ComponentFluid,Lubricant,orGenuinePart
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA US Material Standard MS-6395 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine 2500/3500 trucks operating under a gross combined weight rating greaterthan 14,000 lbs/(6,350 kg.)	We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-30Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, Shell Helix® or equivalent. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 6.4L For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN. The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil UltraTM 0W-40 or equivalent MOPAR® engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.

838 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ComponentFluid,Lubricant,orGenuinePart
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR® brand	Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engine – If Equipped	87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 5.7L/6.4L Engines	89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol.

CAUTION!

• Mixingofenginecoolant(antifreeze)otherthan specifiedOrganicAdditiveTechnology(OAT)enginecoolant(antifreeze),mayresultinengine damageandmaydecreasecorrosionprotection.
  OrganicAdditiveTechnology(OAT)enginecool-antisdifferentandshouldnotbemixedwith HybridOrganicAdditiveTechnology(HOAT)enginecoolant(antifreeze)orany"globallycompatible"coolant(antifreeze).Ifanon-OATengine coolant(antifreeze)isintroducedintothecooling systeminanemergency,thecoolingsystemwill needtobedrained,flushed,andrefilledwithfresh OATcoolant(conformingtoMS.90032),byanauthorizeddealerassoonaspossible.
• Donotusewateraloneoralcohol-basedengine coolant(antifreeze)products.Donotuseadditional

CAUTION!(Continued)

rustinhibitorsorantirustproducts, astheymaynot becompatible with theradiatorenginecoolant and mayplugtheradiator.

- This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

(Continued)

840 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Chassis

ComponentFluid,Lubricant,orGenuinePart
Automatic Transmission – Eight-Speed Automatic Use only	MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATFTM Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Automatic Transmission – Six-Speed Automatic with Gasoline Engine (For Diesel Engine see Diesel Supplement)	Use only ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4® fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend MOPAR® ATF+4® fluid.
Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR® BW44-44 TransferCase Fluid.
Front Axle – 1500 Four-Wheel Drive Models We recommend	you use MOPAR® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Rear Axle – 1500 Models We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (MS-8985). Limited-Slip Rear Axles require the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml) MOPAR® Limited Slip Additive (MS-10111).
Front and Rear Axle – 2500/3500 Models We recommend	you use SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5Synthetic Axle Lubricant. Limited slip additive is not required for Limited-Slip Rear Axles.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3. If DOT 3brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Power Steering Reservoir – 2500/3500 Models	We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid +4 or MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

CONTENTS

■ MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE .....844 □ Maintenance Chart .....845

844 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

1500ModelsOnly

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.

2500-3500ModelsOnly

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km), twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.

SevereDutyAllModels

NOTE: Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is operated predominantly at idle or only very low engine RPM's. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.

OnceAMonthOrBeforeALongTrip:

• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level

• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, power steering (2500/3500 Models Only) and automatic transmission (six-speed only) and fill as needed

• Check function of all interior and exterior lights

Maintenance Chart

RequiredMaintenance

Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for required maintenance.

846 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

AtEveryOilChangeIntervalAsIndicatedByOil ChangeIndicatorSystem:

•Change oil and filter.

• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregularwear,evenifitoccursbeforetheoilindicator systemturnson.

• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.

•Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped with dipstick.

•Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.

AtEveryOilChangeIntervalAsIndicatedByOil ChangeIndicatorSystem:

•Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.

•Inspect exhaust system.

•Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.

•Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)	20,000	30,000	40,000	50,000	60,000	70,000	80,000	90,000	100,000	110,000	120,000	130,000	140,000	150,000
Or Years:	2 3 4	5 6 7 8	9 10	11 12	13 14	15
Or Kilometers:	32,000	48,000	64,000	80,000	96,000	112,000	128,000	144,000	160,000	176,000	192,000	208,000	224,000	240,000
Additional Inspections
InspecttheCV/Universaljoints.XXXXX
Inspectfrontsuspension,tierod ends,andreplaceifnecessary.	X		X		X		X		X		X		X
1500Models:Inspectthefrontandrearaxle surfaces.lfgearoilleakageis suspected,checkthefluidlevel. Ifusingyourvehicleforpolice, taxi,fleet,off-roadorfrequent trailertowing,changeaxlefluid.		X			X			X			X			X
2500/3500Models:Inspectthefrontandrearaxle surfaces.Ifgearoilleakageis suspected,checkthefluidlevel. Ifusingyourvehicleforpolice, taxi,fleet,off-roadorfrequent trailertowing,changeaxlefluid.	X		X		X			X			X
Inspectthebrakelinings,replace asnecessary.	X		X		X			X			X
Adjustparkingbrakeasnecessary.	X		X		X			X			X
Inspecttransfercasefluid.X					X						X
Additional Maintenance
Replaceengineairfilter.XXXXX
Replacesparkplugs.**									X
Flushandreplacetheengine coolantat10yearsor150,000 miles(240,000km)whichever comesfirst.									X					X
Changeautomatictransmission fluidandfilter(s)(six-speedauto-maticonly),ifusingyourvehicle forpolice,taxi,fleet,orfrequent trailertowing.					X

850 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)	20,000	30,000	40,000	50,000	60,000	70,000	80,000	90,000	100,000	110,000	120,000	130,000	140,000	150,000
Or Years:	2 3 4	5 6 7 8	9 10	11 12	13 14	15
Or Kilometers:	32,000	48,000	64,000	80,000	96,000	112,000	128,000	144,000	160,000	176,000	192,000	208,000	224,000	240,000
Changeautomatictransmission fluidandfilter(s)(six-speedauto-matically).											X
Inspectthetransfercasefluid, changeforanyofthefollowing: police,taxi,fleet,orfrequent trailertowing.					X						X
Changethetransfercasefluid.X
InspectandreplacePCVvalveif necessary.									X

** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.

WARNING!

• Youcanbebadlyinjuredworkingonorarounda motorvehicle.Donlyserviceworkforwhichyou havetheknowledgeandtherightequipment.If youhaveanydoubtaboutyourabilitytoperforma servicejob,takeyourvehicletoacompetentmechanic.
• Failuretoproperlyinspectandmaintainyourvehiclecouldresultinacomponentmalfunctionandeffectvehiclehandlingandperformance.This couldcauseanaccident.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

■SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE....855

□Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855

□Prepare A List....855

□Be Reasonable With Requests....855

■IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE....855

□FCA USA LLC Customer Center....856

□FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .....856

□In Mexico Contact....857

□Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857

□Service Contract....857

■WARRANTY INFORMATION....858

■MOPAR®PARTS....859

■REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS....859

□In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. .859

□In Canada. 859

■PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .....860

854 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

■DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES....861

□Treadwear....861

□Traction Grades....861

□Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the

856 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.

Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information:

• Owner's name and address

• Owner's telephone number (home and office)

• Authorized dealer name
  • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
  • Vehicle delivery date and mileage

FCA USA LLC Customer Center

P.O. Box 21-8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321-8004

Phone: [phone]

FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: [phone] English / [phone] French

In Mexico Contact

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 857

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call [phone] English / [phone] French).

858 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.

WARNING!

Engineexhaust(internalcombustionenginesonly), someofitsconstituents,andcertainvehiclecomponentscontain,oremit,chemicalsknowntotheState ofCaliforniatocausecancerandbirthdefects,or otherreproductiveharm.Inaddition,certainfluids containedinvehiclesandcertainproductsofcomponentwearcontain,oremit,chemicalsknowntothe StateofCaliforniatocausecancerandbirthdefects, orotherreproductiveharm.

WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

MOPAR® PARTS

MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form.

NOTE:A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

ServiceManuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

DiagnosticProcedureManuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

Owner's Manuals

These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.

Call toll free at:

•1-800-890-4038(U.S.)
•1-800-387-1143(Canada)

Or

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

• www.techauthority.com

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

862 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

WARNING!

Thetractiongradeassignedtothistireisbasedon straight-aheadbrakingtractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

Thetemperaturegradeforthistireisestablished for atirethatisproperlyinflatedandnotoverloaded. Excessivespeed,under-inflation,orexcessiveloading,eitherseparatelyorincombination,cancause heatbuildupandpossibletirefailure.

INDEX

864 INDEX

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze)....791 Air Conditioner Maintenance....779
Adding Fuel .655 Air Conditioning .400, 405
Adjustable Pedals....184 Air Conditioning Controls....400, 405
Airbag. Air Conditioning, Operating Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Bag Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 7 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400, 405, 418, 779
Air bag Operation....70 Air Pressure, Tires....621, 632
Air Bag Warning Light 78 Air Suspension .527
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7 Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Event Data Recorder (EDR)....80 Alarm, Panic....28
Front Air Bag....Ala6n7 (Security Alarm)....21
If A Deployment Occurs....7 6 Alarm System (Security Alarm)....2 1
Knee Impact Bolsters 71 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle 7
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . 8 0 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790, 834
Side Air Bags....71 Disposal....793
Air bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 7 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Air bag Light....78,116,287 Anti-Lock Warning Light....287,594
Air bag Maintenance. 80 Appearance Care .803
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)....773 Ashtray....231

INDEX 865

Auto Down Power Windows 47

Automatic Door Locks 39

Automatic Headlights....167

Automatic High Beams .....169

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .....418

Automatic Transmission....463,803

Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802, 803

Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803

Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803

Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799, 800, 801

Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799, 840

Shifting. 472, 485

Special Additives....800

Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798, 840

Axle Lubrication....798

Back-Up Camera....208

Bar, Stabilizer/Sway System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

Battery....778

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ..... 3 0

Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Body Builders Guide....6

Body Mechanism Lubrication....781

B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615

Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796, 840

Brake System....592,796

Anti-Lock (ABS)....593

Fluid Check....796

Master Cylinder....796

Parking....590

Warning Light .287

Brake/Transmission Interlock. 462

Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822, 824

Bulbs, Light....1 1 8 ,

Cab Top Clearance Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830

Camera, Rear....208

Camper....267

Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834

Caps, Filler Oil (Engine) .....772

Power Steering....589

Radiator (Coolant Pressure)....792

Carbon Monoxide Warning ..... 1 1 5 ,

Cargo Light....175

Car Washes....804

Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Center High Mounted Stop Light .....828

Center Seat Storage Compartment .....239

Certification Label. 658

Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610

Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light)....287,766

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..... 1 1 4

Checks, Safety. 1 1 4

Child Restraint....82

Child Restraints Booster Seats....87

Child Restraints 82

Child Seat Installation....100, 102

5 1How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . . 9 8

Infants And Child Restraints....85

Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint ..... 9 7

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt....99

INDEX 867

Locating The LATCH Anchorages ..... 9 4

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ..... 8 9

Older Children And Child Restraints ..... 8 5

Seating Positions....8 8

Cigar Lighter....231

Clean Air Gasoline....648

Cleaning Wheels....806

Climate Control....400, 410

Automatic....410

Cold Weather Operation....453

Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .....397

Compact Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627

Console, Overhead .....210

Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857

Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .....792

Cooling System. .788

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze)....791

Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834

Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789, 793, 794

Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793

Drain, Flush, and Refill .....789

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793, 794

Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795

Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792

Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .....790, 834, 836

Corrosion Protection....803

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Customer Assistance....855

Customer Programmable Features .....375

Data Recorder, Event 80

Daytime Running Lights....168

Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Defroster, Windshield ..... 1 1 6 ,

Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .....178

Differential, Limited-Slip .....562

Dipsticks Power Steering .....589

Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754

Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)....793

Door Locks Door Locks....37

Key Fob....

Remote 37

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) 37

Door Locks, Automatic 39

Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Driving Off-Pavement....544

0 Off-Road ....544 Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing Water ....564

Dual Rear Wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636, 699

E-85 Fuel....652

Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Electronically Shifted Transfer Case. .500, 506, 513, 520 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 Anti-Lock Brake System .593

Brake Assist System .595

Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

INDEX 869

Electronic Range Select (ERS) .....470, 480, 492

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .....185

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .....598

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . .208, 299

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . .299

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Setup

Menu.299

EVIC Messages....299

Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Emergency Brake....590

Emergency, In Case of

Freeing Vehicle When Stuck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

Tow Hooks....749

Emission Control System Maintenance .....766

Engine. .763,764

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773

Block Heater....459

Break-In Recommendations....1 1 3

Compartment....762

Compartment Identification .....762, 763, 764

Coolant (Antifreeze)....836

Exhaust Gas Caution....1 1 5 , 6 5 1

Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647, 834

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

O i l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769, 834, 836

Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772

Oil Selection....770,834

Oil Synthetic....772

Overheating....697

870 INDEX

Engine Oil Viscosity	.771, 772	Flat Tire Stowage	.716, 737
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart	.771	Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Enhanced Accident Response Feature	7 7	Cruising Range	.654
Entry System, Illuminated	2 3	Engine Oil	.653
Ethanol	.648	Fuel Requirements	.652, 653
Event Data Recorder	8 0	Maintenance	.655
Exhaust Gas Caution	1 1 5 , 6 5	Replacement Parts	.654
Exhaust System	1 1 5 , 7 8	6Starting	.654
Exterior Lighting	.166	Flooded Engine Starting	.453
Exterior Lights	1 1 8	Fluid, Brake	.840
		Fluid Capacities	.834
Filters		Fluid Leaks	1 1 8
Air Cleaner	.773	Fluid Level Checks
Engine Oil	.773, 836	Brake	.796
Engine Oil Disposal	.773	Power Steering	.589

Flashers

Turn Signal 1 1 8 , 176, 287

INDEX 871

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts .....836

Fog Lights. 171, 287, 826

Fold Flat Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697

Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748

Front Axle (Differential)....798

Fuel. 647

Adding....655

Clean Air .648

Ethanol....648

Filler Cap (Gas Cap)....657

Gasoline....647

Methanol....648

Octane Rating....647,836

Requirements.647,834

Tank Capacity .834

Fuel, Flexible....652

Fuses....812

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) .....212, 220

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657, 765

Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648

Gasoline (Fuel)....647

Gasoline, Reformulated .....648

Gauges

Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Tachometer....287

Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473, 486

Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750

General Information....646

Glass Cleaning .809

Grocery Bag Retainer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660

872 INDEX

Guide, Body Builders....6

GVWR....658

Hazard

Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow

Standing Water....564

Hazard Warning Flasher....697

Headlights....824

Automatic....167

Cleaning....809

High Beam....177

High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .....177

Passing....177

Switch....166

Head Restraints....155

Heated Mirrors....140, 245

Heater. 400, 405

Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .177

Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604

Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604

Hitches

Trailer Towing....668

Hoisting. .742

HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) .....212

Hood Release....164

Hub Caps. .741

Ignition....16

K e y .12, 16

Ignition Key Removal....16

Illuminated Entry 23

Immobilizer (Sentry Key)....18

Inflation Pressure Tires....632

Information Center, Vehicle .....299, 328

Inside Rearview Mirror .....126, 133

Instrument Cluster .....287

Instrument Panel and Controls....284

INDEX 873

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .....809

Integrated Trailer Brake Controls....674

Interior Appearance Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808

Interior Lights....172

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Introduction 4

Inverter Outlet (115V)....232

Jack Location....701,721

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

Key Fob

Programming Additional Key Fobs ..... 2 0

Programming Additional Transmitters ..... 2 0

Key-In Reminder 18

Keyless Enter-N-Go....42, 451

Keyless Enter-N-GoTM 42

Lock The Vehicle's Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365, 386

Passive Entry 4 2

Passive Entry Programming .....42, 365, 386

Keyless Entry System 24

Key, Replacement....19

Keys 12

Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) 18

Lane Change and Turn Signals....176

Lane Change Assist. 177

Lap/Shoulder Belts. 52

Latches....1 1 8

Lead Free Gasoline....647

Leaks, Fluid 118

Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630

Light Bulbs 11 8, 8 2

874 INDEX

Lights	1 1 8 , 1 6	Hazard Warning Flasher	.697
Airbag	.78, 116, 287	Headlights	.166
Alarm	.287	High Beam	.177, 287
Anti-Lock	.287	High Beam Indicator	.287
Anti-Lock Warning	.594	High Beam/Low Beam Select	.177
Automatic Headlights	.167	Hill Descent Control Indicator	.604
Brake Assist Warning	.602	Illuminated Entry	2 3
Brake Warning	.287	Instrument Cluster	.287
Bulb Replacement	.824	Interior	.172, 173, 175, 211
Cap Top Clearance	.830	Oil Pressure	.287
Cargo	.175	Passing	.177
Center Mounted Stop	.828	Seat Belt Reminder	.287
Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator)	.287	Security Alarm	.287
Courtesy/Reading	.173, 175, 211	Service	.822, 824
Daytime Running	.168	Side Marker	.833
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator	.602	Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS)	.287, 638
Exterior	1 1 8	Traction Control	.602
Fog	.171, 287, 826	Transfer Case	.499
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator	.499	Turn Signal	1 1 8 , 176, 824, 827

INDEX 875

Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) .....287

Limited-Slip Differential .....562,798

Loading Vehicle....658

Tires

Locks 37

Automatic Door 39

Child Protection 40

Door 37

Power Door 38

Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638

Lubrication, Body .781

Lug Nuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698, 699

Maintenance Free Battery....778

Maintenance Procedures....768

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .766

Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860

Manual Transmission

Fluid Level Check....799

Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840

.6Memory Seat....159

Methanol....648

Mirrors....126

Electric Powered....138

Heated....140

Memory....159

Outside....134

Rearview....126, 133

Trailer Towing .....140

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ..... 7

Monitor, Tire Pressure System .....638

MOPAR® Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767, 859

MTBE/ETBE....648

Multi-Function Control Lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

876 INDEX

Navigation System (Uconnect® gps) .....208

New Vehicle Break-In Period 1 1

[Non-Text]

Occupant Restraints 4

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .....647

Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544, 566

Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544, 566

Oil, Engine....769, 836

Capacity....834

Change Interval....770

Dipstick....769

Disposal....773

Filter....773,836

Filter Disposal .773

Identification Logo....771

Recommendation....770,834

Synthetic....772

Viscosity....771,772,834

Oil Filter, Selection .....773

Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765

Operating Precautions....765

Operator Manual (Owner's Manual) 4

Outside Rearview Mirrors .....134

Overdrive....482,493

Overdrive OFF Switch....482,493

Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Overheating, Engine .697

Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) ..... 4, 860

Paint Care....803

Panic Alarm....28

Parking Brake....590

ParkSense® System, Rear .....190, 199

Passing Light 177

Passive Entry 42

Pedals, Adjustable....184

INDEX 877

Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322, 350

Pets....1

Pets, Transporting....1

Pickup Box....251, 253, 270

Placard, Tire and Loading Information .....616

Power Distribution Center (Fuses) .....813

Door Locks 38

Mirrors....138

Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .....225, 232

Seats 143

Sliding Rear Window....246

Steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587, 588, 589

Sunroof....222

Windows....46

Power Steering Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840

Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 62

Pretensioners

3 Seat Belts 63

3Programmable Electronic Features .....322, 350

Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) .24

Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .....789, 792

Radio Operation....398

Radio (Sound Systems)....395

Rain Sensitive Wiper System .....180

Ramp Travel Index....545

Rear Axle (Differential) .....798

Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails....265

Rear ParkSense System .....190, 199

Rear Seat, Folding....152, 153

Rear Window Features .....245

Rear Window, Sliding .....246

Reclining Rear Seats....151

Recorder, Event Data 80

878 INDEX

Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686

Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) .....689

Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) .....692

Reformulated Gasoline....648

Refrigerant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780, 781

Reminder, Seat Belt. 51

Remote Control Starting System 34

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 26 FCC General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 Programming Additional Key Fobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 0 Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . . . . 2 0

Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .....396

Remote Starting Uconnect® Customer Programmable Features....367, 388 Uconnect® Settings....367, 388

Remote Starting System. 3 4

Replacement Bulbs....822

Replacement Keys 19

Replacement Parts. 767

Replacement Tires....631

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859

Restraint, Head. 155

Restraints, Child 82

Restraints, Occupant 4 9

Rotation, Tires .....635

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. 11 6

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .....118

Safety Defects, Reporting....859

Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608

Safety Tips....114

Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844

Seat Belt

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation....5 5

Lap/Shoulder Belts 52

INDEX 879

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting....60 Seats....142, 151
Pregnant Women....62 Adjustment....142
Seat Belt Extender....6 2 Easy Entry....162
Seat Belt Pretensioner....6 3 Folding Floor....246
Seat Belt Reminder....51 Memory....159
Seat Belt System....49 Power....143
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152, 153
Seat Belt Reminder 51 Reclining Rear 151
Seat Belts. .51, 116 Security Alarm. .21
Child Restraint 82 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .836
Extender 62 SENTRY KEY®
Front Seat....51, 52, 55 FCC General Information....20
Inspection....1 1 6 Key Programming....2 0
Operating Instructions....5 5 Sentry Key (Immobilizer)....1 8
Pregnant Women....62 Sentry Key Replacement....19
Pretensioners....63 Service Assistance....855
Rear Seat 52 Service Contract .857
Reminder....287 Service Manuals....860
Untwisting Procedure....60 Settings, Personal....322, 350

880 INDEX

Shifting....460

Automatic Transmission....463, 472, 485

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498

Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer Case

Neutral (N)....689

Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N)....692

Shift Lever Override....750

Shoulder Belts....5

Signals, Turn....1 1 8 , 176, 287

Sliding Rear Window Power....246

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632

Snow Plow. 682

Snow Tires....625

Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627, 628

Spark Plugs....836

Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Speedometer. 287

Stabilizer/Sway Bar System....542

Starting. 34, 450

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Remote 34

Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) .....450

Steering Power....587, 588, 589

37 Wheel, Heated .182

Wheel, Tilt .....181

Steering Wheel Audio Controls....396

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .396

Storage Compartment, Center Seat .....239

Storage, Vehicle .....420, 822

Storing Your Vehicle .....822

Sun Roof....222

Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ..... 6 7

Supplemental Tire Pressure Information .....632

INDEX 881

Suspension, Air. 527

Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604

Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772

System, Remote Starting 34

Tachometer. 287

Tailgate....267

Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .....418

Tilt Steering Column....181

Tip Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . .615, 616, 632

Tire Markings....608

Tires....118,6

Aging (Life of Tires)....630

Air Pressure....620

Chains 632

Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627

Dual....636,699

General Information....620

High Speed 623

Inflation Pressures....621

Life of Tires .630

Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615, 616

Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .....638

Pressure Warning Light....287

Quality Grading .861

Radial 623

Replacement....631

Rotation....635

Safety .608, 620

Sizes .610

0,86low Tires....625

Spinning 629

Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629

Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669

Tonneau Cover .810

Tonneau Cover Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810

Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484, 495

Tow Hooks, Emergency .749

Towing.660,754

Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754

Guide....669

Recreational....686

Weight....669

Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686

Traction....563

Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)....604

Trailer Towing.660

Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681

Hitches....668

Minimum Requirements....670

Mirrors....140

Trailer and Tongue Weight....669

Wiring....679

Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669

Trailer Weight....669

Transfer Case....799

Electronically Shifted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500, 506, 513, 520

Fluid. 840

Transmission....463

Automatic....463, 472, 485, 799

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840

Maintenance.799

Shifting. 460

Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .30

Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .24

Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..... 2 4

Tread Wear Indicators 629

Turn Signals....176, 287, 824, 827

INDEX 883

Uconnect®

Customer Programmable Features .....367, 388

Operation....395

Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367, 388

Uconnect® Settings

Customer Programmable Features .....42, 365, 386

Passive Entry Programming .....42, 365, 386

Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365, 386

Uconnect® Voice Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Uniform Tire Quality Grades .....861

Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)

Programming HomeLink®. . . . . . .214, 215, 217, 218

Unleaded Gasoline....647

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt 60

Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 6

Vehicle Loading....616,658

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..... 7

Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420, 822

Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771, 772

Voice Recognition System (VR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423

Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .287

Warnings and Cautions. 6

Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858

Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 785

Washing Vehicle....804

Water

Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564

Wheel and Wheel Trim....806

Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806

Wheel Cover .741

884 INDEX

Winch....568

Accessories....572

Operation....573

Rigging Techniques....585

Usage....568

Wind Buffeting....49,225

Window Fogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421

Windows....46

Power 46

Rear Sliding....246

Reset Auto-Up 48

Wind Buffeting 49

Windshield Defroster. 1 1 6

Windshield Washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178, 179, 785

Fluid....178,785

Windshield Wiper Blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782

Windshield Wipers....178

Wiper Blade Replacement....782

Wipers, Intermittent .....178

Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....180

INSTALLATIONOFRADIOTRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT

Specialdesignconsiderationsareincorporatedinto this vehicle'selectronicsystemtoprovideimmunitytoradio frequencysignals.Mobiletwo-wayradiosandtelephone equipmentmustbeinstalledproperlybytrainedpersonnel.Thefollowingmustbeobservedduringinstallation.

The positive power connections should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. Then negative power connections should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused.

Antennasfortwo-wayradiosshouldbemountedonthe roofotherearareaofthevehicle.Careshouldbeused inmountingantennaswithmagnetbases.Magnetsmay affecttheaccuracyoroperationofthecompasson vehiclessoequipped.

Theantennacableshouldbeasshortaspracticaland routedawayfromthevehiclewiringwhenpossible.Use onlyfullyshieldedcoaxialcable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to other radioto ensure a low standing wave ratio (SWR).

Mobileradioequipmentwithoutoutputpowergreaterthan normalmayrequirespecialprecautions.

Allinstallationsshouldbecheckedforpossibleinterferencebetweenthecommunicationsequipmentandthe vehicle'selectronicsystems.

RAM

SERVICE

STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS ^8

FCA US LLC

15D241-126-AG SEVENTH EDITION PRINTED IN U.S.A.